Skip to content
Logo-main-white.860316a8

I/O Fund

  • Home
  • Free Stock Analysis
  • AI Stocks
  • BEST OF 2025
  • Analysts
  • Nvidia Hub
  • About
    • Case Studies
    • About Us
    • Premium Services
    • Pricing
    • Notable Wins
    • I/O Fund Reviews
    • Media
  • Contact Us

Category: Broad Market Today

The IPO Glut of 2020: Why Valuations Have Gone Too Far

Posted on June 30, 2026June 30, 2026 by io-fund
The IPO Glut of 2020: Why Valuations Have Gone Too Far

This article was originally published on Forbes on Jun 18, 2021,12:43am EDToriginally published on Forbes on Jun 18, 2021,12:43am EDT

There is an outsized risk with Snowflake, AirBnB, DoorDash and Roblox’s IPOs showing an extreme increase in valuation since the last private funding round that will be hard for the public markets to absorb. I dug up some comparative research between 2019 IPOs and 2020 IPOs and describe this outsized risk, which is 10-fold from the IPO class of 2019.

More times than not, IPOs lead to losses for retail investors and there are specific reasons as to why. These reasons have only gotten worse with loosened IPO regulations. We also look at why raising capital at the same time as a Direct Listing shifts too much risk to the general public.

The IPOs of 2020: Snowflake, AirBnB, DoorDash and Roblox (2021)

Despite the hype that flashy IPOs draw, more than 60 percent of the 7,000 IPOs from 1975 to 2011 had negative absolute returns five years later. However, the 40% odds for success through 2011 are better odds than what investors face today.

IPOs in Review: 2019

Before we talk about the serious red flags in the IPO scene of 2020, I want to visit what 2019 looked like as a reference point.

In 2019, Zoom Video and Crowdstrike went public with the fastest growth levels the tech industry has ever seen. We will use these two as a baseline because their top line financials at time of IPO continue to exceed any tech IPO we have seen since.

Source: Snowflake IPO: In-Depth Analysis

In the case of Crowdstrike, the company’s last private valuation prior to going public was in May of 2018 for $3 billion. The initial price that institutions paid was $7 billion and the shares began trading at a $11 billion valuation. When we average out the premium paid between the last private valuation and the opening price of $8 billion on a per month basis for the time it took to go public, retailers paid a premium of $615 million per month across 13 months.

Crowdstrike went on to have a volatile trading history in the first year with a peak to trough drop of roughly 50% within six months.

YCHARTS

Zoom Video’s last private valuation prior to going public was $1 billion in April of 2017. The initial price institutions paid was $9.2 billion in April of 2019 with shares opening at a $20 billion valuation. When the $19 billion is averaged out across the 27 months between Zoom’s last private round, the premium retailers paid on valuation is $703 million per month. This is about $90 million more per month than Crowdstrike.

Notably, I covered Zoom Video as the “Best Silicon Valley IPO” at the time of its listing but the I/O Fund waited until the following January 2020 to enter the stock at $62. Despite perfect earnings beats, it took Zoom Video an entire year before it consistently traded above its opening price

The point of this is to illustrate that tech’s top growth companies had their valuations increase an average of $600 to $700 million per month range since the last private valuation. These opening prices, which ranged from an increase in valuation of $5 to $10 billion required a year to absorb.

IPOs of 2020 and 2021:

The opening valuation for Zoom Video caused Barron’s to call Zoom Video’s IPO a Crazy Bubble. If that’s a crazy bubble, then I’m not sure what the words are for 2020. The word “glut” comes to mind as Snowflake, AirBnB, DoorDash and Roblox increased their valuations from the last private by an order of magnitude compared to the IPO class of 2019.

Let me explain:

Snowflake’s last private funding round was at a valuation of $12.4 billion in February 2020 with an initial price of $33 billion and an opening price of $68 billion in September of 2020. That means Snowflake opened trading at a premium of $8 billion per month since the last private valuation compared to Zoom’s $700 million and Crowdstrike’s $600 million. Snowflake essentially 5X’d it’s valuation in 7 months while revenue declined.

This also means the market must absorb a $35 billion premium on top of the initial price. How long do you think that will take considering it took Zoom Video a year to recoup a $10 billion premium? It’s impossible for a valuation to spike that much in one day without it taking a substantial amount of time for the valuation to catch up to financials.

This is a tough pill to swallow as we’ve published favorably on Snowflake as a company and a product. Yet, there is no real valuation here if the last private valuation was $12 billion within the last year; it’s simply pie-in-the-sky pricing that insiders hope will last. The company did not change and there were no catalysts.

Consumer favorites AirBnB and DoorDash came public recently and the difference in private valuation versus public valuation is even more absurd as these companies carry a higher risk in terms of performance post Covid. AirBnB’s last private valuation was on April of 2020 for $18 billion. Eight months later the initial pricing was at $42 billion and the opening price at $90 billion.

2020 IPOs Increased $7 to $9 Billion Per Month in Valuation Compared to $600M-$700M in 2019 – I/O FUND

AirBnB’s opening price equates to $9 billion in valuation per month in premium that retailers are paying on a company that was worth $18 billion earlier in the year with the same growth numbers and revenue. In fact, AirBnB only grew revenue by $1 billion in 2019 before declining by $1 billion in annual revenue in 2020 due to Covid. The forward revenue for this year is $300 million more than the revenue in 2019. Most certainly, growth did not drive the opening valuation.

DoorDash carries the most risk of the four names we are analyzing as the economy opening up will translate to fewer food deliveries. This company had a $16 billion valuation in its last private round in June of 2020. The initial price was at a $34 billion valuation and the opening price at a $72 billion valuation.

Technically, DoorDash should be valued below its Covid valuation as there’s more risk with the economy opening up as to how the company will perform. All Covid winners have taken a hit to their valuations: Zoom, Crowdstrike, Peloton, etcetera.

Roblox is another blatant example of how IPO valuations are overpriced for retailers. The company raised a private round at $29 billion in February of 2021 before going public at a $39 billion valuation one month later. This means retailers were charged at $10 billion per month premium. We will have to check back this time next year to see how long it took for Roblox’s stock price to permanently absorb the $10 billion it charged retailers. Notably, all of these examples do well in bull markets while the real impact comes out during downturns.

I/O FUND

Often times, retailers will cheer on 15% or 30% gains in one day when a stock really pops. Yet, most IPOs are seeing 80% to 100% gains for an average of $30 billion generated in one day between the initial price and the opening price. What retailers must understand is that valuations have a ceiling and this means the company must earn this $30 billion pop in valuation over time.

How Much Made in a Day from Initial to Opening – I/O FUND

SEC IPO Regulations that Have Changed:

Here are a few of the new regulations being leveraged:

· Direct listings can now raise capital, which means retailers are exposed to more companies that have no lockup expiration. The company can list at a high valuation and insiders can liquidate as soon as it’s listed. You’ll see below examples of failed direct listings, such as Spotify and Slack. Prior to the recent change, direct listings could not raise capital.

· According to Forbes, SPACs made up 50% of the IPO market last year. The volume is high because SPACs allow companies to go public faster. Although there are some gems that have come from reverse mergers, SPACs often have a complicated business history and some proxy statements have become the subject of litigation.

· SPACs also come with fees known as “the promote” which allows 20% of the shares to go to the SPAC manager. The 20% of shares is effectively taken from investors plus 5% in other fees.

· The SEC may start to treat warrants as liabilities which could slow the pace of SPACs; this comes after nearly 250 SPACs went public last year and 340 have already gone public this year. The percentage of IPOs that were SPACs is at 72% this year, up from 55% this year. The speed in which SPACs go public has created byzantine filings.

· Traditionally, lockup periods lasted 180 days yet we are seeing many creative ways of approaching lockup periods, such as partial lockup expirations that come sooner or opportunities for employees to sell before investors. “Blue Sky Laws” were put into place to help protect investors by ensuring full lockup period yet this has become looser over the last few years. If a company has a partial lockup period expire, they often bury this in the S-1 filing. 

A Note on Direct Listings

Retailers have no voice on Wall Street, and this is evident by the way that venture capitalists openly criticize the IPO process because they’d like to see the fat surplus between the initial price and the opening price go to the company and other insiders rather than institutions.

Translation – it’s okay to keep charging high prices to retail, but instead, make sure the cash is funneled to the right people. Direct listings accomplish nothing when it comes to the outsized risk that IPOs have presented in the last year; which is raise money, continue to charge the $7 to $9 billion per month in valuation to retailers, and have no lockup expiration (rarely, does a private company increase $7 to $9 billion in one year let alone one month)

Direct listings propagate high valuations because the stock does not need to perform for six months; it can immediately fail and still provide an exit. In this case, 100% of the risk is transferred to retail at the open trade and there are crumbs left in terms of reward.

I was critical of Slack’s DPO two years ago and also Spotify’s DPO. Notably, Slack is a stock my company ended up owning after it plummeted more than 50% from its DPO opening price. From experience, the I/O Fund has concluded there is too much downward pressure from DPOs and the immediate exit for insiders is a flag as a serious company will look for long-term investors. 

I/O FUND

You can access my previous analysis on Slack’s DPO here where I stated:

Slack is not looking to raise money, and has chosen a direct listing as opposed to a traditional initial public offering. This means insiders will initially sell their stock and there will be no lock-up period. Eliminating the lock-up period creates even more risk than usual compared to traditional IPOs that have six-month lock-up periods.

Around the time of Slack’s DPO, we discussed why we did not like this process. We cited Spotify as an example as Spotify took twenty-four months to reach its opening price again, and Slack – arguably one of the best products to come out of Silicon Valley – only touched its opening price again 12 months later after Salesforce announced they were acquiring the company.

That’s a very long time to park your money with no return not to mention the scary roller coaster ride on the way down.

Know Who Your Advocates Are:

Retailers need representation and better information on IPOs and valuations. As advocates for retailers, we often hold off from buying IPOs until after the lock-up period, and we always disclose every entry and exit we make with real-time notifications. If we do participate, it’s with an active stance and the understanding we may exit before the lock-up period expires if the chart looks weak. We will then re-enter when the stock stabilizes – usually a year or so after the IPO.

In the case of the new class of IPOs, there’s a chance the companies don’t stabilize for many years as the true valuation is likely the initial price that institutions paid (i.e., there’s a reason they paid that price and not a penny more – both sides have teams of professionals to fairly price the transaction for a funding round).

Confirmation bias is also commonly used against public investors. In this case, because DoorDash and Airbnb are well-known and well-loved consumer brands, the opening price was especially lavish. I had gone to great lengths to warn retailers about Uber while many talking heads said the stock could reach $100 or higher. That analysis is worth a read as it became one of my best calls in terms of protecting losses for my readers.

Conclusion:

There is undeniable evidence that something odd happened in 2021 in terms of the run-up in valuation on IPOs as we saw the premium retailers pay grow from $600-$700 million to $8-10 billion per month since the last private valuation. The glut in the IPO process will eventually catch up to market as this run-up is not sustainable without a meaningful change in story or re-acceleration in growth (the opposite happened; there was as deceleration in growth in all four companies). 

The loosening of IPO regulations leading to outsized risk is reminiscent of loose lending laws during the financial crisis. If history is any indication, the banks will be bailed out and the individual will suffer. Therefore, we do our best to avoid participating in frenzies as there is no magical market where valuations don’t have a ceiling, rather they can hit a ceiling very quickly and take time (years) to be absorbed.

Note: If we do keep our Snowflake position, we will plan to exit on any weakness. This is distinct from the list of stocks we hold with no plans to exit.

Posted in Broad Market Today, Market TrendsLeave a Comment on The IPO Glut of 2020: Why Valuations Have Gone Too Far

Three Risk Management Tools the I/O Fund Offers

Posted on June 30, 2026June 30, 2026 by io-fund

The thrill of making money in the stock market is short-lived if an investor doesn’t have a plan to protect their gains. All too often, investors cheer their paper returns, only to find out later, the money they made evaporates on the next drawdown.

Considering the advancements we are seeing within the tech sector, discussions around how to maximize exposure in tech while better managing the downside are more necessary than ever. Our mission is to solve this dilemma, which we consider to be the billion-dollar question – how to safely participate in tech. We feel strongly that this question has not been answered and is widely ignored within the retail world.

The below methods are how we manage risk in an all-tech portfolio. We are not financial advisors, rather we transparently disclose our buys/sells in various positions and provide the risk management tools that we use in our own portfolio. Please refer to our Terms and Conditions here.

The I/O Fund works hard to provide retail investors with tools to manage risk. Five years ago, our site pioneered offering real-time trade alerts, an actively managed portfolio including broad market webinars, and more recently, we released a hedging plan in 2022. Below are three tools that allow our Members to become acquainted with how we reduce risk, which has led to proven outperformance since our inception.

Risk Management Tool #1: Real-time trade alerts

All of our buys, sells, trims and adds are disclosed in real-time via text messages and through email alerts. This multi-dimensional approach is unparalleled among research sites, yet is extremely effective. For example, we sent real-time trade alerts when we were buying Nvidia in October of 2022 at $10.85 for gains that greatly outperformed a buy-and-hold strategy. We also sent trade alerts when we were selling Bitcoin in the $58K range, and then subsequently sent buy alerts when we bought back in the $16K to $18K range.

To put it simply:

  • When you see sell or trim alerts, it’s because we are deeming the risk too high to enter or add to the position.
  • When you see buy or add alerts, we believe it is good timing to create a bigger position.

Tech is especially sensitive to the broad market, thus, often times when we buy or sell, it has very little to do with the stock itself. Many of our readers simply use our trade alerts as additional information to understand if the market is risk-on or risk-off, in addition to being offered valuable (and rare) information on whether we are currently building a position or waiting for a better opportunity.

Portfolio Management and How to Read Our Trade Alerts

On Cash – We are an all-tech portfolio that leans into hedging to manage risk. We also will raise cash when we believe the market and economic environment support this.  For example, we had between 0 – 10% cash in late 2020 – 2021 and have held between 5% to as high as 45% cash from 2023 through the end of 2024.

While we will, at times, mention in our weekly webinars where we are in terms of cash and margin, we do not list our cash position as part of our posted portfolio. The reason for this is because we are not financial advisors and so cannot and do not want to take on the role of managing others’ money indirectly. How one holds cash is based on their personal risk profile, which is based on a host of factors unique to that individual. What may be appropriate for us may not be appropriate for someone in their early 20s or in retirement. Instead, we provide our broad risk analysis and hedging, which is derived from technical analysis and quant signals. We also provide weekly broad market webinars to discuss risk in the markets. It is up to every individual investor on how to best use this information, or not.

How to read SMS alerts – We invest with our own capital. All the trade notifications that we send out are first discussed well in advance in our weekly webinars. We provide the buy zones and sell zones, which readers can use for their own investment strategies. Once we hit a buy zone, and we have determined that we want to own that stock, we execute a position and send that information out to our readers.

When a trade alert says “Bought XYZ at $30.36 – 3% Added” we are saying that we bought XYZ at the price listed and the amount we added is based on 3% of our total portfolio’s value.

For example, if we have a portfolio $1000, and $200 (20% cash) is in cash while $800 is invested (80% invested), the above example will buy $30 of XYZ (3% of the total, including cash). All buy alerts and sell alerts include cash, so we are basing the percentages on the total value of our portfolio.

How to Read the Pie Chart – As stated above, each trade alert is what we are doing with our own money. The I/O Fund is a live portfolio with the portfolio going live in May of 2020 and gets audited annually (our research site went live in July of 2019). Considering that we do not provide cash holdings, what the pie chart is showing is the percentage allocation of our invested portfolio. The positions with the highest percentage allocation constitute our highest convictions at the time.

For our newest Members, our allocations quickly and easily reveal which positions we have the most money in today; and subsequently, which stocks have our highest convictions. Our newest Members should look into our current allocations on the pie chart in order of highest percentage, and then search for the research and read the deep dives that correspond to those stocks for faster onboarding.

Risk Management Tool #2: Actively Managed Portfolio & Webinars

The I/O Fund does not believe in  buy and hold approach for tech investing. The difference between an actively managed portfolio and a buy-and-hold strategy is quite visible in our cumulative returns, which have a 157% spread between our approach and popular tech ETFs, as of the start of 2024. Our next audited results will be out in March of 2025, and we foresee those results supporting our consistent trend of outperformance.

The reason that we approach investing from an active stance is due to the nature of losses. Investment losses are geometric. For example:

  • If a portfolio or position goes down 50%, it has to go up 100% to breakeven.
  • If a portfolio or position goes down 80%, it has to go up 400% to breakeven.

Tech is highly susciptible to large drawdowns – consider that popular stocks, such as Tesla, was down 60% in 2023 and Nvidia was down 60% in 2022.

Active management means you have a plan for your stock positions. The I/O Fund favors technicals analysis for our active management as the tech industry responds well to sentiment.

Knox Ridley, Portfolio Manager, discuss the I/O Fund’s plans for actively managing the portfolio weekly on Thursdays at 1:30 PST (4:30 pm EST).

Here are a few things you can expect to hear in the weekly webinars:

1) Technical Analysis – For those new to this field, please reference our “Resources.” Here you’ll see an entire section dedicated to basic concepts in technical analysis, plus an overview of Elliott Wave analysis.

The study of technical analysis is the study of the herd (or large group) sentiment. It has been well documented that people retain their individuality and rational thought process in small groups. However, when the group grows, at some point, a new consciousness takes over, which has been deamed the herd mentality. Individual I.Q.s drop, as this new herd mentality becomes the driving force of individuals.

While the specifics always change, human emotions and herd mentality does not. Because of this, we tend to see repeatable and predictable price patterns show up time and time again. Understanding what potential pattern is in play can help you get ahead of the herd’s next move. We use the below techniques to identify good risk/reward entries and stops for our hedges.

Critical Support and Resistance – While markets move in patterns, being able to identify the pattern not only allows you to project with accuracy where the market is going, but it also allows you to establish moving support or resistance levels that confirms the pattern in play or negates it.

For example, the stock below appeared to be in a 5 wave uptrend off the April 2020 low. Knowing that 4th waves tend to correct to the 23.6% – 38.2% retrace of the 3rd wave, this stock should have held $266. When it did not, this was a warning that the final 5th wave is not likely to happen, and that a pivot is needed.

With the broad market, just like all markets and stocks, the pattern that the trend is taking allows for corrections that have to hold certain levels. If those levels break, then you will see us begin to hedge our positions.

Do We Have a Downside Setup?  All corrections, whether they are multi-year bear markets or quick moves in a day, are 3 wave patterns. There is the A wave down, the B wave up, which tends to make a lower high, followed by the most devastating part of the correction, which is the C wave down. The C wave is always a 5 wave pattern.

These patterns are fractal, so a small 5 wave pattern turns into a larger one, until you reach your target. So, if we know C waves are 5 wave patterns, this is crucial information for missing the worst part of a correction.

For example, if we see a 3 wave drop followed by a 3 wave lower high, we have an A and B wave in place. Let’s say the next minor drop is a 5 wave pattern followed by another small lower high. The most ideal place to hedge here is on the smaller high, placing a stop just above the start of minor drop. The image below shows this setup, and the gray box is where you would take protective hedges with minimal risk.

2) Stops – All investors have a buy plan, but many fail to have a sell plan. The idea of a stop is a price that tells you when you are wrong. For example, if I buy a stock at $10, and place a stop at $9 (closing price). Then, if at any point my position closes the day below $9, the next day, I sell at the market with no questions asked.

We believe it is better to stop out of a position early and miss a few percentage points on the rally when it resumes (if we were to miss the new momentum by a couple of days). This is a better alternative to being stuck in a stock wishing we could get out. We use this technique, at times, on opening positions because we want to manage our potential losses, just in case we are wrong.

We do not post our stop prices because we are a popular research site. We will let our readers know that a position has a stop when we open it, but we will not post the exact price, as this information can be used against our position.

We also follow fundamental stops. There is a specific criterion that all of our positions have to adhere to. If we see a critical metric reverse and begin decelerating, or if we get evidence that a specific tech trend is getting saturated, we will exit the stock. This can be jarring to retail investors, specifically if a stock has been rewarding.

However, more times than not, we have seen tech investors fall in love with a stock and believe that their future will be bright. They’ll hold this belief despite the fundamentals (and technical) not agreeing with them. Ignoring these technical and fundamental stops can lead to substantial losses. We do not believe hope is sound investment strategy in tech and therefore adhere to our stops.

Risk Management Tool #3: Hedging

While using technical analysis to gauge market risk, we do believe a rules base, automated risk signal is key to side stepping periods of volatility in the market. We outsource this automated risk signal to the company WealthUmbrella. Led by CEO and lead developer, Vincent Duchaine, WealthUmbrella is a team of machine learning and robotics engineers that have developed a purely quantitative and automated risk signal to warn of deteriorating market conditions.

WealthUmbrella Quant Signals – We utilize two indicators from the WealthUmbrella team to help govern our hedging:

  • The Risk Index – derived from 3 indicators that monitor the options market, it is an early warning in and out of periods of weakness. It is more sensitive, and tends to have an average of 4 triggers/year.

The NASDAQ-100 (QQQ) Hedge Signal – This is the primary risk signal, which incorporates a multitude of metrics – such as, breadth, the options market, price momentum, and dark pool volume. It triggers, on average, once a year.

For those members interested in a quantitative approach to risk management, like us, please visit WealthUmbrella’s offerings.

You can gain access to real-time market updates, access to the above indicators and signals into TradingView, as well as a similar hedge signal for Bitcoin.

How to use the hedge signals?  We are not licensed advisors so cannot and will not provide personalized advice. Hedging is advanced and can lead to losses. This practice may not be suitable for some investors, so we encourage all members interested to discuss with a licensed financial advisor first.

The below information is designed to educate members on what we are trying to do when hedging our portfolio.

Hedging and Going Market Neutral

The quant-based signals along with our technical analysis are simply ways to measure periods of elevated risk in the markets. While all periods of volatility tend to be accompanied with a measurable deterioration in market health, not all periods of market weakness result in large drawdowns.

While in a bull market, most hedges will be closed for a minor loss, which can drag on returns. However, the point of the hedge is to protect us from periods of extreme volatility, which are hard to predict. We see it as insurance, and necessary for playing the highly cyclical and emotional tech sector.

With that being said, we believe it is important to separate the hedge signal from how we hedge. Our hedge is designed for our portfolio. Our goal is to be as close to market neutral as possible with a simple ETF or combination of ETFs.

How this is achieved is by measuring the beta of our portfolio and then finding an ETF or combo of ETFs that replicate our portfolio’s beta. The measurement of beta is a measurement of how a portfolio or stock performs in relation to a benchmark. Our benchmark is the NASDAQ-100, so if our portfolio beta of 1.5 means that for every 1% up move in the NASDAQ-100, our portfolio would go up 1.5%. This is also the case on downside moves – for every -1% move in the NASDAQ-100, or portfolio would be -1.5%.

Why this is important is that everyone’s portfolio beta is different. If someone has a more diversified portfolio, say, a mix of blue-chip stocks, some bonds and commodities, and then a sliver of their portfolio is dedicated to high beta tech, then that portfolio would have a significantly lower beta than the I/O Fund. So, if that portfolio copied our specific hedge, instead of going market neutral they would be be going net short in a way that could harm long-term returns. For this reason, separating the risk signals that WealthUmbrella provides from how one decides to use those signals is very important to understand.

Do we rebalance our hedge to account for weekly fluctuations? The short answer is no. For example, if we say that we are hedging 100% of our our portfolio, on that day, we calculate the total amount invested (not cash), and then short the ETF or combination of ETFs that will get us 100% hedged.

If the following week we add some of our cash to into beaten down stocks, our invested amount will be more than our hedge, making us not 100%.  Also, let’s say or our stock portfolio goes down, say, 3% while our hedge goes up 5%, based on the relative performance of our hedge, we would also not be be 100% hedged anymore. In virtue of us adding cash to our investments and the relative performance of the hedge to our invested portfolio, we will need to rebalance our hedge to account for these fluctuations if we want to remain 100% hedged.

We do not do this. Our goal is to keep it simple by having a counter weight on our all tech portfolio in periods of volatility. We are trying to reduce our portfolio’s drawdown. So, we simply calculate the % we are hedging on the day we issue the alert, and leave that hedge alone until we decide to take it off.

How to read Hedge Trade Alerts:

When we say “Hedge QLD at $111.39 – 10% Hedged” we are saying that we have shorted the ETF QLD at the price listed. Most importantly, we only hedge the invested portion of our portfolio. So, the above example is shorting 10% of the invested amount of our portfolio.

For example, if we have a $1000 portfolio, and $200 is in cash, the above example would short $80 worth of QLD. This would be 10% of the $800 invested.

Conclusion:

Unlike many retail services, we are not hiding behind a stock report that we wrote about years ago. Like these services, we could easily say that we recommended NVDA based on our 2018 article; however, the real questions that need to be answered for real investors are – do you own it now? Have you always owned it? Did you ever take gains? If so, how much and when? Is it worth owning now? If so, at what price?

Not providing an answer to these questions is the difference between analysis and investing. Great analysts are not always great investors, and how one executes analysis over the long-haul is what real investors are seaking.

As real investors that have survived, and even thrived, through the tech-focused volatility from 2019 – 2024, we have done so through an arduous approach that includes risk management. It’s rare to see this many risk management tools offered at the retail level, but these are the actual investing tools that successful investors use.

Wall Street is not so generous as to share their every trade, and the Street certainly does not discuss their plans in advance. Retail sites rarely have enough consistent performance to be confident enough in disclosing their daily actions, as too many sites claim that solid research is enough evidence of being a great investor (it is not). This combination leaves investors in the dark on how to truly approach stock investing.

The I/O Fund has built a loyal base of Members as we were one of the first to provide high quality risk management tools alongside in-depth and original research. We feel this combination is hard to replicate. Our team is dedicated to continuing to serve our customers with the highest level of integrity as we seek to answer the billion-dollar question: how to safely safely participate in the world’s most rewarding industry — tech.

Please note: The I/O Fund conducts research and draws conclusions for the Fund’s positions. We then share that information with our readers. This is not a guarantee of a stock’s performance. Please consult your personal financial advisor before buying any stock in the companies mentioned in this analysis.

Posted in Broad Market Today, Market TrendsLeave a Comment on Three Risk Management Tools the I/O Fund Offers

Why the S&P 500 Shrugged Off the Iran War — and What Could Finally Break the Rally 

Posted on June 19, 2026June 30, 2026 by io-fund
Why the S&P 500 Shrugged Off the Iran War — and What Could Finally Break the Rally 

On February 28th, the U.S. went to war with Iran, and the market was handed the kind of shock it hasn't contended with for years. The conflict set off a chain reaction across the region: an ongoing supply disruption in essential commodities, a 30-year Treasury yield pushed to 5.2%, and a CPI print of 4.2%, more than double the Fed's target. By most measures, this was the most uncertain backdrop since COVID. 

And yet the S&P 500 fell just 9.7% in an orderly, almost polite decline, then staged the second-most aggressive snapback in its history. The recovery that followed trailed only the 1980 bear market. Most investors were left asking the same question: how could so many market-moving headlines move the market so little? 

The answer is one we have written about for years. Decades of studies have reached the same conclusion: news, on its own, has almost no lasting effect on markets. One of the most famous is “What Moves Stock Prices?” by Harvard and MIT economists Cutler, Poterba, and Summers. Their goal was to model how news and macroeconomic events might predict stock market movements. To their surprise, they found that only about one-third of major price swings could be linked to identifiable news events.   

News only matters insofar that it can affect underlying market forces that correlate with market movements. In the case of the Iran War, that underling force is global liquidity dynamics, and sentiment. Neither has broken down in any meaningful way. As far as equities were concerned, the Iran War was a liquidity and sentiment event, and on both counts the trend held. 

This is the heart of what we do at the I/O Fund: filter out the noise and focus on the few forces that drive price. In this report, we break down the global liquidity dynamics that explain why equities shrugged off the headlines, and why this was the only metric that mattered over the past few months.  

From there, we examine the deteriorating breadth beneath the surface, conditions that often precede a turn in the trend. Finally, we look at the historic institutional positioning building at the highs, which tends to mark a meaningful floor or ceiling depending on how price resolves. 

For now, we are leaning defensive — not because the trend has broken, but because the risk-reward has become less forgiving, considering the weight of evidence. We remain ready to pivot, and add exposure if the market invalidates that view with a decisive move higher, all of which is discussed in detail in this report.  

The Real Story Behind the S&P 500 Pullback: A Historic Supply Shock 

When the Iran War kicked off on February 28th, the broad market accelerated its correction, finally bottoming at -9.7% into the March 30th low. By market norms, that was a minor dip, and it bore little resemblance to the severity of the geopolitical events still in play. 

The war closed the Strait of Hormuz, locking up roughly 20% of the world's oil supply for nearly four months. Crude ran from $66 a barrel to $119, then settled into an $80 to $117 range that has held until this week. Roughly one-third of the world's fertilizer and about 20% of its natural gas were choked off as well, producing the largest commodity shock since the 1970s. 

That supply shock filtered into prices. Year-over-year CPI moved from 2.4% before the war to 4.2% as of May 30th, and the yield on the 30-year Treasury climbed to 5.2%, a level we have not seen since 2007. That climb may not sound dramatic but consider the backdrop – the U.S. debt-to-GDP ratio in 2007 was roughly 63%, versus about 125% today. The more we must pay just to cover the interest on our debts, the more we have to borrow to do it, and that new borrowing adds even more interest on top, so the cost keeps feeding on itself; a self-reinforcing loop where debt grows faster than we can keep up, and ultimately ends in a debt spiral and/or yield curve control enforced by the FED. 

mid

If we dig deeper into the inflation data, stripping out energy does not make the problem go away. Core CPI rose 2.8%, its third consecutive month of acceleration. That tells us the inflation pressure is not simply a function of soaring energy prices; it signals an economy running hot. Unsurprisingly, the Fed's tone has turned more hawkish, with officials signaling a willingness to raise rates if inflation does not subside. As of today, the market is pricing a 70% chance of a rate hike by year-end. 

Bar chart showing Fed target rate probabilities for the September 16, 2026 FOMC meeting, with a 52.3% likelihood of rates rising to 375–400 bps, 28.0% staying at 350–375 bps, and 19.6% increasing to 400–425 bps, indicating a greater than 70% chance of a rate hike.

The chart shows a greater than 70% probability that the FOMC will raise rates by September. Source: CMR GroupCMR Group

And still, against every one of these macro risks, the S&P 500 corrected just 9.7% and now sits 9% higher than where it stood when the war began. This fact has forced news pundits to scramble to find a reason based on current events, while failing to look at the underlying force the market is taking its cues from. 

How Liquidity Drives Markets and the S&P 500 

Liquidity is one of the most overused and least understood terms in markets. At its core, it refers to the availability of capital in the system, specifically how easily businesses, consumers, and financial institutions can access cash or credit. 

In today's global economy, liquidity is inseparable from debt dynamics. It is not the creation of new debt that dominates capital flows, but the ability to roll over existing obligations. Roughly three of every four global financial transactions relate to refinancing, not expansion, and nearly 80% of global lending now requires collateral, typically high-quality, low-volatility assets like U.S. Treasuries. 

This creates a framework where liquidity, and by extension risk appetite, is dictated by how cheaply and easily borrowers can refinance without overcollateralizing. The more capital that process frees up, the more can rotate into risk-on assets like Bitcoin. 

A number of variables influence liquidity conditions: Central bank policy, Fiscal spending, The Treasury General Account (TGA), Federal Reserve repo operations, Broad equity market performance, Bond market volatility 

Collectively, these forces determine whether capital and confidence flow into the system or are pulled out. But among all of them, the most powerful and persistent driver of global liquidity is the U.S. Dollar. 

Roughly 64% of global debt is denominated in dollars, which means foreign borrowers who tapped cheap U.S. capital must keep sourcing dollars to service that debt. When the dollar weakens against their local currencies, less local currency is needed to meet those dollar obligations, freeing up capital to chase higher-yielding risk assets. 

This inverse relationship between the U.S. Dollar Index (DXY) and risk assets is easy to see in the chart below. The black line is a composite of Bitcoin and Ethereum's price action. Crypto sits at the margin of risk assets, and it is usually where liquidity undulations hit first. The green line is DXY, an inverse proxy for global liquidity. As shown, major trends in risk assets and the dollar tend to move opposite one another. 

Line chart comparing Bitcoin price and the U.S. Dollar Index (DXY), showing an inverse relationship where Bitcoin rises as the dollar weakens and declines when the dollar strengthens.

This chart compares Bitcoin price (black line) with the U.S. Dollar Index (green line) over time. It shows a clear inverse relationship: when the dollar weakens, crypto prices tend to rise, and when the dollar strengthens, crypto markets decline.  

Oil Trade and the Flow of U.S. Dollars 

Global liquidity is a powerful force, and the Iran War threatened it. The danger for equities was never the war itself, or even the spike in oil prices. The danger was what those events could have triggered, which was a sharp reduction in global liquidity. 

Roughly 80% of all oil transactions globally are priced in U.S. dollars, a constant for decades that continually pushes dollars into the financial system. When the Strait of Hormuz closed, we did not just lose 20% of the world's oil. We lost the much-needed flow of dollars that those oil purchases would have circulated. 

That is why the Treasury Secretary announced that several countries in the region, including the UAE, were requesting dollar swap lines. The message here is that there were not enough dollars in the region to satisfy demand. 

This is how a currency crisis can begin. Because most regional debt is denominated in dollars, debtors must acquire dollars to service their interest payments. If they cannot access them, or if demand outstrips supply, they are forced to sell more of their local currency to source the dollars they need. That selling pressure feeds on itself. 

While we are seeing cracks in the global liquidity cycle, so far, an extreme imbalance has not materialized, and DXY confirms it. Since the war began, the DXY is up only 1.8%, nowhere near enough to trigger a liquidity crisis. But the setup is worth watching closely. DXY has just made its first higher high and higher low since January 2025, and the large corrective pattern that began in 2022 appears complete, which suggests a sizable bounce is the next likely move. A break above the key level would trigger a vertical push higher and sap global liquidity in a dangerous way. 

Technical chart of the U.S. Dollar Index (DXY) showing price action, key support and resistance levels, and a potential breakout structure indicating rising dollar strength and liquidity tightening risk.

This chart shows the U.S. Dollar Index (DXY) with key technical levels, Fibonacci retracements, and wave structure. Price is forming a potential breakout pattern after establishing higher highs and higher lows. 

Crude Oil Setup: A Key Signal for Market Risk 

Interestingly, the same setup is in play in crude oil. The move up off the December 2025 low is a clean three-wave advance, and what has followed is another three-wave move lower that appears to be in its final swings. 

Note how volume fades the lower we go, with momentum sitting at one of the most extreme oversold readings in crude's history. Sellers are exhausting themselves, and momentum does not stay this depressed for long. If the bounce holds under $87, the pattern points to one more drop toward $67 to $70 to complete it. If instead we push above $87, it signals a new uptrend is likely underway, which would not be good for risk assets. 

Technical chart of crude oil futures showing a downward trend with wave structure, declining momentum, and key support levels between $67 and $70, indicating potential downside before a reversal.

This chart shows crude oil futures (CL1!) with a clear downtrend and corrective wave structure. Price is approaching key support levels around $67–$70, with weakening momentum and declining volume suggesting potential seller exhaustion. A break below support could extend the decline, while a rebound would signal a possible trend reversal and renewed upside risk for inflation and equities. 

The market is pricing in a transitory move for global oil. In other words, now that the Straight if Hormuz is open, we will get right back to peak production. This is an impossibility based on the nature of active oil rigs turning off temporarily, or what is known as shut in. To bring these rigs back on-line can take anywhere from 2 weeks – to a year, depending on how complex the equipment is. Furthermore, more than 80 energy assets, totaling ~$56 billion in damages. These repairs, as noted, could take up to 2 years.  

What’s keeping oil prices suppressed is the 1.1 – 1.3 million barrels being pushed onto the global economy from the US Strategic Petroleum Reserve (SPR). Considering the 300-million-barrel hard floor that must be maintained in the SPR, or else it risks failure, that estimates an inability to suppress oil prices past mid-July, at best.  

If this smooth and complex transition is unable to happen, the setup in the chart will likely trigger higher, sapping the global dollar demand further and greatly affecting global liquidity.  

Record Market Divergences Beneath the Surface 

These setups sit within two macro factors that feed directly into global liquidity. But liquidity is not the only warning light flashing. We are also witnessing some of the most extreme divergences on record. 

When markets move in unison, it usually marks a strong trend that lasts for many months. But markets rarely top and bottom all at once. There is almost always one market running ahead of the one everyone is watching, and that leader can offer early clues about the next major move. 

Right now, three key sectors with a history of leading the broad market are refusing to confirm the move higher. 

The most striking is the gap between Semiconductors and Financials. Financials topped in January and sit roughly 3% below their 2026 high, even as Semiconductors trade 43% above their prior 2026 high. That is the widest divergence between these two sectors on record. 

Chart comparing semiconductor stocks and financials, showing semiconductors up 43% while financials are down 3%, highlighting a significant divergence in S&P 500 sector performance.

This chart compares semiconductor stocks (blue) and financials (black), showing a sharp divergence in performance. Semiconductors have risen approximately 43%, while financials have declined about 3%, marking one of the widest gaps between these sectors on record. 

The economically sensitive Transportation sector is also flashing the same warning. It’s down about 10% while semiconductors are up 43%.  

Chart comparing semiconductor stocks and transportation stocks, showing semiconductors up about 43% while transportation stocks are down roughly 10%, highlighting a major sector divergence.

This chart compares semiconductors (blue) and transportation stocks (black), showing a sharp divergence in performance. Semiconductors have gained about 43%, while transportation has declined roughly 10%, one of the largest gaps on record. 

The only other time these two sectors diverged this sharply was July 2024, when transports were down 10% and semiconductors had ripped 88% higher. That divergence marked a one-year top in semis and gave way to a 48% drawdown into the April 2025 low. 

Chart comparing semiconductor stocks and transportation index, showing semiconductors up approximately 88% while transportation declines around 10%, highlighting a major divergence in market leadership.

This chart compares semiconductors (blue) with the Dow Jones Transportation Index (black), showing a dramatic divergence. Semiconductors have surged roughly +88%, while transportation stocks have fallen about 10%. 

The most concerning signal, though, comes from the equal-weighted Mag 7 index. It rarely triggers, but when it does, it has a perfect record of flagging trend reversals going back to 2021. Today, the equal-weighted Mag 7 topped in October 2025 while the S&P 500 has continued higher, the widest divergence ever recorded between the two. 

Chart comparing the S&P 500 index and the equal-weighted Mag 7 stocks, showing the S&P 500 trending higher while the equal-weight index lags, highlighting a divergence in market leadership.

This chart compares the S&P 500 (top panel) with the equal-weight Mag 7 index (bottom panel). While the S&P 500 continues to trend higher, the equal-weight index has lagged and peaked earlier, signaling a growing divergence. 

Furthermore, of the 11 major sectors that make up the U.S. economy, only three sit above their February 2026 highs: technology, industrials, and real estate. What is masking the broader weakness is semiconductors.  As of this week, 33 semiconductor companies in the S&P 500 account for ~18% of the index's total weight, more than double the sector's exposure at the dot-com peak. 

While divergences and extreme concentration are a warning that precedes almost every volatility event, as long as they persist, these dislocations can go on for much longer than most investors realize.  

An important clue to the size of the next move can be seen by excessive institutional positioning that has been happening over the last few weeks.  For reference, institutions tend to create highs and lows through offloading supply or creating demand with their size.  

The below chart comes from VolumeLeaders, and tracks large institutional block trades in SPY. Over the last 2 weeks, we’ve seen the 1st 4th and 10th largest trades in SPY’s long history. So, in three trades, $13 Billion dollars was either sold or bought. As you can see, these large block trades tend to happen around meaningful turning points in market trends. 

Annotated SPY (SPDR S&P 500 ETF) price chart highlighting large institutional block trades clustered near recent highs around $740–$750, with additional volume profile data and historical price movement indicating strong institutional positioning at current levels.

This chart shows SPY (S&P 500 ETF) with highlighted large institutional block trades around recent highs. Several of the largest transactions on record appear clustered near current price levels, suggesting heavy positioning by institutional investors. 

But it’s not just SPY. If we go back 60 days, all major broad market broad market ETFs are seeing a growing number of historic institutional trades, signaling that they are positioning for a large move.  

Dashboard showing recent large block trades in SPY, QQQ, and IVV, alongside a bar chart tracking the number of high-ranking institutional trades over the past 60 days.

This image shows is derived from VolumeLeader data. The top 10 largest trades in SPY, IVV, QQQ, SMH, VOO history.  VolumeLeader data. The top 10 largest trades in SPY, IVV, QQQ, SMH, VOO history.  

Because of the size and frequency of these trades, they are either creating a meaningful ceiling or floor for equities. Whatever direction the market breaks from the consolidation range they are creating, will determine the next swing, which will likely be quite notable due to the level of activity in this region. 

We can see these two moves in the potential chart patterns in play in the broad market. Since the 2022 low, the bull market pattern has been characterized with large and frequent swings in both directions, with an obvious upward bias. This pattern best represents an ending diagonal pattern. 

Based on the current price data, there are two scenarios I am tracking: 

  • Green – We are in a 2nd wave dip, which should hold 7238. We’ll then see a breakout to new highs on expanding volume and momentum, signaling that we are in the 3rd wave of this swing. This would be a continuation of the current melt-up with targets in the 9000s for SPX. If this plays out, then it tells us that institutions have been accumulating at these highs in preparation for this push higher. 
  • Blue – We break below 7238 and we will test 6965 next. If we break below this region in a meaningful way, we are likely in a very large 4th wave with targets between 6000 – 5700 SPX, that will likely find a low into Fall of this year. If these supports break, it will indicate that institutions have been distributing at the highs.  
Technical chart of the S&P 500 (SPX) showing Elliott Wave structure, Fibonacci levels, and key support and resistance zones with potential bullish and bearish scenarios.

This chart shows the S&P 500 (SPX) with a structured Elliott Wave pattern and key Fibonacci levels. Price is testing a critical resistance zone after a strong advance, with defined support levels below. 

Conclusion: 

In conclusion, since 1985, the NASDAQ-100 has fallen into a 10%+ correction roughly every 13 months. Since the new bull market started in October of 2022, that cadence has compressed to every 8. We are seeing volatility increase in frequency. 

You would think this would alarm investors, yet we are seeing some of the most extreme sentiment readings being backed with recent margin debt readings coming in at a new all-time high of $1.3 Trillion, which is roughly 4% of GDP and a 36% YoY increase in debt to buy. 

The reason for this is because of how investors have been trained to invest since the 2018 Christmas Eve Selloff. Markets always come back, and usually in an aggressive V-Shaped fashion. 

No example of this new norm has been more evident than the recent push to new highs. In fact, on April 15th, the NASDAQ-100 made history. A correction that had taken 103 days to bottom at roughly -12% on March 30th was erased in just 11 days. This was the most distorted drawdown-to-recovery ratio on record, with the index climbing back nearly nine times faster than it fell. Since 2022, the average drawdown is 46 days, while recoveries are just 35. Markets are climbing back faster than they fall, which is shaping investors' behavior. 

This kind of resilience is characteristic of secular bull markets, and the current one is among the longest and most profitable since 1900, now well into a roughly 17-year run as the sentiment cycle enters its final stages.  

Long-term chart of the S&P 500 showing secular bull market periods with historical returns, durations, and wave structure across multiple decades.

This chart shows the long-term S&P 500 (SPX) across multiple decades, highlighting major secular bull market phases. Each period is marked with its duration and total return, illustrating how long-term market cycles are characterized by sustained upward trends punctuated by shorter-term corrections. 

We do expect volatility to continue its frequency, but the secular uptrend likely has a bit further to run. That is precisely what makes this environment so hard to navigate: investors are taking on record levels of debt to buy speculative securities, even as the warning signals that tend to precede volatility events continue to build.  

As long as supports hold and liquidity stays stable, we expect the trend to continue higher. However, the sentiment pattern we are in is characterized by large and frequent swings in both directions. If the market decides to take the more volatile blue path outlined above, we will view this as another excellent buying opportunity in an ongoing secular bull market. On the other hand, if the market decides to continue higher, we will abandon our defensive posture and buy the breakout. Given the level of institutional activity in this range, whatever move comes next is likely to be substantial. 

Our firm specializes in marketing positioning, with a disciplined approach to liquidity and sentiment. Our approach helps us distinguish between selloffs worth buying, trends worth respecting, and risks that warrant a more defensive stance. 

Since launching in May 2020, our team has delivered a cumulative return of 326% – which would rank us #1 if we were a hedge fund and #3 if we were an ETF or mutual fund. We apply our market and risk framework to high-conviction AI and technology positions. For example, our firm owned four of the ten best-performing large-cap stocks during the historic April 2026 rally – on top of an already strong cumulative. 

Premium Members receive our Top 15 AI Stocks, real-time trade alerts, weekly webinars, portfolio, and deep-dive research across the AI infrastructure stack. 

Join I/O Fund Premium to get the research, positioning, and trade alerts behind our highest-conviction AI and technology ideas.
Join I/O FundJoin I/O Fund

Please note: The I/O Fund conducts research and draws conclusions for the Fund’s positions. We then share that information with our readers. This is not a guarantee of a stock’s performance. Please consult your personal financial advisor before buying any stock in the companies mentioned in this analysis.

👉🏻 Share with a Fellow Investor
He
are with a Fellow Investor
H
elp someone else benefit from this insight.

Recommended Reading:

  • Nvidia, CoreWeave, and Nebius: Inside the Circular Financing of the GPU Boom 
  • AMD, Nvidia, Arm, Intel: Inside the $120 Billion CPU Gold Rush
  • Google TPU v8 vs Nvidia: How Inference Is Rewriting the AI Market
  • The AI Networking Stock That Beat Nvidia by 7X YTD for Returns of 135% YTD
Posted in Broad Market TodayLeave a Comment on Why the S&P 500 Shrugged Off the Iran War — and What Could Finally Break the Rally 

The I/O Fund’s Top 15 Stocks for Q2 2026

Posted on April 21, 2026June 30, 2026 by io-fund

In 2018, the market was tumultuous from China trade wars, and the concept of an “AI data center” was not uttered by any stock analyst that I can recall. The AI blogs and Substacks you see today did not exist and the social media influencers that elaborate on the topic daily in 2026 were entirely focused on consumer tech and cloud (or had not yet begun investing in stocks). 

This history is important as it substantiates who is early to a trend, yet it gets buried very quickly as most of what we read today is designed to be ephemeral. Being early to a trend is not simply a bragging right; it’s how the majority of the money is made in the stock market. 

Jumping on a bandwagon yields lower returns as it means investing in what is already consensus. We avoid bandwagons, and instead, are often jumping off just as a trade gets too crowded. Below, I lay the groundwork for one of our boldest moves yet, which is to move to the sidelines with our Nvidia position. This move is driven by analysis that consistently questions: what is best for my Research Members right now? It is a question only afforded to the most independent research sites, of which there are very few.  

While technologists and AI developers can devour information without penalty; investors cannot. Where investors are quite different is that every new data point and every hot take can lead to costly redirection. To contrast, our site is built not only to identify major trends and lesser-known tech stocks early, but to help Members move forward with calm confidence. 

And in case it's gone unnoticed, the QQQs are flat this year. Many influencer-led tech ETFs are also flat to down – GRNY, IVES, and ARKK are all barely keeping pace with the broader tech index. In sharp contrast, we are up about 30% YTD, a meaningful outperformance during a bout of weakness in the markets and confusion around AI spending. Contributors include Bloom Energy, which we brought to our Research Members long before the stock became widely discussed — our initial entry near the 2025 lows is up over 1000% today. We also highlighted AAOI ahead of its 2026 surge, with the stock up nearly 300% YTD and over 650% since our lowest entry. We then doubled down on Lumentum in January with a 10% allocation, and the stock is up over 130% YTD. 

Similar to previous reports, the report below is our team stepping back up to the plate and pointing in the direction we think the ball will land. It is over 70 pages long and took three weeks to write, combining deep thematic work, fundamental analysis, and portfolio-level judgment.  

Although quite lengthy, this is about executing in the last inning when the game must be won. Whether you joined our site years ago or only since January, our official batting average is improving. Let's see if we can deliver for our Members again this quarter. 

AI Accelerators: Shifting from Raw Compute to Unit Economics 

AI accelerators are shifting their primary focus from raw compute to unit economics. Two years ago, Gartner had predicted 40% of existing AI data centers will be operationally constrained by power availability by 2027. That date is fast approaching, which means to continue selling GPUs or XPUs, leading AI semiconductor companies must actively work to solve for this constraint.  

More recently, Morgan Stanley stated data centers are facing a “power shortfall totaling as much as 20%” for data centers through 2028. It’s expected there will be 13 GWs of shortage through 2028, when factoring in behind-the-meter solutions (more on that under the Energy section below). 

While supplying power is outside of their domain, unit economics is something companies like Nvidia, AMD and Broadcom can help to improve. What this suggests is that the semiconductor supply chain will do everything within reach to lower the power requirements of AI systems from a design perspective.  

To illustrate this approach, recently, the I/O Fund team covered how Arm is tackling lower power requirements in our write-up Arm Stock Could Win as Agentic AI Shifts the Bottleneck to CPUs  Arm Stock Could Win as Agentic AI Shifts the Bottleneck to CPUs  stating: “Arm is taking this a step further with a fully-liquid cooled, 200kW open-standard rack in partnership with Super Micro, packing 168 blades, or 336 CPUs, delivering a total of up to 45,696 cores. Arm EVP of Cloud AI Mohamed Awad stated that while it is a ‘200-kilowatt rack. We actually will consume about half that much power. We ran out of space. That’s why we couldn’t put more cores in there.’ 

This is one of the key advantages – it is not just about offering 2X the performance of x86 chips, but providing that performance boost while freeing up power for more compute or for more networking […]  Arm says the new chip’s performance advantage over x86 could enable “up to $10B in capex savings per GW of AI data center capacity,” making it a compelling option for current and future agentic AI-optimized deployments to save money, save power and avoid Nvidia-lock in from its accelerator-agnostic nature.” 

To connect the dots here, these stats should not be glossed over. As opposed to the compute-driven era we are firmly exiting, the way forward will be architectural designs that can lower power requirements. Instead of asking “how much compute can we build?” Big Tech is waiting in interconnection queues and waiting for the completion of nuclear power plants, asking: “How much compute can we actually power?” 

Nvidia’s Systems are Becoming More Efficient:  

There are two primary ways that Nvidia plans to assist in the push for better unit economics, such as cost per token and performance per watt. The first is to make each system they sell more efficient, and the second is to increase GPU density within the same power envelope.  

In the March press releases from GTC, there is a subtle hint that Nvidia’s core KPI is not FLOPs anymore but rather tokens per watt.   

Nvidia’s GB300 NVL72s offer 50X better performance per watt and 35X lower cost per token compared to the H200s. When comparing the Vera Rubin NVL72 to Blackwell, the new system delivers 4X better training performance and up to 10X better inference performance per watt.  

In other words, if a data center has 100MW of power, then Vera Rubin allows 10X more inference in the same power envelope as Blackwell, which is critical for hyperscalers that are constrained by facility power. 

More GPUs in the same Power Envelope:  

As announced at GTC this year, Nvidia’s MGX racks will include rack-level energy storage capacitors to avoid the large load swings created by AI training and inference workloads. According to Nvidia, these spikes create stress on the grid and data center power infrastructure with these improvements resulting in lower peak current by up to 25% while Intelligent Power Smoothing will also help to reclaim stranded capacity:  

“NVIDIA Vera Rubin NVL72 now introduces Intelligent Power Smoothing. It features 6x more rack-level energy storage (400 J per GPU) versus prior generations, and introduces a new closed-loop system that enables the GPUs to continuously monitor the state of charge of the capacitors to more efficiently flatten power profiles. This achieves much smaller AC power variation per minute, reduces peak current demands by up to 25%, and eliminates the need for massive battery packs to protect against large-scale power transients. At the facility level, provisioning racks at static Max-P strands power capacity that could otherwise be used to generate tokens. It assumes homogeneous workloads that always require peak power, when in reality AI factories run a mix of workloads with varying power needs.” 

What Nvidia is describing here is that by flattening power spikes and by lowering peak current demand, Nvidia can put up to 30% more GPUs in the same facility power envelope. Max-P refers to static maximum power whereas Max-Q refers to allocating power more dynamically to accomplish better economics. In practice, the DSX Max-Q API is a software tool that Nvidia offers to achieve a token-per-watt goal rather than just raw performance.  

Following GTC in March, Nvidia is effectively agreeing that power is the defining constraint of the AI buildout. 

Join the Discovery tier for early access to stock ideas and to stay ahead of where the market is heading next. To subscribe to Discovery with 40% off, click here to email us or email premium@io-fund.com and mention code DISCOVERY40 Discovery with 40% off, click here to email us or email premium@io-fund.com and mention code DISCOVERY40 

The Importance of Cooling Technologies: 

We’ve covered direct liquid cooling for a few years, beginning with Supermicro in 2023 and later with a cohort of cooling stocks in 2024. The simplest thesis as to why my Q2 report is emphasizing cooling technologies at this critical juncture for lowering power for data centers is the following: 

“Cooling data center servers is responsible for 40% of the data center energy consumption. According to Dell, enclosed DLC solutions can save up to 23% of energy compared to traditional air-cooled racks. McKinsey places this number at 27% savings when there is 75% liquid cooled and 25% air cooled servers.:” – Liquid Cooling Leaders, June 2024 Liquid Cooling Leaders, June 2024  

There are a few reasons why we dropped direct liquid cooling from our coverage over the past year or so but are picking it back up again as an important AI thematic trend. Although Blackwell offered both liquid cooled and air-cooled options in the B200s and the MGX NVL36s, many deployments remained with air-cooled because the current data facilities are built for air-cooled. This includes neoclouds, which also have a strong preference for the B200s and NVL36 with industry analysts stating the 40kW rack requirements were an easier upgrade from Hopper’s 20kW rack requirements, achieved by skipping a row: “Since it is only 40kW per rack, the MGX NVL36 can be air cooled […] This makes the MGX NVL36 very easy for existing datacenter operators to deploy without reworking their infrastructure.” 

Rubin changes this as air-cooled is not an option as this generation reaches 180kW to 230kW per GPU. Nvidia is redesigning its Rubin racks to be “liquid cooled with high warm-water inlet temperatures,” which will help to lower facility power costs while freeing up more power for compute.  

For Max-Q to be achievable (mentioned above), systems must be cooled to 45 degrees Celsius or 113 degrees Fahrenheit. According to Nvidia, this approach leads to “significant data center power savings,” resulting in up to 10% more GPUs being deployed. Here is what was stated: 

“Operating at 45°C enables data centers in many climates to use ambient air and closed loop dry coolers for cooling, reducing the need for compressors, driving down PUE, and unlocking larger energy budgets for compute. Lower inlet temperatures of 35°C require data centers to divert massive amounts of facility power or water for cooling, while higher inlet temperatures maximize the amount of grid power converted directly into tokens. This yields significant data center power savings—enough to allocate up to 10% additional Vera Rubin NVL72 racks for more token generation in the same power budget.” 

Rather than “cool” data centers, Nvidia is proposing to use warm water, which will require less power for chilling servers and allow more power to be used toward more compute. To achieve this, Nvidia uses facility water loops and coolant distribution units (CDUs) rather than direct-to-chip cooling to recycle the warm water across the facility. 

All of the above marks an important change in tone for the Nvidia management team as it’s more about performance-per-watt and cost-per-token rather than raw performance or FLOPs. The first approach Nvidia is taking to decouple bigger racks from needing proportionate power is Intelligence Power Smoothing and warm-water cooling. 

As investors, we should take our cue from the leading AI management team that the constraint in AI has officially shifted to Energy. 

Nvidia’s Dominance Faces Its Biggest Test Yet 

Recently, I’ve reiterated my $20 trillion market cap thesis, which translates to about 400% returns over the next four years, yet to assume Nvidia achieves this through hardware would be incorrect, in my opinion. The thesis hinges on software advancements and the recurring revenue that will inevitably come from Nvidia’s lead in robotics and simulation. Notably, I’ve held this opinion on the importance of Nvidia’s software business relative to hardware since 2023. 

However, on the flip side, by saying software is central to the $20T thesis, I'm implying that Nvidia’s hardware moat becomes breached. Over 7 years ago, my original thesis on why Nvidia can become the world’s most valuable company when it was at a $100 billion market cap was centered on the moat the CUDA platform provides when I stated: “Developers will self-regulate the number of competitors for processing units due to a need for a universal platform that supports all frameworks.” 

However, programming GPUs with the CUDA platform is primarily a training exercise as this is the phase where engineers are experimenting and need the developer ecosystem, including extensive tools like cuDNN, NCCL, debugging, custom kernel support, and CUDA’s massive libraries. The ecosystem has been built for over 20 years, has over 4 million developers contributing and every ML framework is first optimized for CUDA. The switching costs are extraordinarily high for engineers. 

To contrast, inference is repetitive to where once a model is trained, the model is running millions of times per day. Serving platforms and inference frameworks like vLLM and TensorRT-LLM reduce dependency to develop on a specific software platform, like Nvidia’s CUDA. There is also more of a push toward open standards for the inference phase to reduce dependency on hardware specific code for serving paths, as tools like ONNX runtime, vLLM and the compiler Triton help to export models (or compile them) to be run agnostically on any AI accelerator. 

In response to CUDA's moat weakening in the inference phase, Nvidia has pushed for their inference stack to remain proprietary by offering inference optimization software called TensorRT-LLM. TensorRT-LLM analyzes and optimizes LLMs to improve performance by running multiple operations on a single GPU kernel, selecting the optimal precision and optimizing memory usage for the key-value cache. Overall, Nvidia states this leads to 2-5X faster model performance for inference.  

However, consider that Nvidia is needing this new attempt at vendor lock-in as the CUDA dynasty will not hold in the inference market. The open-source market is growing to become a serious contender to proprietary optimization software like TensorRT-LLM, as alternatives that are more community driven are available and accomplish something similar, such as vLLM and SGLang. Furthermore, large inference players like Cloudflare can build their own custom engines.  

Expectations for the Erosion of Nvidia’s Market Share: 

Below, I present what a few industry analysts are predicting. Although I believe these are aggressive, they help to illustrate what is in front of Nvidia as the hardware moat becomes breached.  

Counterpoint Research believes that by 2028, custom silicon will cross the 15-million mark to surpass GPU shipments as the top 10 hyperscalers will have deployed 40 million AI server compute ASIC chips cumulatively during 2024-2028, stating: “What is also supporting this unprecedented demand is AI hyperscalers building significant rack-scale AI infrastructure based on their in-house stacks, such as Google TPU Pods and AWS Trainium UltraClusters, enabling them to operate as one supercomputer.” 

TrendForce is the most aggressive forecast, stating GPU-based AI servers will account for 69.7% of shipments in 2026 with ASIC-based servers rising to 27.8%. This doesn’t account for GPU market share from AMD, which if you put that at 10%, would result in Nvidia’s market share being 59.7%.  

With the information that I have today, these forecasts are too aggressive. 

According to Broadcom, they’ll see $100B in AI chip revenue in 2027 and we’ve modeled another $50B in networking. If we allocate $60B to AMD and go with what we know of Nvidia’s stated trajectory to $1 trillion in revenue, then the split looks something more like this for 2027: 

  • NVDA $500B 
  • AVGO $150B to $200B (assuming mgmt team was being conservative we will use the $200B number) 
  • AMD $60B 
  • Total among top 3 silicon providers: $760B with NVDA at 66% market share 

However, one data point that complicates things is MediaTek could see 150,000 CoWoS wafers in capacity in 2027, compared to 20,000 in 2026. Thus, the landscape is evolving in terms of the number of competitors.  

Reference more CoWoS allocation notes under the AMD section. 

The Linchpin: Rubin Delay Related to HBM4 

The reason for closing our Nvidia is two-fold. As outlined above, custom silicon is expected to gain meaningful share in the coming years. Nvidia’s GPUs come at a significant premium, and Big Tech seeks to lower total cost of ownership. Additionally, inference prioritizes repetition and efficiency over general-purpose flexibility, where the CUDA moat matters less than it did during the training market.  

At the same time, custom silicon is designed for specific workloads, allowing for lower power requirements, which is a critical advantage during a window when power will be greatly constrained.  

To add to this, we are getting additional confirmation of an incoming Rubin delay. To be blunt, this is terrible timing for Nvidia as Big Tech was already diversifying with custom silicon. This makes a stronger case for having back-up orders with Broadcom, MediaTek and/or AMD.  

HBM4 validation times have been cited as one key factor behind the delays for Nvidia’s upcoming Vera Rubin generation – we have seen in the past that these qualification tests can extend as long as 18 months, such as in Samsung’s case with HBM3e. Currently, reports suggest this HBM4-related delay could persist for one quarter. 

Reports suggest this delay stems from Nvidia pushing suppliers to “request speeds of over 11 Gb/s per pin,” well above the JEDEC standard of 8Gb/s. More evidence for a delay is surfacing, with DigiTimes reporting on April 15 that SK Hynix is “considering reducing its planned 2026 shipments of high-bandwidth memory (HBM4) to Nvidia by about 20-30%.”  

We also have another report stating SK Hynix is delaying its HBM4 production ramp until Q3, instead of its original Q2 target, with the delay said to better align with Nvidia’s schedule. Any potential delays or shipment cuts at SK Hynix also could be a key factor in a Rubin delay, as SK Hynix reportedly secured more than 70% of HBM orders for the upcoming chip; on the other hand, Micron and Samsung both have announced that HBM4 is in mass production for Vera Rubin, easing some of the supply constraints.  

Memory: Pricing Power Takes on Market Doubts 

The market is presenting two very different extremes with surging DRAM and NAND pricing causing memory stocks to skyrocket, until recently, when this subsector came to a screeching halt following Google’s TurboQuant announcement. The announcement got a lot of attention as Google stated they can deliver up to a 6x compression on LLM memory and vector search.  

The Google TurboQuant announcement specifically addresses the KV cache, which essentially serves as a model’s long-term memory that is reused and extended throughout many steps or requests. KV cache capacity is a known pain point when working to balance long-context reasoning and memory capacity in inference workloads, as it can consume ~30% of GPU memory during deployment.  

TurboQuant directly addresses this pain point by compressing the vectors (queries from users and keys in the KV cache) via real-time quantization, reducing the amount of bits needed to store ‘high-dimensional’ or complex data such as image features. This is increasingly important with AI coding, natural language processing, and multi-agent workflows, as the more a model is used, the more memory the KV cache takes up as it stores all of the prior responses.  

Alphabet says TurboQuant can drive a 6X reduction in KV cache memory size, all while preserving model accuracy and accelerating speed up to 8X. However, there is some debate here as industry analysts have noted that “actual memory savings are around 2.7x, with speed improvements of about 4x.” 

The market first interpreted the TurboQuant release as a memory ‘demand killer’, though it’s possible that the true reality may be that this is another ‘DeepSeek moment’ (as stated by Cloudflare’s CEO), where these new optimizations simply drive more AI infrastructure and thus more memory demand. It may all boil down to what Alphabet itself acknowledged – that TurboQuant “lowers memory costs.”  

This could be another Jevon’s Paradox in the making, where the new efficiencies created on the KV cache side simply drive memory and AI infrastructure demand higher (not lower) by opening up new use cases and reducing memory costs.   

Looking at this from the lens of AI inference, or inference at the edge or on local devices, the ability to reduce KV cache footprint, boost speed, preserve accuracy, lengthen context windows and allow for more concurrent requests may drive faster adoption of applications such as multi-agent systems, coding and natural language processing.  

TurboQuant does not reduce the need for HBM in AI accelerators, as HBM will still be critical for parameter storage for training; it simply minimizes KV cache usage in inference. It also does not replace the NAND flash and SSD storage layer for training data, inference data retrieval and caching. Instead, what it likely will do is allow larger models to be run on the same accelerator footprint, and enable and broaden access to previously infeasible memory-intensive workloads (like multi-agent systems) to a wider range of users, from lowering memory usage and decreasing memory costs. 

While the market grew concerned over TurboQuant, the other side of the picture – prices – may have been lost in the noise as the release was cited as a key contributor to a slight pullback in DRAM prices over the last few weeks. The 10,000-foot view instead shows DRAM prices had risen >20X over the last year, with robust price momentum for both DRAM and NAND throughout Q4 and Q1 that is now extending into Q2.  

Key factors behind the rapid ascent in prices included major manufacturers shifting supply to prioritize AI-related HBM and LPDDR (server DRAM) demand, and new chips such as Nvidia’s Blackwell Ultra incorporating 50% more HBM capacity per chip versus Blackwell. This strong demand, increasing content of HBM attached to accelerators and DRAM content growth in AI servers is also why we saw Micron shutter its consumer DRAM unit to focus solely on AI. The NAND and enterprise SSD side faces extremely tight supply coupled with strong AI storage demand — Kioxia sold out of 2026 NAND capacity in January, and reports surfaced recently that controller supplier Phison’s CEO said that “every NAND manufacturer told us 2026 is sold out.” 

Closer Look at the Memory Pricing Surge 

It’s safe to say that looking back, the ascension and sheer pace of memory prices caught the entire industry off-guard as supply constraints worsened. 

The vertical ascent in memory prices first became visible late last year within DDR4/5 chips for PCs, with prices surging from roughly $6.84 in September to $27.20 by December as supply and inventories rapidly tightened. This surge quickly extended well beyond PC/consumer DRAM, as server DRAM, NAND flash and enterprise SSDs also witnessed prices rise sharply into year end and early 2026.  

For example, back in September, TrendForce had initially estimated conventional DRAM prices to rise 8-13% QoQ in Q4 driven by some supply constraints for DDR4/5 for PCs, and up 13-18% QoQ when including HBM. By November, reports were surfacing that quotes from Samsung were rising from $149 to $239 for 32GB DDR5, with other capacities all rising 30-50% since September, more than 3X the estimated quarterly increase.    

By the end of Q4, conventional DRAM prices were pegged at +45-50% QoQ, far above initial estimates, with HBM-blended prices up 50-55% QoQ. The price hikes were only projected to worsen moving through Q1, with TrendForce estimating conventional DRAM prices up 90-95% QoQ (on top of Q4’s increase), driven by PC DDR4/5 up 105-110% QoQ and LPDDR5 server DRAM up 88-93% QoQ. Samsung had reportedly doubled its DRAM contract prices in Q1 versus Q4, with Q2 expected to see another 30% increase on top of that.   

On the NAND side, prices followed a similar trajectory, with Q4 prices for enterprise SSDs estimated at 25-30% QoQ, with total NAND flash prices reported to be up 33-38% QoQ. For Q1, TrendForce had estimated at the start of February that the pace of NAND flash price hikes would quicken, rising 55-60% QoQ, with enterprise SSDs nearly matching that pace at 53-58% QoQ. By the end of March, barely eight weeks later, and NAND prices were estimated to be significantly higher, up 85-90% QoQ.  

Initial price estimates for Q2 signal robust momentum continues, with conventional DRAM forecast to increase 58-63% QoQ, and NAND flash rising 70-75% QoQ. However, DRAM prices have recently pulled back around ~20-30%, with reports pointing to two main factors for the decline – distributors beginning to sell off stockpiled inventory and TurboQuant. Even with this correction, it should be noted that DDR4/5 prices remain >20X of their early 2025 prices.  

For HDDs, pricing is more obscure. Major suppliers WDC and Seagate have already sold out of capacity for 2026 with price and volume conditions set in contracts, though 2027 pricing has not been set, and is the bigger catalyst on the horizon.  

WDC executives noted that last quarter, prices were up “2%, 3% on an ASP per terabyte basis,” with the pricing environment stable and expected to remain stable moving forward, implying similar steady growth through the rest of this year. Some reports suggested HDD contract prices rose ~4% QoQ, still a far cry from the rapid ascent seen in SSDs.  

Looking further ahead for HDDs, analysts from Morgan Stanley see 2027 pricing potentially being much stronger than currently expected. MS explained that they see “sustained hyperscaler demand strength, elongating customer visibility [and] firmer pricing into 2027,” with its initial channel checks suggesting hyperscalers are closer to paying $20 per terabyte for 2027 and 2028 capacity. This is significantly above current estimates for $13 to $15 per terabyte.  

Even with capacities selling out and prices rapidly advancing above expectations, the market is still finding a way to doubt the runway for memory stocks. This likely stems from memory’s cyclical nature, previous history of rather violent swings from peak to trough, and an expectation that current prices will soon peak and quickly reverse.  

However, the current environment has key ingredients for prices to remain strong. While it may be unlikely that we see prices rise >60% QoQ in each and every quarter this year, the persisting supply shortages coupled with the strength of AI-driven demand and timing of capacity expansion suggest that prices may not immediately reverse but rather remain elevated for longer – perhaps into 2027.  

Current expectations predict this supply shortage will persist through late 2027, though key industry executives are beginning to pencil it in lasting even longer. Intel CEO Lip-Bu Tan believes there will be “no relief” until 2028, while SK Group Chairman Chey Tae-won stated at Nvidia’s GTC that the shortage could persist another four to five years as wafer supply may lag demand by more than 20% at times.  

This is because capacity expansion efforts will take multiple quarters to materialize. For example, Micron detailed that initial output from its first Idaho fab is slated for mid-2027, while its Singapore fab and new Tongluo fab will add supply in late 2027 through 2028. Kioxia is planning to double its 2024 NAND capacity, but this will not be achieved until 2029, with equipment spending remaining below 2023 levels as NAND manufacturers remain cautious on spending to prevent oversupply.  

Samsung and SK Hynix are said to be prioritizing boosting 1c DRAM for HBM and DDR memory for AI applications, with NAND on the back burner for the two; SK Hynix is reportedly projecting a capacity boost in 1H 2027 to double 1c DRAM output, while  SK Hynix on the DRAM side, aiming to double its 1c DRAM output; Samsung is aiming to triple its 1c DRAM capacity by year-end 2026, supporting the ramp of HBM4. 

AI Networking:  

The stock market is like musical chairs, and you don't want to be the one left standing when the music stops. When it comes to networking companies gaining content on a platform or losing incremental share, nowhere does the supply chain shift faster than networking. This goes back to the differences between technologists and investors; an investor cannot afford to be the last one out whereas AI enthusiasts can devour information and debate without penalty. 

The reason networking sees immense volatility is straightforward: much of the market is tied to a single customer, Nvidia; and Nvidia is rolling out new architectural iterations at an unusually fast pace these days. 

On that note, we wanted to give our Members’ a heads-up last quarter that the copper-to-optics boundary was shifting, stating in the Q1 2026 AI Top 15 Report that: 

“While copper-based links remain essential for short-reach, low-latency connections—particularly within NVLink scale-up domains—the expansion of Ethernet fabrics, higher port counts, and the adoption of co-packaged optics are driving an inevitable shift toward optical content.   

Blackwell and Blackwell Ultra are fundamentally focused on solving scale-up problems, where the primary challenge is binding large numbers of GPUs into a single coherent node using ultra-dense, low-latency NVLink fabrics.   

Rubin, by contrast, is primarily focused on assisting higher bandwidth requirements, as the focus is now on sustaining inference and training workloads at scale without bottlenecks forming beyond NVLink. The limiting factor is how efficiently bandwidth can be delivered and distributed across racks and fabrics, resulting in higher port counts, faster link speeds (800G now and moving toward 1.6T). 

[…] The increasing amount of computing nodes (especially as Nvidia pushes towards the NVL576 with Rubin Ultra) along with increasing amount of interconnects means that bandwidth must also increase, from 400G to 800G and now to 1.6T, to ensure that low-latency, high-throughput communication remains across the entire platform.  

As a result, it’s expected that optics move closer to the switch, as copper and AEC content becomes constrained by reach and signal integrity. The result is a networking stack where silicon photonics capture incremental value, even though copper remains relevant and intact at the shortest distances. “ 

To continue on the theme for this report, networking is no longer optimized around compute. Instead, the road map for AI systems is forced to address fixed power envelopes while also preparing for larger clusters. Not surprisingly, the motivation to move to silicon photonics and co-packaged optics is also about reducing power consumption, stating CPO could “slash power consumption by 3.5X compared to traditional pluggable transceivers.” The press release goes onto say that by eliminating external DSPs and reducing the signal path from inches to millimeters, CPOs “dramatically boost power efficiency.” 

There are additional reasons, such as reducing component count and enhancing performance as adding DSPs can result in latency, as well. This becomes even more evident as data rates become faster with DSPs consuming half the power draw of a 1.6 Tbps transceiver.  

In a recent press release, Broadcom stated co-packaged optics can offer 65% power savings compared to re-timed pluggable optics. These may seem like big numbers but remember that compute is the bulk of the power draw, thus the overall impact is likely in the single digits.  

Although both of these companies have voracious appetites to control as much of the scale-up networking stack as possible, there are key areas where smaller vendors can participate, such as supplying ASIC switches, optical transceivers including lasers like EML, VSCEL, CW, Silicon Photonics chips and interconnects.  

To illustrate the opportunities for smaller vendors, Lumentum has been able to capitalize on tight EML supply and pricing power. In fact, EML shortages are so severe, that hyperscalers are accelerating the SiPho timeline by adopting alternatives like a combination of CW lasers and silicon photonics to forego waiting for more indium phosphide (InP) supply.  

The CW laser-SiPho combination combines a continuous-wave (CW) laser with a silicon photonics chip to handle modulation, which opens up the supplier base. Here is what a December TrendForce press release stated: 

“CW lasers offer a steady optical signal and are paired with silicon photonics chips produced at semiconductor foundries used as external modulators. Their simpler design stems from the absence of integrated modulation, which broadens supplier options. Consequently, CW lasers combined with silicon photonics have become the main alternative route for CSPs facing EML shortages. 

However, CW production faces increasing constraints due to several factors: long equipment lead times restrict expansion, and strict reliability standards necessitate labor-intensive die-cutting and aging tests. Consequently, many vendors outsource these steps, which adds to downstream bottlenecks. This situation is causing the CW ecosystem to approach a capacity crunch, leading suppliers to hasten their expansion efforts.” 

Yet, even if EML demand can source elsewhere to alleviate the bottleneck, a company like Lumentum remains in pole position to supply external InP-based CW lasers along with other suppliers. 

We also recently covered a long-haul networking supplier on the Discovery tier that specializes in long-haul networks, an area that Nvidia and Broadcom are unlikely to compete with vendors as it requires expertise in telecom networks and the ability to distribute AI traffic between data centers.  

Another growth opportunity is VSCEL lasers, which are ideal for high-volume and short-reach interconnects as they are low power and low cost. Broadcom recently emphasized VSCEL lasers for their ability to help AI clusters scale beyond copper while still providing short-reach efficiency. This is called near-packaged optics (NPO) and will bridge the limitation of copper today with the 1+ year deployment of co-packaged optics.  

Here is what Broadcom stated – note this is a longer quote but nicely summarizes how the shift toward optics is likely to play out: 

“The insatiable demand for compute power in AI and high-performance computing (HPC) is rapidly approaching a fundamental physical barrier: the limits of copper connectivity. As next-generation XPUs demand bandwidths soaring toward 28.8 Tbps, traditional copper interconnects are struggling to keep pace. 

With SerDes rates reaching 100 Gbps per lane, the effective reach of Direct Attached Copper (DAC) has shrunk to a mere 5 meters. For operators, this restricted electrical signal is a roadblock to building the massive, disaggregated AI clusters required for the next era of innovation. 

While the future of data center connectivity is undeniably optical, the path forward requires a pragmatic approach. Co-Packaged Optics (CPO) remains the "North Star" for energy-efficient, high-bandwidth scaling, but the industry needs a high-performance solution that can be deployed today. 

Vertical Cavity Surface Emitting Laser (VCSEL)-based Near-Package Optics (NPO) serves as that essential bridge. By leveraging readily available 100 Gbps VCSEL technology—with 200 Gbps solutions already in development—NPO offers a practical, high-performance alternative to traditional pluggable optics.” 

Note: We will be publishing a thematic piece on the CPO opportunity later this month. We plan to continue tracking this space closely as it evolves and aim to offer best-in-class execution, particularly given that many of our top winners over the past 12 to 18 months have come from AI networking. 

AI Monetization is Heating Up 

If you and I were in an elevator and I had only a few seconds to explain my view on the AI market, I’d say this: the biggest opportunity for AI stock returns still lies ahead, not behind us. 

A few months back, I wrote in a free newsletter that the greatest risk to an investor is not an AI bubble or the many other headlines that surface and weaken AI stocks, but rather the biggest risk in the current market is that an investor misses out on what be one of the strongest investing opportunities of our lifetime: what I’ve dubbed the AI Monetization Supercycle catalyzed by the inference phase. 

Recently, Reuters reported that OpenAI is seeing more than $25 billion in annualized revenue (although at what margin is still to be seen). OpenAI also recently stated enterprise now makes up 40% of revenue, and adoption on its consumer remains strong with 900 million weekly active users. 

Anthropic also revealed that its revenue run rate has now surpassed $30 billion in early April, more than doubling from February’s $14 billion and up $21 billion since the end of 2025. This helps investors with timing as it illustrates we are moving away from the experimental R&D phase. Notably, this is the fastest ramp in revenue we’ve seen in the tech industry. 

Tokens are the ‘currency’ of this monetization wave, and there’s ample evidence that the market is continuing to underestimate the sheer volume growth ahead in tokens (and thus revenue) as inference-based applications expand and new use cases pop up week after week. Dell’s COO Jeff Clarke provided a great visual on the growth point, explaining that his company had originally modeled inference driving 1 quadrillion tokens by 2028, but now that view has already risen 57X: 

“The demand for inference, long thinking, auto aggressive reasoning models is now requiring more computational intensity. At minimum, at a minimum, 100x, two orders of magnitude greater than we thought less than a year ago. More than two orders of magnitude more than we thought just a year ago. And while that shows up in, in the form of tokens, the measure and what do tokens need, tokens need computational capacity and capability to provide them. We thought as we model this, that inference would drive by 2028, 1 quadrillion, that's 15 zeros, 1 quadrillion tokens. Now it's 57 quadrillion, and I'm sure we're wrong.”  

To wrap your head around just how big 57 quadrillion, if you spent $1 million dollars each and every day, it would take more than 156 million years to reach that number.  

What’s more impressive here is that the token growth is already rapidly accelerating and well on the way to reach that 57 quadrillion estimate. Alphabet revealed in Q4’s earnings in early February that its first party models including Gemini were processing more than 10 billion tokens per minute via direct API use, up more than 40% QoQ from 7 billion per minute in Q3. To apply this to Dell’s framework, that would be more than 5 quadrillion tokens annualized. 

According to a note written by OpenAI’s CFO in early April, their APIs are processing 15 billion tokens per minute, up 2.5X from 6 billion tokens per minute just six months ago in October. This would represent nearly 7.9 quadrillion tokens annualized. 

Combined, Alphabet and OpenAI alone are processing nearly 13 quadrillion tokens annualized, while growing  >40% QoQ and 5X YoY. When taking into account Anthropic, AWS, Azure, OCI and all of the other R&D labs running models in the cloud, we may well be at the 57 quadrillion pace at some point this year.   

Perhaps more important than revenue is the capability of models with OpenAI’s GPT 5.4 “Thinking” model scoring 83% on the GDPVal benchmark, placing it at or above human experts on economically valuable tasks. In Morgan Stanley’s “Intelligence Factory” model, these breakthroughs “lead to an accelerating learning curve, with successive models rapidly outperforming their predecessors”  

In other words, because models are outperforming their predecessors, it makes for a case for more AI spend (not less), supported by the unprecedented revenue trajectories we are seeing from R&D labs now, but likely Big Tech soon too.  

In their last earnings report, Microsoft stated, “We are only at the beginning phases of AI diffusion and already Microsoft has built an AI business that is larger than some of our biggest franchises.”  

Alphabet stated they’ve sold more than 8 million paid Gemini Enterprise seats to more than 2,800 companies with customer interactions growing 65% year-over-year – all within four months. The management team made another comment about the impact AI is having on independent software vendors, stating: “Revenue from AI solutions built by our partners increased nearly 300% year-over-year, and commitments from our top 15 software partners grew more than 16x year-over-year.” 

Initial Signs the Agentic AI Market is Taking Off 

Model context protocol (MCP) is a standard that lets AI models connect to external tools, data and systems. The standard allows AI to have access to tools and to be able to take actions, which marks an important shift to agentic AI. It also will lead to skyrocketing inference demand as the protocol allows AI agents to query databases, make API calls and execute, leading to significantly higher token usage.   

Anthropic released MCP as an open standard in late 2024, with OpenAI adopting it in April of 2025, Microsoft adopted MCP in July of 2025, and AWS in November of 2025. Today, MCP-compatible tooling was donated to the Linux Foundation and is the default protocol for agentic AI with 97 million downloads. MCP is often compared to TCP/IP, or the internet protocol that is owned by nobody yet enabled extensive development across the broader web. Furthermore, without a standardized protocol, developers would have to build observability at an unsustainable level for every tool integration. 

MCP is what powers Claude Code’s workflows, allowing the LLM to use internal databases and external APIs. AI is transitioning toward “autonomous execution engines” by going beyond the terminal command on a computer to now accessing external tools, such as querying a database or sending Slack messages. Each MCP connection results in a bigger and better workflow, adding to the complexity that AI agents can handle autonomously.  

MCP adoption is essentially a leading indicator for the enterprise agentic AI market, as it’s the protocol that deploys AI agents that are capable of production at the system-level. The acceleration in SDKs from 2 million monthly downloads to 97 million across about 18 months is signaling the inference market is beginning to take off.  

Although I can’t promise timing will be exactly in 2026, a reasonable assumption is 2H 2026-2028 time frame. Gartner is more bullish on timing than even myself, stating 40% of enterprise applications will integrate task-specific agents by 2026, up from less than 5% in mid-2025. According to Deloitte, 93% of IT leaders plan to introduce autonomous agents in the next two years, while nearly half have already implemented them. 

Going back to my introduction on execution, and pointing to where I plan to hit the ball, the inference opportunity resembles more of a zero-sum game. We can see evidence of the market agreeing as the software trade has been hit hard lately. The I/O Fund team is cautiously optimistic for a time when software dominates our portfolio again; but that time is not right now.  

AI Energy: Last but Certainly Not Least 

Although I originally thought compute would mark the largest supply-demand imbalance in my career, remarkably, there is another imbalance that carries far more importance. Which brings me to our last thematic trend for Q2: AI Energy. 

Two years ago, the I/O Fund began setting the stage to remain competitive on portfolio returns by introducing energy to our Research Members when we stated: “Big Tech is spending tens of billions quarterly on AI accelerators, which has led to an exponential increase in power consumption. Over the past few months, multiple forecasts and data points reveal soaring data center electricity demand, and surging power consumption. The rise of generative AI and surging GPU shipments is causing data centers to scale from tens of thousands to 100,000-plus accelerators, shifting the emphasis to power as a mission-critical problem to solve.” 

At the time of publishing, there was not even a whisper on the Street about the incoming fundamental bottleneck to AI data center expansion. While those who only follow our free analysis think we’ve been stuck on the Nvidia thesis for years, the truth is Nvidia hasn’t been our leading allocation for quite a while.  

As you know by now, Bloom Energy was one of our biggest winners last year and I reiterated it was a Top Stock Pick for 2026. But it would be too narrow to focus on Bloom as the only destination for our energy allocation. We have many others we want to own when the timing is right.  

Consider this question from my point of view, which is, will there be a time when energy dominates our AI allocation, even above and beyond AI accelerators or networking? Yes, that time is approaching. We want to be fastidious in our analysis now given the I/O Fund tends to be about 2 years earlier than the Street – and well, we are coming up on our first coverage being 2 years ago, indicating the time for energy to lead could be nearer than you might think. 

Briefly Revisiting the AI Energy Thesis 

Up to this point, we’ve hammered on the increase in power requirements across Nvidia’s GPU systems. To keep the math simple, it looks like this: 

  • Blackwell doubled the power consumption of the previous Hopper generation from 70 kW to 120 KW-140 kW.  
  • Vera Rubin will increase 50% from 180 kW to 230 kW  
  • Rubin Ultra racks with 576 GPUs will increase this by roughly 3X to 600 kW by late 2027. That’ll represent 5X in a two-year design timeframe. 

Note, these figures do not include networking, interconnects, cooling and other hardware, which will further boost power draw per rack. 

The numbers above reveal Nvidia’s aggressive product road map is set to release new GPUs every 1-2 years, yet grid infrastructure operates on a 5-10 year timeline. For example, in its largest configuration, the Vera Rubin NVL576, dubbed the ‘Kyber’ rack, could draw as much as 600kW or 5x that of the GB200 NVL72 in just a two-year design timeframe. 

Therein lies the compounding problem that brought us to Bloom Energy, which is that current data centers are fitted for 50kW racks and need to be retrofitted for 600kW racks. This will move to 1 MW racks as AI servers are expected to use over 1000 kW of power in the Feynman architecture due out in 2028, which represents 8X the power requirements of Blackwell in about 4 years' time. 

In the Q1 2026 Top 15 AI Stocks Report, I emphasized the timing issue the AI data center buildout faces specifically between 2026-2029: 

“For example, across the board, developers are expecting to have power delivered by late 2026 to early 2027 on average, with most regions seeing expectations as early as late 2025. This is likely driven by consistent strong demand for AI infrastructure services, as new capacity will allow hyperscalers to meet more demand and drive more revenue.  

Yet, utilities do not expect to be able to meet these delivery timelines in most of these primary and secondary markets, with many projecting late 2027 through 2028, with major hub Northern Virginia seeing one of the longest timelines at nearly 2029.” 

Since I wrote that in mid-January, the problem has only been exacerbated. The capex raise we saw in late January through early February of nearly 40% to $600 billion is bullish for key suppliers but also puts into question how to power an increase in compute that is into the hundreds of billions year-over-year.  

For example, following capex raises, this estimate from Congress.Gov on January 23rd is likely outdated, which states that U.S. data center energy use comprised 4.4% of the United States annual electricity consumption yet is expected to consume 12% by 2028 for a 3X increase. 

Evidence Mounts on the Incoming Energy Shortage 

Evidence of an energy shortage is growing each quarter. For example, we covered in a Discovery tier analysis that PJM clearing prices have surged to the tune of 11X over the past two years. This began in the 2025/26 auction, where clearing prices jumped 833% from $28.92/MW-day to $269.17/MW-day, reaching the annual cap. The 2026/27 auction saw prices once again hit the FERC-approved cap at $329.17/MW-day, a 22% YoY increase. 

Skyrocketing power prices and elevated risk of grid shortfalls from a fifth consecutive year of declining supply puts major emphasis on adding new capacity to the grid. What the Street (and the public) have not realized yet is the extent of the incoming capacity that is being claimed by data centers. PJM reported in August that it's long-term projected load growth from 2024 through 2030 would be 32GW, with 30GW of that coming from data centers, assuming many data center projects materialize on time.  

However, the problem here is that PJM’s forecasting has recently underestimated peak demand growth, even with significant upward revisions over the last few years. For example, realized peak demand is already approaching 160 GW, nearly two years ahead of current forecasts, and if data center builds progress at current (or accelerated) paces, peak load may continue to outpace forecasts through 2030. 

This helps explain why the market is not unilaterally rewarding Nvidia for capex raises in the same manner as during the Hopper architecture. Not only will a higher percentage of capex be allocated to energy; but it’s also a puzzle as to how this will be perfectly resolved. We had noted in a previous analysis the risk is that GPUs sit idle: 

“If a company like Microsoft buys tens of billions of Nvidia’s Blackwell GPUs, the longer the massive investment in GPUs waits for power, the more delayed that revenue and profits become. In turn, this plays into market share as competitors who can energize GPUs faster will have a critical head start over those that are waiting for power. This is simple in concept, yet the lack of power having vast consequences cannot be overstated if you combine the sheer size of investments being made in AI alongside fierce, heightened competition. 

AI is a spending race, but this means it is at the core, a power race. It does not matter if a hyperscaler spends tens of billions more on capex if it cannot secure the power to stand up new data center infrastructure to then deploy those GPUs immediately. The AI market is officially moving from being compute constrained to being power constrained, and this shift is important for I/O Fund members to prepare for.” –Why Power is Critical for Data CentersWhy Power is Critical for Data Centers 

Notably, most growth investors do not have experience generating returns in the energy sector. It has long been one of the most difficult industries to find alpha, given its lumpy cycles, commodity sensitivity, and heavy exposure to regulation. 

That is where the I/O Fund’s flexibility becomes a meaningful advantage. Our process is designed to be early to stocksearly to stocks (as opposed to a process that is designed to establish expertise in only one domain). This has allowed us to find winners year after year in every subsector of technology. You can fully expect us to use our flexible yet effective process in the energy sector over the coming years. 

Large-Scale Utility:

Large-scale utility is naturally the first subsector to think of to address the energy crisis. Utilities benefit when there is this much demand because one thing utilities do well is deliver reliably.  

As discussed, the PJM clearing prices saw prices surge 11X over the past two years when you combine the 2025/2026 prices jump 833% to $269.17/MW-day and then again 22% in the 2026/2027 auction prices to $333.44/MW-day. When you consider zones that are further constrained, such as BGE and Dominion, the prices increased even further to $465.35/MW-day and $444.26/MW-day, respectively, in the 2026/2027 auction. 

This represents a cap for the $333.44 MW-day as the auction pricing would have hit $530/MW-day without the cap. 

When we look at large-scale utility stocks such as Talen, Constellation Energy or Vistra, the high auction prices are leading to higher prices on their existing assets. Although that may seem intuitive, the key here is they don’t have to spend more on capex to report higher profits – which is a rarity right now. 

Utilities like Constellation Energy, Vistra and Talen earn capacity revenue in addition to energy revenue. The retainer payment correlates to the following capacities: 

  • Constellation cleared 17,950 MW in the latest auction for roughly $2.2 billion in capacity revenue for 27/28. 
  • Vista cleared 10,566 MW in the latest auction for roughly $1.3 billion in capacity revenue for the 27/28 year 
  • Talen cleared 8,745 MW in the latest auction for about $1.1 billion. 

According to a recent report from Morningstar, energy prices increased from $33.74 MWh to $50.73 MWh in 2025, for an increase of 50.4%. If we break the report down further, we see that capacity costs are skyrocketing. 

  • Energy is 59.6 percent of the cost of wholesale power and rose 51.2% 
  • Capacity is 15.8 percent of the cost of wholesale power and rose 262.3% 
  • Transmission is 22.4 percent of the cost of wholesale power and rose 4.5% 

Capacity is where the auction pricing surge is showing up as energy companies are paid more just for having capacity exist. When energy pricing goes up, it’s because energy costs more. However, capacity pricing is surging while Utility companies do very little to justify this increase as there were no new plants built or new upgrades. Conversely, Utilities benefit from not adding new plants as it creates scarcity pricing. 

As you can imagine, residential and commercial customers in data center regions aren’t too happy about having to absorb capacity pricing, which is allocated more broadly rather than tied to usage. For example, according to a recent report from IEEFA, the residential bill in Maryland is expected to go up $18/month and up $16/month in Ohio, as " ratepayers across the region will collectively be paying an additional $1.4 billion in capacity market costs, again driven largely by data center demand.” 

This is important to consider as investors typically want to see uncapped growth in a stock, yet growing concerns from consumers could lead to another capped PJM auction come June 2026. 

Talen is more of a pureplay for PJM auction pricing compared to Constellation which includes the recent Calpine acquisition, a retail business and is exposed to many markets outside of PJM like gas-heavy ERCOT and CAISO. Although Talen is not entirely PJM, it’s heavily centered in this market, which helps to strip out the revenue trajectory seen below. The main takeaway is the bulk of the growth is accounted for in the strong 2026 year, yet there is a leveling out in future years as it implies capped auction pricing.  

However, profits are expected to outpace revenue growth, which means despite Utilities not fitting the growth characteristics we typically seek at the I/O Fund, there could be times their defensibility is attractive. 

Behind-the-Meter: 

There exists a significant disconnect between when hyperscale and colocation developers expect to have site power, and when large-scale utilities expect to be able to deliver. This means even if you want to build a new facility for 600kW racks, getting power to it is a multi-year ordeal.  

Due to time constraints, connecting new data centers to the grid is not the most feasible option for hyperscalers looking to deploy gigawatts of capacity quickly, and instead, alternative power sources in the near term will be in higher demand. This is supported by research from TD Cowen regarding grid connection timelines for new data centers, which span anywhere from 36 months to 48 months in these markets. In 2024, Bloomberg reported that utility Dominion Energy said >100MW data centers in Virginia were facing up to seven year wait times for new connection hookups. 

This has led to firms like McKinsey predicting 25% to 33% of net new generation will come from behind-the-meter solutions by 2030. This is significant considering the market was effectively zero going into the AI boom. 

We've covered the advantages of behind-the-meter and on-site power generation for about two years. Briefly, it refers to bypassing the grid entirely by generating power on-site or nearby with solutions like natural gas turbines, small modulator nuclear reactors, fuel cells and solar/batteries. These solutions don’t require the grid and can be deployed in 1-2 years time or as quickly as 3 months in Bloom Energy’s case. 

In our September analysis, we began to answer the question of how many GWs correlate to capex spending. For 2025, we had projected Big Tech could bring on 7-9 GWs with 2025 capex, and then 9-12 GWs with 2026 projected capex, for a total of 16-21 GWs across the two years. We raised this another 4GWs to include Oracle for a total of 20-25GWs for 2025 and 2026, yet this still does not include xAI, CoreWeave or Nebius. 

Given the capex increases we saw in January, that 2026 number has nearly doubled, even without including the neoclouds, with our September framework projecting Big Tech and Oracle could bring on 16-20GW this year alone. Cumulatively, that could bring total capacity additions in 2025 and 2026 to 23-29GW.  

Put another way, any raise in capex spending over the next two years puts greater emphasis on behind-the-meter solutions.

The Case for the Miners 

The term “don’t throw the baby out with the bath water” could apply to Bitcoin Miners. Despite weak price action over the past few months, it’s hard to imagine a way forward without utilizing these brownfield sites.  

Applied Digital pointed out that less than two percent of data centers have racks with greater than 50kW. Where retrofitting is attractive is not necessarily the costs associated with construction but rather that the turnaround time for using an existing facility can be shortened from 4-7 years to 18 months to 30 months. 

Bitcoin mining is not behind-the-meter in a strict sense, but it is effectively behind-the-meter because miners secure direct, wholesale power through upfront contracts that are not renegotiated. They are also considered on-site power as there is minimal transmission dependency due to co-locating near a mix of power sources (near gas plants, augmented by wind, solar, water/hydro). In most cases, even if a utility meter exists, the power system is purpose-built for that site and is not shared retail infrastructure. This also helps equal the playing field as the biggest drawback for Bitcoin Miners is they need extensive retrofitting.  

You’ve heard me use the words “time to power” before to describe Bloom Energy’s investment thesis. Bitcoin Miners are similar – they offer time to power. Not only do Bitcoin Miners offer speed, but they also offer below-market rates to hyperscalers. 

Regarding the weak balance sheets, for the very best power sites, this will transform quickly as these companies are transitioning from volatility that is characteristic of Bitcoin to AI contracts that provide fixed, recurring revenue with 80% to 90% operating margins. What will matter is if the market is willing to re-rate these stocks based on Big Tech being the collateral backing them as we are seeing about $3 billion or more in convertible notes and long-term debt in some of these names with very little revenue (yet). 

The debt plays a big part as to why Bitcoin Miners go in and out of fashion, but underneath the debt is execution risk. We will often see large revenue targets offered by the management teams, yet the market is essentially saying – we need more evidence you can deliver what you say you will.  

In terms of how we plan to play this, not much has changed in terms of the risk profile of Miners and our overall investment strategy: 

“Right now, we prefer to stay as close to the hyperscaler deals as possible when evaluating Bitcoin Miners. The reason for this is that it solves the pain point of having a company with deep pockets back-stop the leases, which in turn, improves creditworthiness and credit terms. As many of you are aware, our ethos is to participate in the upside while protecting to the downside. We want the best of both worlds, and in a highly speculative momentum play like Bitcoin Miners pivoting to AI data center infrastructure, the primary goal is to reduce risk.” -September 2025 Discovery Analysis on Bitcoin MinerSeptember 2025 Discovery Analysis on Bitcoin Miner 

Join the Discovery tier for early access to stock ideas and to stay ahead of where the market is heading next. To subscribe to Discovery with 40% off, click here to email us or email premium@io-fund.com and mention code DISCOVERY40 Discovery with 40% off, click here to email us or email premium@io-fund.com and mention code DISCOVERY40 

Top 15 AI Stocks List 

Section 1: AI Accelerator Stocks 

Broadcom: Strong Contender for First Place 

Broadcom guided to $22 billion in FQ2 revenue up 47% YoY and adjusted EBITDA at 68% of revenue. Within that, management guided semiconductor revenue to $14.8 billion, up 76% YoY, and AI revenue to $10.7 billion, up 140% YoY, indicating an acceleration from Q1.   

The most explosive comment was this: “Today, in fact, we have line of sight to achieve AI revenue from chips, just chips in excess of $100 billion in 2027. We have also secured the supply chain required to achieve this.”   

Management characterized this demand as being driven by a small number of hyperscalers  and frontier model builders, with both training and inference contributing as those customers will soon productize their LLM platforms. Within discussing the impressive customer list, the CEO of Broadcom hinted toward 2027 being significantly higher than $100 billion – plus another analyst did math that would show a sharp inflection in 2028 due to OpenAI’s incoming GWs. 

In our last Quarterly write-up, it was stated that Morgan Stanley now expects 5 million TPUs to be shipped in 2027, a 67% rise from its prior estimate for 3 million; for 2028, the firm estimates shipments as high as 7 million, a 120% increase from its prior estimate. This would project YoY growth of 40% from 2027 to 2028, a substantial increase from 6% previously, and will represent more than 2X growth in two years. 

More recently, Hong Kong-based GF Securities stated that they now expect total TPU shipments to be 4.5 million/7.9 million units in 2026E/2027E, up from previous estimates of 4.5 million/6 million. The upward revision is primarily driven by external sales. For Broadcom, they expect its TPUs to be 4.1 million/5.8 million for 2026E/2027E. 

We had stated the estimates provided in the Thematic section were a bit aggressive, yet rather it lands at 6 million or higher for Broadcom in FY2027, the direction is firmly up. Even with MediaTek potentially taking some TPU business on the inference side, Broadcom is in pole position across many hyperscaler customers. 

Revenue: 

Broadcom’s FQ1 ending January 2026 revenue grew by 29.5% YoY and 7.2% QoQ to $19.3 billion, beating estimates by 0.9%. Revenue growth accelerated by 1.3 percentage points from 28.2% growth in the previous quarter.   

Management provided a strong FQ2 guide of $22 billion, implying a YoY growth of 46.6% and 13.9% QoQ, beating estimates by 7.8%.  

The expected strong growth is primarily driven by AI revenue, which is expected to grow 140% YoY and 27% QoQ to $10.7 billion. Analysts expect strong revenue growth to continue, with FQ3 revenue expected to grow 81.8% YoY $29 billion and 87.5% YoY to $33.8 billion in FQ4. 

AI Revenue: 

AI revenue was at $8.4 billion this quarter and is guided to $10.7 billion next quarter for a run rate of about $43 billion. On the surface, the guide doesn’t look like much and would imply a deceleration given AI is growing at a rate of 140% YoY and 27% QoQ – whereas this is effectively saying Broadcom will double in 7-8 quarters.   

However, the easy-to-miss details on the guide is that the $100 billion is only for silicon and does not include networking. The words “significantly in excess” were also added later to the guide in the following statement during the Q&A portion. 

According to the earnings call, networking is about 33% to 40% of AI revenue today: “AI networking revenue grew 60% year-on-year and represented 1/3 of total AI revenue. In Q2, we project AI networking to accelerate a lot more and grow to 40% of total AI revenue.”  

If we assume this mix continues on the low end for about 30% mix in AI networking of total AI revenue, then it’s reasonable to assume Broadcom’s AI revenue will be $143 billion with networking of $43 billion (or 30% of $143B). This represents a QoQ growth of 30% for 7-8 quarters – which is an excellent baseline to set. 

Earnings: 

FQ1 GAAP EPS grew by 31.6% YoY to $1.50. Adjusted EPS grew by 28.1% YoY to $2.05, beating estimates by 1.3%, primarily driven by operating leverage. 

Margins: 

The company’s adjusted EBITDA margins beat management guidance in FQ1, primarily driven by operating leverage.  

Gross profit margin improved by 10 basis points YoY and QoQ to 68.1%. Adjusted gross margin came at 77%, down 210 basis points YoY and 90 basis points QoQ and marginally beat the guidance by 10 basis points. 

Operating margin improved by 230 basis points YoY and 260 basis points QoQ to 44.3% primarily driven by operating leverage. The adjusted operating margin was 66.4%, compared to 65.9% in the same period last year and 66.2% in the previous quarter.  

FQ1 net income grew by 33.5% YoY to $7.35 billion with a net profit margin of 38.1% compared to 36.9% in the same period last year. 

FQ1 adjusted EBITDA grew by 30.2% YoY to $13.1 billion with an adjusted EBITDA margin of 68% and was better than the management guidance of 67%.  

Cash: 

Broadcom’s cash flows are improving, driven by higher profits.  

FQ1 operating cash flows grew by 35.1% YoY to $8.26 billion with an operating cash flow margin of 42.8% compared to 41% in the same period last year. 

FQ1 free cash flows grew by 33.2% YoY to $8.01 billion with a free cash flow margin of 41.5% compared to 40.3% in the same period last year.  

Cash was $14.2 billion at the end of FQ1 with debt of $66.1 billion compared to cash of $16.2 billion and debt of $65.1 billion at the end of FQ4. The company repurchased shares worth $7.85 billion and paid dividends of $3.1 billion in the recent quarter. 

Valuation: 

Broadcom trades at a forward P/S ratio of 16.9. The company traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 6.7 and the maximum of 28.8 in recent years. Broadcom is currently trading around the mid-range. On the bottom line, it is trading at a forward P/E ratio of 32.6. The company traded at a minimum forward P/E ratio of 17.3 and a maximum of 57.2. Broadcom is trading slightly lower than the mid-range on the forward P/E ratio. 

Notable Risks: 

Broadcom’s debt load has increased following past acquisitions, which adds balance-sheet risk. That said, the company has a strong track record of deleveraging and generates substantial cash flow, which helps offset this concern. 

Google is deliberately diversifying away from depending solely on Broadcom, giving itself more leverage on pricing and supply chain resilience. MediaTek is a clear winner in this shift, but Broadcom retains a meaningful role in the core TPU architecture for now, and Broadcom is also growing in importance with other hyperscalers such as Meta. 

Arm Stock Could Win as Agentic AI Shifts the Bottleneck to CPUs

Arm unveiled an AGI CPU last month to address one of AI’s biggest bottlenecks, which is orchestration. During the chatbot craze of 2023-2025, GPUs did most of the heavy lifting while CPUs had become an afterthought. Yet with agentic workloads, which is perhaps the single largest catalyst on the horizon for the AI trade in 2026 and beyond, the importance of CPUs is set to increase.  

In agentic workflows, the GPU still handles inference, but between each inference call, the CPU is doing the orchestration – which are best described as handling tool calls, API requests and memory tasks. AI agents are surfacing this new constraint, which is how to prevent latency and underutilized GPUs following the exponential growth of orchestration needs. 

For investors, what matters is that CPUs account for 50% to 90% of total latency in workflows, which means the CPU-to-GPU ratio in AI clusters will need to increase. Earlier this year, both AMD and Intel saw analyst upgrades based on the outstripped supply of CPUs leading to higher average sales prices of roughly 10% to 15%. Reuters also reported that Intel’s unfulfilled orders are reaching longer than six months while AMD delivery times are believed to be eight to 10 weeks. 

Regarding how Arm fits in, the company’s expertise in lowering power requirements could matter more than the market expects. After years of supplying the architecture IP behind other companies’ CPUs, Arm is preparing to directly compete with its customers and x86 CPU competitors by transitioning to a chip designer themselves. This comes during a time when CPU cores are expected to go up 4X from 30 million CPU cores per gigawatt to 120 million CPU cores per GW. 

Revenue: 

Q3 FY2026 ending December revenue was up 26.1% YoY and 9.4% QoQ to $1.242 billion, representing a record quarter for revenue and exceeding $1 billion for the fourth consecutive quarter. 

Key Advantages of Arm’s ‘AGI CPU’ for Agentic AI Workloads 

Arm also marked its long-awaited foray into physical chip development with its ‘AGI CPU’, launched at its Arm Everywhere event last month. The company’s pivot into physical CPU and rack development is one the AI industry will watch with great anticipation given Arm’s history of owning significant IP in the mobile space combined with the company setting out to solve agentic AI’s orchestration challenges.  

Leveraging Arm’s history of delivering high performance with low power requirements for mobile devices, the new AGI CPU is designed to offer a similar balance between high performance and low power consumption.   

The AGI CPU was co-developed with key partner Meta, the chip’s first customer, who revealed they turned to Arm almost two-and-a-half years ago to see if there was a CPU option that fit Meta’s needs: “put in a lot more cores per watt, but we do not want to compromise on the performance piece.” Meta had only been finding options satisfying one of the two criteria: meeting the performance but with too much power, or meeting the power but with too little performance. 

Margins: 

Arm has a profitable business model that constitutes licensing revenue and royalty revenue. The company reported a strong gross margin of 97.6% in Q3 FY2026 ending December.   

Arm reported a GAAP operating margin of 14.9% and an adjusted operating margin of 40.7% in the recent quarter. The difference between adjusted operating margin and GAAP operating margin is that the company is a recent IPO and has high stock-based compensation of $285 million or 23% of revenue. 

Cash: 

The company’s cash flows have been lumpy due to high working capital and high capex to support the long-term growth. However, with the expected strong future profit growth, the cash flows should improve. The company also has a strong balance sheet with cash & short-term investments of $3.54 billion and no debt. 

Valuation: 

Arm is currently trading at a P/S ratio of 37.1 and a forward P/S ratio of 29.1. The company is trading significantly higher than its other semiconductor peers like Broadcom’s forward P/S ratio of 16.9 and Nvidia’s forward P/S ratio of 12.4.  

The company’s revenue growth is expected to accelerate in the next five years compared to the previous period. The company’s revenue CAGR has been 19.3% from FY2021 to FY2026E. Analysts expect revenue to grow at a CAGR of 34% from FY2026E to FY2031E and will be even higher at 38.5% if we use the $25 billion management guidance. However, when looking at the AI segment of many semiconductor peers, the growth rate does not stand out, per se, to justify the high valuation. Rather, the consistency of licensing and royalties' revenue does stand out, and this recurring revenue will create a nice baseline when you combine higher growth from their merchant CPUs. 

Notable Risks: 

The company’s cash flows have been lumpy due to high working capital and high capex to support the long-term growth. 

AMD: Underestimated and Largely Misunderstood 

About 18 months ago, I spelled out AMD could outpace Nvidia’s returns by 2030 stating in a Real Vision video interview that the company’s opportunity is closely tied to the inference market.  

The overall thesis is that the data center GPU market desperately needs a second-place contender. Investors may appreciate Nvidia’s pricing power, but hyperscalers and companies like OpenAI do not; they’d like to see more competition and optionality including lower prices. That is why we are seeing Meta work alongside AMD to bring Helios to market and a recent 6GW deal from OpenAI.  

One key area where Helios stands out is memory — the platform offers roughly 50% more total memory capacity compared to Nvidia’s Vera Rubin rack architecture. AMD will offer 1.4 PB/s of memory bandwidth, slightly below Rubin’s 1.6 PB/s as Nvidia is said to be requiring pin speeds of 11 Gb/s, above the standard 8 Gb/s, driving the higher bandwidth despite lower HBM content. The HBM content and nearly comparable bandwidth will likely make AMD a compelling solution for inference workloads considering its price-advantage over Nvidia. 

Buried in the most recent earnings call was a rather strong statement for this otherwise-conservative management team that AMD is “well positioned” to grow data center revenue by more than 60% annually over a 3-5 year time frame:  

“With the launch of MI400 series and Helios representing a major inflection point for the business, as we deliver leadership performance and TCO at the chip compute tray and rack level. Based on the strength of our EPYC and Instinct road maps, we are well positioned to grow data center segment revenue by more than 60% annually over the next 3 to 5 years, and scale our AI business to tens of billions in annual revenue in 2027.”  

Given the strength of the comment, an analyst asked about the comment on the call and if the 60% applies to 2026 with management replying this is certainly possible:  

“We're not obviously guiding specifically by segment, but the long-term target of, let's call it, greater than 60% is certainly possible in 2026.” 

Per my last earnings writeup: “AMD Q3: The Catalyst is Expected in H2 2026," which stated, “AMD is a stock where I’ve been intentional about managing expectations. The upside is compelling — as the second place in data center GPUs is wide open. Yet for those who have followed our coverage, the timing has always been key: meaningful execution in AI accelerators is not expected to materialize until the second half of 2026. In other words, the long-term opportunity is substantial, but patience remains part of the thesis.” 

Revenue: 

AMD’s Q4 revenue grew by 34.1% YoY and 11.1% QoQ to $10.27 billion, beating estimates by 6.2%. However, the company’s revenue this quarter included approximately $390 million from MI308 sales to China and excluding this revenue since it was not included in the guidance would yield only a 2.2% beat, the smallest in the last four quarters. 

Management guided Q1 revenue of $9.8 billion at the midpoint, implying a YoY growth of 31.8% YoY and down (4.6%) QoQ and the guidance includes about $100 million of MI308 chip sales to China. 

AI Revenue: 

The company’s Data Center segment revenue grew by 39% YoY and 24% QoQ to a record $5.4 billion, led by accelerating Instinct MI350 Series GPU deployments and server share gains. However, it included MI308 chips sales to China, otherwise, would be only 29% YoY and 15% QoQ growth. MI450 ramp is expected in the second half of the year, particularly in Q4. The company remains on track to launch its MI500 chips in 2027.  

Earnings: 

The company’s Q4 adjusted EPS grew by 40.4% YoY to $1.53 primarily driven by operating leverage, beating estimates by 16%.  

Analysts expect Q1 adjusted EPS to grow 32.7% YoY to $1.27 and 195.7% YoY to $1.42 in Q2 2026. 

Margins: 

The company’s profits are growing. However, near term margins are negatively impacted by higher operating expenses to support strong future AI opportunities. Management expects margins to improve by the end of Q4 due to favorable product mix, particularly the ramp of MI450 chips.  

Q4 gross profits grew by 44% YoY and 17% QoQ to $5.58 billion. Adjusted gross profits grew by 41% YoY and 17% QoQ to $5.86 billion. Excluding the inventory reserve release and MI308 revenue from China, gross margin would have been 55%, up 100 basis points YoY and QoQ. Management has guided 55% adjusted gross margin in Q1. 

Operating margin improved by 600 basis points YoY and 300 basis points QoQ to 17%. Adjusted operating margin improved by 200 basis points YoY and 400 basis points QoQ to 28%. Management has guided an adjusted operating margin of 24% in Q1. The company’s near-term margins are negatively impacted by higher operating expenses to support strong future AI opportunities. 

Cash: 

Q4 operating cash flow grew by 77% YoY to $2.3 billion with an operating cash flow margin of 22%, up 500 basis points YoY and 300 basis points QoQ. 

Q4 free cash flow grew by 91% YoY to $2.1 billion with a free cash flow margin of 20%, up 600 basis points YoY and 300 basis points QoQ. 

The company has cash and short-term investments of $10.5 billion, up from $7.24 billion in Q3. While debt remained the same at $3.22 billion. 

Valuation: 

AMD is trading at a forward P/S ratio of 8.6. The company has traded at a minimum of 3.7 and a maximum of 13.3 in recent years. AMD is currently trading at mid-range. On the bottom-line, it is trading at a forward P/E ratio of 36.6. The company has traded at a minimum of 19.7 and a maximum of 66.4 in recent years. AMD is trading slightly lower than the mid-range on a forward P/E ratio. 

Notable Risks: 

AMD faces constraints around packaging capacity, particularly around CoWoS, where industry constraints can limit how quickly advanced AI accelerators are brought to market. There is also execution risk, as AMD must take on Nvidia. In addition, AMD’s AI mix may carry lower margins than investors prefer, especially as the company competes aggressively on price and invests to gain share.  

Lastly, Arm-based CPUs present a competitive risk in the server market, as hyperscalers continue exploring alternative architectures that could pressure x86 share over time. 

Nvidia: Seeking to Defend its Throne 

Inventories increased more than 8% QoQ to $21.4 billion, but more importantly, Nvidia’s supply related commitments surged. We highlighted this last quarter as a key sign that the strong data center QoQ revenue inflection would continue.   

In Q4, Nvidia’s supply-related commitments surged nearly 90% sequentially to $95.2 billion, a major step-up from the prior ~$28-30 billion range through late FY25 and the first half of FY26. Nvidia says it is strategically securing inventory and capacity to meet demand beyond the next several quarters, which we believe serves as a key sign that the current accelerated QoQ data center growth of ~$10 billion will likely persist as Blackwell Ultra continues ramping and as Vera Rubin ramps. 

While initially, this could be taken as evidence that Blackwell’s ramp is persisting; the more likely outcome now is that it signals a Rubin delay. If this is true, the risk is that it sits on the balance sheet until Rubin ships. However, the more likely scenario is that most of these commitments could be converted to Blackwell and Blackwell Ultra orders.  

TrendForce data supports this theory, stating that industry watchers expect Rubin to account for 22 percent of Nvidia’s high-end GPUs, down from 29 percent. As stated in our Thematic section, the reason stated is: “time required to validate the newer HBM4 memory used by the chips, challenges with the migration to Nvidia's faster ConnectX-9 NICs, the system's higher overall power consumption, and the more advanced liquid cooling requirements as contributing to the delays.”  

In the same article, the stated assumption is that Blackwell mix rises to 71% while Hopper is down to 7% from original expectations of 10% due to China tensions. 

According to additional checks, this is aligned with Keybanc, stating 2026 supply is expected to support "5.5M-6M Blackwell GPUs, 1.5M Rubin, and 1M Hopper GPUs.” KeyBanc’s estimates imply higher Hopper revenue – which is what could sting slightly – as these numbers would make up roughly 69% to 71% of Nvidia’s 2026 GPU output, while Rubin accounts for about 18% to 19% and Hopper about 12%. Keybanc also cut VR rack estimates by 50% to 6K, down from 12-14K.  

Overall Revenue Growth: 

Nvidia’s Q4 revenue accelerated to 73.2% YoY from 62.5% YoY in Q3, while QoQ growth moderated slightly to 20% QoQ from 22% in Q3, due to Nvidia’s increasing revenue base. Revenue for the quarter was $68.13 billion, beating estimates by 2.9%.  

For Q1, Nvidia guided revenue growth to accelerate further to 77% YoY, forecasting revenue to be $78 billion, +/- 2%, coming in well ahead of consensus for $72.03 billion. 

Sequential growth would again moderate to 14.5% QoQ at the midpoint of guidance, though again this is partly due to the law of large numbers as dollar growth is projected to be nearly $10 billion QoQ, versus $11.1 billion in Q4. 

AI Segment Growth: 

Data Center revenue in the quarter was $62.31 billion, with YoY growth accelerating nine points to 75% YoY although QoQ growth moderated 3 points to 22% QoQ, due to the larger revenue base. This compares to 25% QoQ growth last quarter, marking two strong back-to-back quarters from Blackwell Ultra shipping in volume.  

Within Data Center, Compute revenue rose 58% YoY and 19% QoQ to $51.33 billion, slowing from 27% QoQ in Q3 though YoY growth accelerated 2 points.  

Networking revenue was once again quite an outlier in Q4’s report, with growth accelerating sharply on both a YoY and QoQ basis in the quarter. Networking revenue was $10.98 billion in Q4, up 34% QoQ and 263% YoY – this represents more than a 100 point acceleration from 162% YoY growth in Q3, while QoQ growth accelerated 21 points. Nvidia said the strong growth stemmed from the introduction and ramp of NVLink compute fabric for both GB200 and GB300 systems, as well as growth in Ethernet, InfiniBand and Spectrum-X.  

On the call, it was stated that Nvidia is likely the largest Ethernet company in the world. 

Earnings: 

GAAP EPS saw a rather large beat in Q4, coming in at $1.76, up 98% YoY and beating estimates for $1.47 by more than 19%.  

Adjusted EPS was $1.62, up 82% YoY and beating estimates by just over 5%. Growth accelerated from 60.5% in Q3 and marked Nvidia’s fastest adjusted EPS growth in the last five quarters. 

Margins: 

Nvidia’s gross margins moved higher in Q4 to the 75% range, with GAAP operating margin following this expansion and moving back to the 65% level. To note, starting in Q1, Nvidia’s adjusted margin figures will include SBC.   

Q4 GAAP gross margin was 75%, slightly ahead of management’s guidance for 74.8% and expanding by 2 points YoY and 1.6 points QoQ, with the sequential expansion driven by Blackwell and better product mix. 

Q4 GAAP operating margin was 65%, also slightly ahead of guidance for 64.5%, and expanding 3.9 points YoY and 1.8 points QoQ, showing a hint of operating leverage. For Q1, Nvidia guided for operating margins to be flat at 65% and since the adjusted margin figures will include SBC, it will be lower sequentially at 65.4%.  

Q4 GAAP net margin was 63.1%, expanding 6.9 points YoY and 7.1 points QoQ, while adjusted net margin was 57.2%, up 1.1 points YoY and 1.5 points QoQ. 

Cash: 

Cash flows were robust in Q4, with cash flow margins improving significantly on both a YoY and QoQ basis. Operating cash flow was $36.2 billion in Q4 for a 53.1% margin, up 10.9 points YoY and 11.4 points QoQ.  

Free cash flow was $34.9 billion for a 51.2% margin, up 11.7 points YoY and 12.4 points QoQ. Cash and equivalents totaled $62.6 billion, while debt was $8.47 billion. 

Valuation: 

Nvidia trades at a forward P/S ratio of 12.4. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 10.8 and a maximum of 28.3 in recent years. Nvidia is currently trading significantly lower than mid-range. On the bottom line, it trades at a forward P/E ratio of 22.7. Nvidia has traded at a minimum forward P/E ratio of 19.9 and a maximum of 50.6 in recent years. Nvidia is currently trading significantly lower than mid-range.  

Notable Risks: 

Net-net on the Rubin delay: Given Blackwell backfill, revenue may not be heavily impacted yet the optics around the delay could lead to more diversification into custom programs and AMD GPUs. Rubin systems go for a higher average sales price, yet the bigger issue isn’t losing the markup in the near-term but rather: 1) is the delay truly only one quarter (we’ve been here before and the delay was longer) and 2) Nvidia’s product road map is not seen as invincible. If you recall, I stated the product road map is the second line of defense should the CUDA moat be breached.  

Our catalysts to the $20 trillion thesis remain – which is a strong product road map, analyst estimates being far too low in the 2028-2030 window, but even more importantly, my prediction is that Nvidia exits the decade as one of the largest AI software companies. We saw how quickly the company took over Broadcom as the largest Ethernet companies; something similar is what my $20 trillion thesis hinges on, but in robotics and automation.  

TSMC: The Importance of CoWoS Capacity 

The main challenge for AMD and its data center growth boils down to capacity at TSMC on the CoWoS side. Not only does CoWoS capacity remain tight, but Nvidia is locking in a majority of TSMC’s capacity, leaving AMD, Broadcom, Google, and others to fight for its scraps. For example, analysts from KeyBanc estimate that Nvidia has secured ~650K wafers in 2026, up 76% YoY, whereas AMD’s 2026 allocation is estimated to be 80K, up barely 14% YoY.  

Other reports suggest Nvidia’s allocation is around ~595K and AMD at 105K in total, with 80K at TSMC and the rest at other OSATs; regardless of the exact split, the fact is that AMD’s CoWoS allocations are a fraction of Nvidia’s this year.  

To put this in perspective with percentages, TSMC is expected to ramp CoWoS capacity from ~75-80K per month at the end of 2025 to ~130K per month by the end of 2026, so it’s likely that its current capacity is closing in on the ~100K per month level. Thus, Nvidia would be locking up more than 50% of current supply at 650K, with AMD getting less than 7%.  

This headwind may ease come 2027, with AMD’s allocation projected to rise as much as 70% YoY, per KeyBanc, taking its CoWoS wafers to ~136K, supporting higher GPU volumes and thus revenues. On the other hand, KeyBanc estimates Nvidia’s allocation to rise to 840K in 2027, still more than 6X AMD’s. 

Revenue: 

Q1 revenue grew by 40.6% YoY and 6.4% QoQ to $35.9 billion, beating the mid-point guidance by 2%, primarily driven by strong AI demand. 

Management guided Q2 revenue of $39 billion to $40.2 billion, implying a YoY growth of 31.7% and 10.3% QoQ. 

AI Revenue: 

HPC revenue increased 20% QoQ in NT$ to account for 61% of the Q1 revenue. 

Management mentioned that AI-related demand is robust and increased the company’s full year total revenue guidance to above 30% growth in U.S. dollar terms from the earlier close to 30% provided during Q4 earnings.

Margins: 

TSMC’s ability to generate exceptionally strong profits showcases that the company is one of the best-managed companies in the world. Despite the rising inflation, tariff concerns, technological advancement, trade wars, overseas fab expansion, and geopolitical tensions, TSMC has overcome these challenges by continuing to generate superior profits. Margins continue to expand due to cost controls, higher capacity utilization rates, economies of scale, and better price negotiation with customers and suppliers. 

Q1 gross margin was 66.2%, up 7.4 percentage points YoY and 3.9 percentage points QoQ primarily due to cost improvement efforts and better capacity utilization rate. 

Q1 operating margin improved by 9.6 percentage points YoY and 4.1 percentage points QoQ to 58.1% primarily due to operating leverage.  

Q1 net profit margin improved by 7.4 percentage points YoY and 2.2 percentage points QoQ to 50.5%. 

Earnings: 

Q1 GAAP EPS grew by 64.6% YoY to $3.49, beating estimates by 3.2%. 

Cash: 

Q1 operating cash flow was $22.1 billion or 61.6% of revenue compared to $19 billion or 74.5% of revenue in the same period last year. 

Q1 free cash flow was $11 billion or 30.7% of revenue compared to $9.0 billion or 35.1% of revenue in the same period last year.  

The company had cash & marketable securities of $105.5 billion and debt of $31.7 billion. 

Valuation: 

TSMC trades at a forward P/S ratio of 11.5. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 5.9 and a maximum of 13.4 in recent years. TSMC is currently trading slightly higher than mid-range. On the bottom line, it trades at a forward P/E ratio of 23.2. TSMC has traded at a minimum of 13.5 and a maximum of 29.6. TSMC is currently trading around the mid-range on the bottom line. 

Notable Risks: 

Geopolitical concerns.

Memory Stocks: 

Micron: Doors. Blown. Off. 

As someone who looks at hundreds of earnings reports a year, there are times an earnings report shatters expectations like an Olympian breaking a record or an athlete leaving no doubt who is the best in the game. Micron did this by dropping an earnings report so strong on fundamentals that I cannot recollect seeing one quite like this.  

Micron blew the doors off with revenue growth of 196.3% YoY and up 75% QoQ for a beat of 22.3% on a massive revenue base of about $24 billion a quarter. The forward fiscal Q3 growth is eye-watering at 260.2% YoY and 40.4% QoQ. This is nearly 100 points higher than what analysts had slated for fiscal Q3 with consensus at 150.2% growth YoY.  

The $10.2 billion sequential increase is nearly unprecedented outside of Nvidia’s most recent quarter posting $11 billion QoQ growth – yet, let’s not forget that Nvidia is the world’s most valuable company.   

Here is what management stated about this record-breaking quarter:   

“Quarterly revenue nearly tripled versus one year ago, and revenue for DRAM, NAND, HBM (high-bandwidth memory) and each business unit reached new highs. Our fiscal Q3 single quarter revenue guidance exceeds the full year revenue for every year in our company’s history through fiscal 2024. For fiscal Q3, we anticipate exceptional records across revenue, gross margin, EPS and free cash flow.”  

To also help illustrate just how impressive this earnings report was, consider that Micron was not supposed to see $33 billion in a single quarter until FQ1 2028 (November of 2027) yet following a second quarter of $10B sequential growth, will now see this revenue in the quarter ending in May of 2026.  

As incredible as the revenue growth is; the margins are arguably even more incredible at an 81% gross margin and 76% operating margin guide for the next quarter.   

So, why would the market sell the report after hours? Well, to be prudent, Micron was reporting a steep, negative gross margin of (9%) in FY2023 with one quarter as low as (32.7%) in FY23. Thus, the question of whether we are seeing a cyclical top or a structural shift in memory is a very valuable question to answer, and the importance of this broader question is only further reinforced by the results we saw this past quarter. 

The difference between the AI cycle and the cyclical peaks in the past is that Micron is combining record fundamentals with improving visibility through multi-year customer agreements and a strengthening product roadmap (HBM4/HBM4E, 1γ DRAM, Gen6 SSDs).  

Management repeatedly stated the market is supply constrained beyond 2026, with new fabs coming online in 2028. Meanwhile, longer context windows, reasoning, and agentic workloads will keep HBM and DRAM demand elevated. NAND is proving it's no longer an afterthought with historic pricing surges that are causing heavyweight customers to seek more stability with SCA agreements.   

While I do believe SCAs could be the reason for softer price action, it’s my conclusion at this time that memory remains an important strategic asset that results in Micron being in the driver’s seat during a sustained upward trend, albeit with the occasional lumpiness inherent to supply chains. In that sense, I foresee Micron becoming more secular than the market has historically treated it.  

Revenue: 

Micron’s Q2 FY2026 ending February revenue grew by an impressive 196.3% YoY and 74.9% QoQ to a record $23.9 billion, beating estimates by a solid 22.3%. Revenue growth accelerated by nearly 140 percentage points from 56.7% YoY and 20.6% QoQ growth in the previous quarter. The $10.2 billion sequential increase was the largest in the company’s history and was primarily driven by strong AI memory demand.  

Management also provided a strong FQ3 revenue guidance of $33.5 billion, implying a YoY growth of 260.2% and 40.4% QoQ. The revenue guidance beat consensus estimates by a stellar 44%. 

AI Revenue: 

Combined CMBU and CDBU FQ2 revenue QoQ growth was 75% and calculating using the similar mix in FQ2 implies 40% QoQ guide in FQ3.  

Micron’s Cloud Memory Business Unit (CMBU) FQ2 revenue grew by 163% YoY and 47% QoQ to a record $7.75 billion. Revenue growth accelerated by 63 percentage points from 100% YoY growth and 16% QoQ growth in the previous quarter. The strong sequential growth was primarily driven by an increase in prices and favorable mix.  

Core Data Center Business Unit (CDBU) FQ2 revenue grew by 211% YoY and 139% QoQ to a record $5.69 billion. Revenue growth accelerated sharply from 4% YoY and 51% QoQ growth in the previous quarter. The strong sequential growth was primarily driven by higher pricing and growth in bit shipments. 

Earnings: 

Micron’s FQ2 GAAP EPS grew by 756% YoY to $12.07, beating estimates by 36.3%. Adjusted EPS grew by 682.1% YoY to $12.20, beating estimates by 36%, primarily driven by higher memory prices, cost controls, favorable revenue mix, and operating leverage.  

Management also provided a strong guide for the next quarter. GAAP EPS guide is $18.90, implying a YoY growth of 1025%. While the adjusted EPS guide is $19.15, implying a YoY growth of 902.6% YoY, beating estimates by 77.8 

Margins: 

Micron’s margins are gravity-defying. 

FQ2 gross profits grew by 499.2% YoY to $17.76 billion. Gross profit margin was 74.4%, an improvement of 37.6 percentage points YoY and up 18.4 percentage points sequentially. It beat the management guidance of 67%. The adjusted gross margin improved by 37 percentage points YoY and 18.1 percentage points sequentially to 74.9%. The strong gross margin was driven primarily by higher pricing, favorable mix, and cost controls.  

Management has guided further improvement of gross margin to 81% in the next quarter.  

FQ2 operating profits grew by 810% YoY to $16.14 billion. Operating margin came at 67.6%, an improvement of 45.6 percentage points YoY and 22.6 percentage points sequentially. It beat the management guidance of 58.7%.  

The adjusted operating margin improved by 44.1 percentage points YoY and 22 percentage points sequentially to 69% driven by operating leverage. Management has guided further improvement of operating margin to 76.2% and adjusted operating margin to 76.8% in the next quarter.  

FQ2 net income was $13.79 billion or 57.8% of revenue compared to $1.58 billion or 19.7% of revenue in the same period last year. Adjusted net income was $14.02 billion or 58.8% of revenue compared to $1.78 billion or 22.1% of revenue in the same period last year. 

Cash: 

Micron’s strong profits are leading to higher cash flows.  

FQ2 operating cash flows grew by 202% YoY to $11.9 billion with an operating cash flow margin of 49.9% compared to 49% in the same period last year.  

FQ2 adjusted free cash flows grew by 705% YoY to $6.9 billion with an adjusted free cash flow margin of 28.9% compared to 10.6% in the same period last year.  

Capex grew by 61.3% YoY to $5.0 billion. For FQ3, management has guided a capex of $7.0 billion and expects adjusted free cash flows to roughly double sequentially.  

Cash and investments were $16.6 billion and debt of $10.14 billion compared to $12.02 billion and $11.76 billion in the previous quarter. Micron repurchased shares worth $350 million and also reduced debt by $1.6 billion in the recent quarter. 

Valuation: 

Micron trades at a forward P/S ratio of 4.3. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 1.2 and a maximum of 6.8 in recent years. Micron is currently trading slightly above the mid-range. On the bottom-line, the company is trading at a reasonable forward P/E ratio of 7.2 due to the strong margin expansion and expected adjusted EPS growth of 597% to $57.8 for FY2026. 

Notable Risks: 

Memory can be stubbornly cyclical, and the market appears to be discounting the familiar pattern Micron has faced in past cycles where peak shipments were followed by a sharp reversal ahead of pricing and demand normalizing.  

Management commentary supports Micron being in a sustained uptrend as 2026 is supply-constrained and greatly limited by DRAM and NAND supply. However, despite the outsized demand and strong product road map, Micron will likely see peak sales before Nvidia’s Vera Rubin sees peak sales given HBM and data center DRAM sits earlier in the supply chain. Therefore, there can be air pockets tied to Nvidia’s GPUs shipping in volume even when the overall trend remains intact.   

Micron is also exposed to PC/consumer and traditional server revenue.   

SanDisk: A Thing in Motion … 

SanDisk’s second quarter report was a blowout on all accords, with the company reporting an impressive 31% QoQ growth for revenue to $3.03 billion and a tremendous 408% QoQ growth to $6.20 in adjusted EPS, capitalizing on strong demand and strong pricing from undersupply dynamics.   

However, the guide was even more impressive, with SanDisk forecasting $4.4 to $4.8 billion in revenue, up 52% QoQ at midpoint, and adjusted EPS more than doubling QoQ to $12 to $14, roughly 200% above consensus at midpoint.   

To put in perspective just how large of a beat this was, SanDisk was not expected to see this level of revenue or EPS at the end of 2027 – consensus for the Dec 2027 quarter was $4.19 billion and $9.29 in EPS heading into this report.  

There were a handful of important comments from management in the call regarding the NAND market, that it will be even more undersupplied in fiscal Q3, while data center growth forecasts raised yet again.   

SanDisk noted that it was unable to fulfill customer demand in Q2, yet management added that it anticipates “the market to be more undersupplied [in Q3] than it was in the second quarter” with bit growth down mid-single digits QoQ compared to a mid-single digit increase QoQ in Q2.   

Management also added that they expect “customer demand well above supply beyond calendar year 2026, which requires careful allocation planning and alignment with our customers.”   

This is rather important as analysts were currently expecting NAND pricing to peak in the calendar Q1 quarter on a QoQ basis, yet ASP growth may end up higher for longer considering the supply-demand imbalance is widening.   

For example, analysts were projecting NAND ASPs to accelerate to the low-20s to low-30s QoQ in calendar Q1 and then slow to the mid-teens in calendar Q2, yet a widening imbalance could potentially push prices up to 40% QoQ and 20% QoQ, respectively.   

This accelerating forecast for data center exabyte growth ties into NAND’s increasing role in AI infrastructure, as we had recently outlined with KV cache requirements and Nvidia’s new inference memory platform. On this exact topic of Nvidia’s KV cache discussion and TB of content per GPU, management explained that “none of that demand is in the numbers we're talking about, demand numbers at this point,” but “our initial looks at it when we look at, let's say, '27 demand, we think that's roughly maybe 75 to 100 additional exabytes. And then a year after that, you can double that. So it is a significant amount of demand.”   

For context, 75-100 EB of demand in 2026 would account for roughly 6-8% of the entire flash market, while doubling that to 150-200EB in 2027 would correspond to 10-13% of the market – a significant new demand driver.  

As a result of the increasing role of NAND and enterprise SSDs in AI inference applications, and expectations for a “meaningful increase in NAND content per deployment,” management expects data center revenue to “grow meaningfully in both the near and long term.”   

However, there is another near and medium-term risk to the SSD story related to the KV cache-optimized tier Nvidia recently proposed with its ICMS platform – Google’s TurboQuant.  

As we had discussed in our first SanDisk analysis, SanDisk: Shares Up 559% In 2025 On NAND Flash, Enterprise SSD Tailwinds, the KV cache essentially serves as a model’s long-term memory that is reused and extended throughout many steps or requests. KV cache capacity is a known pain point when working to balance long-context reasoning and memory capacity in inference workloads, as it can consume ~30% of GPU memory during deployment. While TurboQuant directly addresses this pain point by compressing the vectors to reduce KV cache memory size by up to 6X, it likely will not fundamentally alter the architectural needs for NAND and SSDs for storing, caching and retrieving training and inference data. Instead, it will likely help drive KV cache usage lower and enable longer context windows, more concurrent requests and open the door for previously-infeasible memory-constrained workloads to arise.  

Revenue: 

SanDisk reported $3.03 billion in revenue in Q2, beating estimates by ~12.5%, with SanDisk attributing the growth to higher prices across its three segments with prices strengthening through the quarter.  

Revenue growth accelerated more than 38 points to 61.2% YoY, while sequential growth accelerated nearly 10 points from 21.4% QoQ in Q1 to 31.1% QoQ in Q2.   

Q3’s guide was a blowout versus consensus, with SanDisk forecasting $4.4 to $4.8 billion in revenue, more than 58% ahead of consensus for just $2.91 billion. This also points to a significant 110 point acceleration to 171.3% YoY at midpoint and 21 points to 52% QoQ.  

Estimates for fiscal Q4 points to 219.6% YoY growth to $6.1 billion. For the full year, current consensus points to 116.1% YoY growth to $15.89 billion. 

AI Revenue: 

SanDisk’s data center revenue growth was robust in Q2 with the company reporting growth of 76% YoY and 64% QoQ to $440 million, accelerating 86 and 38 points respectively. Data center still accounts for a smaller portion of overall revenue at almost 15% in the quarter, though this is up from 12% last quarter.  

Management said they are seeing strong adoption of data center products from cloud hyperscalers, enterprise and edge data centers, and system integrators. SanDisk completed qualification of its PCIe Gen5 high-performance TLC SSDs at a second hyperscaler in the quarter, while two major hyperscalers are advancing with qualifications for its BiCS8 QLC ‘Stargate’ products, set to begin shipping in the next several quarters, providing another tailwind for growth.    

Earnings: 

SanDisk reported a large beat on EPS in Q2, though arguably the Q3 guide could be one of the largest beats in tech, with management forecast Q3 adjusted EPS 200% above consensus estimates.  

GAAP EPS was $5.15 in Q2, up 587% QoQ and 615% YoY, and nearly $2 ahead of consensus estimates for $3.20. Adjusted EPS was $6.20, beating the $3.78 estimate by 64% and representing 408% QoQ and 404% YoY growth. 

For Q3, management guided for $12 to $14 in adjusted EPS, up 110% QoQ, and coming in 200% above consensus estimates for $4.33 at midpoint.  

Margins: 

SanDisk saw strong gross margin expansion in Q2 stemming from higher prices, while unit cost reductions served as an operating margin tailwind.   

Q2 GAAP gross margin was 50.9%, up 21.1 points QoQ and 18.6 points YoY, while adjusted gross margin was very similar at 51.1%, up 21.2 points QoQ and 18.6 points YoY.  

GAAP operating margin was 35.2%, up 27.6 points QoQ and 24.8 points YoY, while adjusted operating margin was 37.5%, up 26.9 points QoQ and 25.1 points YoY.   

GAAP net margin was 26.5%, up 21.6 points QoQ and 21 points YoY, and adjusted net margin was 32%, up 24.2 points QoQ and 20.5 points YoY.  

For Q3, SanDisk projected margins to expand further, guiding GAAP gross margin to be 64.9% to 66.9%, up 15 points QoQ and 43.4 points YoY at midpoint, while GAAP operating margin was implied to be 54.7% at midpoint, up 19.5 points QoQ.  

Adjusted gross margin was guided to be 65% to 67%, with adjusted operating margin guided to be 56% at midpoint.   

Cash: 

Operating cash flow of $1.02 billion, up ~973% YoY, for a 33.7% margin, up 12.6 points QoQ and 28.6 points YoY; FCF of $980 million and adj FCF of $843 million for a 27.9% margin, up 8.5 points QoQ and 23 points YoY; Cash of $1.539 billion and debt of $603 million 

Valuation: 

SanDisk’s valuation is somewhat hard to pin down given the company’s limited history on the public markets after its February 2025 spinoff, and its 2,720% rally in the past one year. On the top line, SanDisk is trading at 8.4 forward P/S ratio, having traded as low as 0.6 last August and with an average multiple of 2.1 for its limited public history.   

On the bottom line, SanDisk is trading at a 21.5 forward P/E ratio, having traded as low as 1.0 last August with an average of around 9.7. 

Notable Risks: 

For a stock with this level of top-line and bottom-line growth, the risk is deceleration. While adjusted EPS is expected to surge 1307% in FY2026 and 142.6% in FY2027, expectations call for a 12.8% decline in FY2028. 

Quick Note on HDD Stocks: 

We’ve covered HDD stocks recently on our Discovery tier.  

Hard disk drives (HDDs) offer the lowest-cost per terabyte, which makes HDDs ideal for “big data” storage, backups and large AI datasets. Compare this to solid state drives (SSDs) which store data on flash memory chips and are far faster and lower-latency. SSDs cost more per terabyte, thus leveraging a mix of HDDs and SDDs is a popular choice.   

As it stands today, SDDs have illustrated significant pricing power compared to HDDs. Therefore, because HDDs are considered more commoditized in the current market dynamics compared to SDDs, these stocks are being overlooked. 

As inference requires more exabytes to be stored, HDDs offer an advantage in that storage tier. In fact, a leading HDD management team sees a CAGR of 25%+ over the next 5 years with HDD representing “80% of the storage media that deployed within a hyperscale environment.” Multimodal datasets are among the largest drivers of incremental storage demand. Video is another data hog and even modest growth here from multimodal AI can create what’s called “data exhaust.”   

There are two things to note when looking at HDD stocks. The first is these are bottom-line stories in the current market with growth of 67%+ and even 270%+ last quarter on EPS. The second is that while pricing is fixed for 2026, it comes up for re-negotiation in 2027.  

Subscribe to Discovery to unlock the full Top 15 AI Stocks report and get additional insights into the next phase of the AI trade. To subscribe to Discovery with 40% off, click here to email us or email premium@io-fund.com and mention code DISCOVERY40Discovery with 40% off, click here to email usclick here to email us or email premium@io-fund.com and mention code DISCOVERY40

AI Networking Stocks 

We covered quite a bit of the shifts in AI networking in our last quarterly report, found here. 

Lumentum: Capacity Constrained (and Loving It) 

Lumentum is a leading allocation as of January and is up 127% YTD. The company (and cleary the stock too) is benefiting from outsized demand for its EML lasers, reaching a quarterly company record in EML laser shipments. While EMLs are largely spoken for with InP wafer fab capacity fully allocated with long-term agreements, the company is expanding its capacity with additional supply expected to come online in the second half of this calendar year.   

The transition to 1.6T is moving faster than management originally anticipated, which contributed to the beat/raise with management stating: “We achieved another quarterly company record in EML laser shipments led by 100 gig line speeds and bolstered by a ramp in 200 gig devices. Simultaneously, we expanded our footprint in next-generation architectures shipping CW lasers for 800 gig manufacturers and increased volumes of ultra-high-power laser shipments for CPO applications.”  

There are additional growth levers for Lumentum as we look further out, driven by optical circuit switches and co-packaged optics. Optical circuit switches are beginning to move the needle now with a $400 million backlog, although currently at around $10 million in revenue. In 2027, co-packaged optics (CPOs) will represent another important market for Lumentum alongside UHP chips and ELS modules will help expand the company’s serviceable addressable market.   

Management emphasized that indium phosphide wafer fab capacity is fully allocated, with the company indicating they have already delivered half of their expansion target over one quarter alone due to strong customer demand necessitating they pull forward delivery. Thus, the natural question for an investor is whether Lumentum can add more capacity. The company stated they foresee more capacity coming in the second half of the calendar year:  

“We are scaling rapidly through precision tool optimization and yield gains. This execution will help to ensure that additional capacity comes online as planned over the next two quarters and beyond. While not able to size it, we now have line of sight to a significant block of additional capacity starting in the second half of 2026 both recurrent activities in Sagamihara and better utilization of our Caswell, United Kingdom and Takao, Japan fabs.” 

Although minimal right now, 200G is ramping faster than expected, representing 5% of unit volume yet represents 10% of laser chip revenue. According to management, demand for 200G EMLs is about a quarter faster than they originally anticipated with the goal of ending the year with 25% of unit volume from this new product mix – with these seeing higher average sales prices than the 100-gig.  

Management stated the following: “Our 200-gig line speed, as we said, is actually doing a little bit better than we expected. I think on the last call, we had said that the 5% revenue of — 5% of mix would be this quarter. It was a quarter earlier than we had expected, and that's primarily because 1.6T is coming on, I think, faster than we initially anticipated, and that is heavily being driven by 200-gig EMLs.”  

This was discussed further in the call with management stating 1.6T was stronger than it was 90 days ago. 

Revenue: 

Lumentum delivered Q2 revenue at the upper end of its guided range, yet its guidance stands out as it not only points to YoY growth accelerating almost 24 points to 89.3% YoY, but it also was a larger magnitude beat in dollar terms versus last quarter.   

Q2 revenue was $665.5 million, a modest 2% beat to estimates and in the upper end of Lumentum’s guidance for $630-$670 million. Revenue growth accelerated 7.1 points to 65.5% YoY, while sequential growth was robust at 24.7% QoQ, its fastest growth in eight years and accelerating 13.7 points.   

For Q3, Lumentum guided for revenue between $780 million and $830 million, accelerating 23.8 points to 89.3% YoY at midpoint. Sequential growth will remain strong with guidance pointing to growth of 21% QoQ at midpoint.  

What’s impressive here is that Lumentum’s guidance beat consensus by a larger margin than it did last quarter – at the $805 million midpoint, this would be nearly $99 million ahead of the $706.4 million estimate, whereas Q2’s guide for $650 million at midpoint beat by ~$88 million.   

Following the report, we had stated: “Considering the scope of this raise for Q3, it’s likely that estimates for Q4, which currently are pegged at just $770.4 million, are revised much higher in the coming days/weeks. As a result, it’s likely that consensus estimates for FY26, currently at $2.64 billion, move ~8-10% higher.” 

At time of writing in April, FQ4 estimates were revised up 19.1% since the earnings report for 90.9% YoY growth to $917.8 million. FY2026 revenue estimates are $2.92 billion, up 77.8% YoY and have been revised up by 10.6%. 

AI Revenue: 

Components revenue was $443.7 million in Q2, up 68.3% YoY and 17% QoQ. YoY growth accelerated 3.4 points while QoQ growth decelerated 1.4 points from last quarter. Components accounted for 66.7% of revenue in Q2, down from 71% in Q2. 

Driving this growth were EML shipments, with Lumentum saying both 100G and 200G EMLs reached new company records. Systems revenue rose 43.5% QoQ and 60.1% YoY to $221.8 million, a sharp acceleration from a (3.6%) QoQ decline and 46.5% YoY increase in Q1. This was driven by record cloud transceiver shipments. 

EPS: 

Q2 GAAP EPS was $0.89, up from just $0.05 in Q1 and beating the $0.50 consensus estimate by 78%. Adjusted EPS was $1.67, up 51.8% QoQ and 297.6% YoY, and beating the $1.40 estimate by 18.4%. 

For Q3, Lumentum guided for $2.15 to $2.35 in adjusted EPS, pointing to YoY growth of 294.7% and QoQ growth of 34.7%. At midpoint, this represented a 40.6% beat to the consensus estimate of $1.60. 

Margins: 

Lumentum reported solid expansion in gross margins in Q2, with GAAP gross margin up 2.1 points QoQ and 11.3 points YoY to 36.1%, and adjusted gross margin up 3.1 points QoQ and 10.2 points YoY to 42.5%.  

GAAP operating margin in Q2 was 9.7%, up 8.4 points QoQ and 22.5 points YoY, while adjusted operating margin was 25.2%, up 6.5 points QoQ and 17.3 points YoY (and ahead of guidance for 20-22%).  

Lumentum forecast this operating margin to continue at a similar rate, projecting adjusted operating margin of 30-31% in Q3, up 5.3 points QoQ and 19.7 points YoY. 

GAAP net margin expanded 11 points QoQ and 26.9 points YoY to 11.8%. Adjusted net margin expanded 5.4 points QoQ and 14.1 points YoY to 21.6%. 

Cash: 

Operating cash flow of $126.7M for a 19% margin in Q2, up from 6% in the year ago quarter and 10.9% in Q1 

FCF of $43.1M for a 6.5% margin, up from (4%) in the year ago quarter and (3.4%) in Q1 

Cash and equivalents increased slightly to $1.16 billion while debt was $3.29 billion at the end of Q1. The company recently entered into privately negotiated exchange agreements with certain holders of its 0.50% Convertible Senior Notes due 2026 and 1.50% Convertible Senior Notes due 2029 totaling $474.6 million. The company will issue about 6.3 million of shares in exchange for these notes and will not receive any cash proceeds. 

Valuation: 

Lumentum trades at a forward P/S ratio of 21. The company traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 1.7 and a maximum of 21.9 this month. On the bottom-line, it trades at a forward P/E ratio of 110.5. Lumentum traded at a minimum forward P/E ratio of 11.6 and a maximum of 115.3 this month.  

Notable Risks: 

Lumentum’s valuation has become more demanding following the stock’s strong move higher, which creates the risk of multiple compression if growth falls short of elevated expectations. The company also carries a relatively high debt load, which adds financial risk and reduces flexibility compared to a cleaner balance sheet.  

AAOI: Buckle Up 

AAOI grew to become our top position as that’s what a quick 350% return does to a portfolio. We might need to trim back for a more intentional allocation but that does not deter from the carefully placed thesis we put into place months ago. 

As you’ll recall last quarter, AOI (Nasdaq: AAOI) missed earnings due to orders getting pushed out to Q4. Therefore, it was quite important that AOI meet expectations following the delay. The company’s revenue grew 34% YoY and 13% QoQ and guided to grow 58% YoY and 17% QoQ for Q1. Of this, data center inflected with growth of 69% YoY and 70% QoQ. Suffice to say, AOI met the bar set for the company with momentum headed into 2026.  

During the call, management focused on detailing the ramp for 800G and 1.6T with targets shared through mid-2027. The forecast implies that AOI’s optical attach per unit of compute is rising as network sizes increase to include more lanes and more links. For example, the 800G era is widely expected to require record ports, resulting in higher revenue for optical networking companies. The industry is shifting from 400G to 800G with 1.6T on the roadmap as throughput becomes more critical with the incoming inference phase.   

Management offered a forecast for mid-2027 of $378 million per month with the framework of 800G being the bulk of the revenue, 1.6T contributing and some 100G/400G content contributing yet the lowest of the mix. Importantly, management framed this discussion as being capacity-constrained rather than demand-constrained. In the more near-term, management guided for $1 billion in 2026 revenue with $120 million in adjusted operating profit.  

The following was stated in the opening remarks:  

“Given the recent surge in customer inquiries and apparent rising demand, we believe that by mid-2027, 100G and 400G revenue will be approximately $90 million. 800G revenue will be approximately $217 million and 1.6 terabit revenue will be approximately $71 million monthly. Altogether, this represents $378 million in monthly revenue for transceiver products.”  

The company also stated they expect $1 billion in revenue this year compared to analyst estimates that are just shy of $764 million: “Looking more broadly at 2026. While it's still early in the year, we expect to generate over $1 billion in revenue this year, with a non-GAAP operating profit of over $120 million. This revenue level is limited by our production capacity and supply chain, not market demand, which we believe is much larger.” 

Analyst estimates greatly missed the mark at $521M per quarter in September of 2027, assuming the $378 million per month plays out ($1.14B per quarter). 

Revenue:  

Applied Optoelectronics (AOI) Q4 revenue grew by 33.9% YoY and 13.2% QoQ to $134.3 million, beating estimates by 4.7%. The revenue growth was primarily driven by strong data center revenue which grew by 69.2% YoY and 70.4% QoQ to $74.9 million.  

During the quarter, the company also announced that they received the fourth 800G volume order from one of their major hyperscale customer to support its AI data center growth, which is likely to be Amazon. AOI has begun ramping up production of this 800G module in anticipation of a strong volume ramp starting in Q2. Management also mentioned in the earnings call that they are in discussion with a new hyperscale customer about qualifying for 800G and 1.6T products and sounded confident about the growth trajectory in both these products with multiple customers.  

Management also provided a strong Q1 revenue guide of $150 million to $165 million, implying a YoY growth of 57.7% and 17.3% QoQ at the midpoint. The strong Q1 revenue growth is led by sequential revenue growth in both CATV and data center revenue.   

The company’s 2025 revenue grew by a solid 82.8% YoY to $455.7 million. Management expects strong revenue growth to continue in the coming years and guided 2026 revenue of over $1 billion, implying a 119% YoY growth, beating estimates by 31%. 

AI Revenue: 

The company’s Q4 data center revenue grew by 69.2% YoY and 70.4% QoQ to $74.9 million. The revenue growth sharply accelerated from 7.3% YoY and decline of (1.9%) QoQ in Q3. Revenue of 100G products grew by 54% YoY and 400G products grew by 141% YoY. 100G products accounted for 51% of data center revenue, 200G and 400G transceiver products accounted for 41%, and 8% was from 10G and 40G transceiver products. 

EPS: 

The company’s Q4 GAAP EPS came at ($0.03), beating estimates by $0.12. While the adjusted EPS came at ($0.01), beating estimates by 91%. 

Margins: 

The company witnessed a turnaround in margins and expects to be sustainable profitable on an adjusted basis from Q2 driven by the shift to higher margin revenue, operational efficiencies, and leverage.  

The company’s Q4 gross profits grew by 46% YoY to $41.95 million. Gross profit margin improved by 250 basis points YoY and 320 basis points QoQ to 31.2%. Adjusted gross margins improved by 250 basis points YoY and 40 basis points sequentially to 31.4%, beating the guidance of 30%. The improvement in gross margins was primarily due to the favorable product mix and cost reduction efforts.  

Q4 operating margin was (8.6%) compared to (6.5%) in the same period last year and (15.3%) in the previous quarter. Adjusted operating margin was (5.3%) compared to (2.5%) in the same period last year and (8.7%) in the previous quarter. 

Cash: 

The company’s cash flows have been weak. However, with improved profitability expected in the coming quarters we could expect cash flows to improve.  

Q4 operating cash outflow was ($29.6 million) or (22%) of revenue compared to (24.6%) in the same period last year.  

Q4 free cash outflow was ($113.6 million) or (84.6%) of revenue compared to ($53.1 million) or (53%) of revenue in the same period last year. To support the strong expected growth capex grew by 227% YoY to $84 million in Q4.  

Cash and short-term investments were $216 million and debt of $197.2 million at the end of Q4 2025. The company also announced an equity offering of $250 million after the announcement of Q4 results. 

Valuation: 

The company is trading at peak multiples on the top line and the bottom line. The company is trading at a forward P/S ratio of 12.4 and traded at a minimum level of 0.2 in May 2023. On the bottom line, it trades at a forward P/E ratio of 188 and we have limited data here since the company will be profitable on an adjusted basis from Q2 this year. 

Notable Risks: 

Valuation remains a key risk, as a higher multiple leaves the stock with less room for error if growth or guidance falls short of expectations. The company is also generating negative cash flow, which adds financial risk and can weigh on investor sentiment if profitability takes longer to materialize. Another important risk is that networking supplier dynamics can shift quickly, particularly in AI infrastructure where customer preferences, architectures, and share positions may change faster than expected.  

Coherent: Slow and Steady 

Coherent is a stock that will test investors as the company has near-perfect positioning, yet the timing is taking longer than what growth investors typically look for. If I had to describe this earnings report, I would use the word “visibility” as the headline numbers will fail to impress, yet I believe the stock price will march upward as the equation of what Coherent offers + where the demand is = will eventually materialize (in 2026).   

The data center and communications segment revenue grew by 33% YoY and 11% QoQ in FQ2, accelerating from 26% YoY growth and 7% QoQ growth in FQ1 driven by strong AI demand. The Communications segment grew 44% YoY and 9% QoQ, although this was down from 11% QoQ growth and 55% YoY reported last quarter. However, the data center segment accelerated meaningfully to 14% QoQ and 36% YoY, up from 4% QoQ growth and 23% YoY last quarter. As of this quarter, data center and communications segment represents 70% of revenue.  

The company offered strong visibility metrics, such as stating book-to-bill ratio is 4X, meaning they are booking orders 4X faster than they can ship. Much of Coherent’s timing hinges on indium phosphide capacity as the company has been working to increase this capacity by moving from 3-inch wafers to 6-inch wafers, which will produce 4X the amount of chips at half the cost. The words “second half" came up frequently with management emphasizing an incoming inflection: “We expect 1.6T to ramp significantly over the coming quarters, with the early phase of the ramp driven by our EML and silicon photonics-based transceivers, followed by our 200G VCSEL-based 1.6T transceivers ramping in the second half of this calendar year.”  

In addition to the transition toward 1.6T being a catalyst, optical circuit switches (OCS) and co-packaged optics (CPO) represent additional catalysts as we move look into 2027. Although in the future, an area where Coherent could stand out is CW lasers for the incoming CPO wave in AI networking. According to management, they secured a large order from a hyperscaler. Management also emphasized their non-mechanical liquid crystal technology for OCS provides an edge, with an update on the call they currently have 10 customers in their pipeline. 

Revenue: 

Coherent’s FQ2 ending December 2025 revenue grew by 17.5% YoY and 6.6% QoQ to $1.69 billion, beating estimates by 2.7%. On a pro forma basis, excluding revenue from the divested Aerospace and Defense business, which the company sold in FQ1, revenue grew by 9% QoQ and 22% YoY primarily driven by AI Datacenter & Communications demand. 

Management guided FQ3 revenue of $1.70 billion to $1.84 billion, implying a YoY growth of 18.2% and 5% QoQ at the midpoint, beating estimates by 3.5%. As per our internal proforma estimate, it implies a YoY growth of 23.8% and 6.3% QoQ in FQ3 after excluding Aerospace and Defense business revenue from the prior year quarter and also the recently sold product division based in Munich. The product business in Munich had averaged $25 million quarterly revenue and had a gross margin well below the company’s corporate gross margin. 

Management expects continued strong growth in the second half of fiscal year 2026 and throughout fiscal year 2027 based on strong datacenter and communications demand and the continued production capacity expansion along with improving demand in the Industrial segment. 

AI Revenue: 

FQ2 data Center segment revenue grew by 36% YoY and 14% QoQ, accelerating from 23% YoY and 4% QoQ growth reported in FQ1. The FQ2 data center revenue growth was driven by growth in both 800 gig and 1.6T transceivers. The company is witnessing very strong AI demand and is also rapidly expanding capacity, and management expects double-digit sequential growth in data center segment in both FQ3 and FQ4.   

Management expects revenue growth in the current quarter to be driven by a combination of growth in both 1.6T and 800 gig transceivers as well as growth in the OCS systems. Coherent is witnessing strong demand for the 1.6T transceivers across multiple customers and continue to expect both 800 gig and 1.6T to grow significantly in calendar 2026.  

Coherent expects OCS revenue to grow sequentially in the coming quarters as they ramp production capacity as fast as possible to meet the rapidly growing demand. Management estimates over $2 billion of addressable OCS market in the coming years. 

EPS: 

FQ2 GAAP EPS grew by 72.7% YoY to $0.76, beating estimates by 10.1%. Adjusted EPS grew by 35.8% YoY to $1.29, beating estimates by 7%. 

Management has guided adjusted EPS of $1.28 to $1.48 for FQ3, implying a YoY growth of 51.6% at the midpoint and beating estimates by 4.5%. 

Margins: 

The company’s margins are improving driven by reductions in product costs, manufacturing efficiency gains, and operating leverage.  

FQ2 gross profits grew by 22.3% YoY to $622.8 million. Adjusted gross profits grew by 20% YoY to $657.4 million with an adjusted gross margin of 39%, up 80 basis points YoY and 30 basis points sequentially and was in-line with the guide. The improvement in gross margin was driven by reductions in product input costs, efficiency gains from improved cycle times in the manufacturing process, as well as yield improvements. Pricing optimization also continued to contribute meaningfully to the gross margin expansion. The management FQ3 guide is 39.5%.  

FQ2 operating income grew by 34.3% YoY to $184 million. Adjusted operating income grew by 26.8% YoY to $336 million with an adjusted operating margin of 19.9%, up 140 basis points YoY and up 40 basis points QoQ and was in-line with the guide. The operating margin improvement was due to operating leverage and operational efficiencies. The management FQ3 guide is 20.9%. 

Cash: 

Coherent’s balance sheet is beginning to improve, with the company using proceeds from the divestment to pay down debt, though debt to cash remains upside down. Operating cash flow margins were also thin and free cash outflows increased due to high capex to support the strong AI demand. 

FQ2 operating cash flow was $57.9 million or 3.4% of revenue, down from $187.4 million in the same period last year and up from $46 million in the previous quarter. 

FQ2 free cash outflow was ($95.7 million) or (5.7% of revenue), down from $81.7 million or 5.7% of revenue in the same period last year. FQ2 capex grew by 45.3% YoY to $154 million to support the strong AI demand.  

The company had debt of $3.35 billion and cash of $863.7 million at the end of the December quarter. 

Valuation: 

Coherent trades at a forward P/S ratio of 8.3. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 0.9 in September 2023 and is currently trading at its peak levels. On the bottom line, it trades at a forward P/E ratio of 57.5. Coherent has traded at a minimum of 14.5 in April 2025 and is currently trading at its peak levels on the bottom line too.  

Notable Risks: 

Coherent carries a relatively high debt load, which adds balance-sheet risk and can pressure the stock if growth or margins fall short of expectations. While the company is beginning to improve its financial profile by using divestment proceeds to pay down debt, leverage remains an important watchpoint. Valuation is another risk, as a stronger stock price leaves less room for error. 

Astera Labs: Bouncing off the Lows 

Astera Labs has seen a tremendous comeback this year, and although flat YTD, our buy in February (up 40%) puts us in the positive this year. 

Astera Labs delivered a solid Q4 beat with revenue up another 17.4% QoQ, though the one point to nitpick from this report was Q1’s softer margin guidance, as it would imply a step down to below the 20% GAAP operating margin level sustained for the last three quarters. In addition, the hypergrowth company is not able to keep up with high comps given sequential growth is expected to be 7.7% QoQ following many quarters of double-digit QoQ growth with some quarters as high as 20%+ sequentially.   

There were clues in the call as to when Astera is most likely to see a second wind with Scorpio-X as the catalyst. Overall, Astera has a longer runway than the market is communicating given there is an element of vendor lock-in to their products. Additionally, Ethernet is optimized for reach, whereas Astera specializes in PCIe, which is optimized for something quite different – GPU-to-GPU communication and memory-level workloads inside the rack.  

Astera also announced that it entered into a warrant agreement with Amazon, allowing the tech giant to purchase up to 3.26 million shares at $142.82 through February 2033. The warrants will vest in tranches of payments made by Amazon for the purchase of up to $6.5 billion worth of Astera’s smart fabric switch, signal conditioning and optical engine products. The vote of confidence from one of Astera’s major customers is certainly welcomed. 

Revenue: 

Astera reported Q4 revenue of $270.6 million, topping estimates for $249.6 million by 8.4%. Growth continued to decelerate on both a YoY and QoQ basis, with YoY growth decelerating more than 12 points to 91.8% and QoQ growth by 2.7 points to 17.4%.   

For Q1, Astera guided for revenue between $286 to $297 million, more than 12% ahead of estimates for $260.1 million. However, this guidance points to YoY and QoQ growth continuing to decelerate, to 82.9% YoY and 7.7% QoQ. This would represent Astera’s slowest QoQ growth in its public history. As we had covered in detail last quarter, Astera’s higher-ASP Scorpio X-Series product now entered initial production in late January, likely becoming a greater tailwind to growth as its ramp progresses throughout the year.  

While there was no specific guidance for 2026, current estimates for $1.36 billion, up 59.1% YoY, and revised higher from $1.18 billion when the company reported its Q4 earnings in February.   

AI Revenue: 

Scorpio-P contributed 15% of revenue this quarter and it was stated previously that Scorpio-P and Scorpio-X will reach more than 50% of revenue by 2026. The X-Series is highly anticipated as it’s expected to be a much higher ASP product than the P-Series. Management in the past has called the X-Series an “anchor socket” which means it will secure vendor lock-in for Astera and they will be able to add more products, such as modules and silicon level products. Last quarter, management stated: “we expect our overall dollar content opportunity per AI accelerator to significantly increase, representing another step-up from a baseline revenue standpoint.”  

The update this quarter is that the X-Series will “incrementally grow revenue in the first half of 2026, followed by a transition to high-volume production in the second half. We continue to make excellent progress with additional engagements looking to leverage PCIe for scale-up networking. As previously communicated, we are engaged with 10-plus customers for Scorpio X family. And our current expectation is that we will ship initial quantities of Scorpio X series to support new customer platforms in the second half of 2026 with volume ramp set for 2027.” 

Accounts receivable surged nearly 94% QoQ to $83.2 million, while inventories rose more than 14% QoQ to almost $59 million, both positive signals that revenue growth is likely to remain strong considering the state of demand and hyperscaler capex plans. 

EPS: 

Astera reported its smallest EPS beat since going public, with its $0.58 in adjusted EPS in Q4 beating the $0.51 estimate by just 13.7%; for comparison, its second-smallest beat was in Q2 2024 at 18.9%, while the prior two quarters saw beats of >25% each. Adjusted EPS growth was 56.8%, decelerating from 113% in Q3.  

GAAP EPS was $0.25 in Q4, missing estimates for $0.30, likely due to the sharp net margin contraction related to the income tax provision. GAAP EPS growth was 78.6%.  

For Q1, Astera guided for adjusted EPS to be $0.53 to $0.54 and GAAP EPS to be $0.36 to $0.38, both figures barely ahead of estimates for $0.52 and $0.34 respectively. This would point to adjusted EPS growth accelerating slightly to 62.1%, and GAAP EPS growth accelerating to 105.6%. 

Margins: 

Scorpio-X transitions Astera from selling high-margin silicon with retimers to fabric switches, which could see lower margins in the initial stages until the product scales.  

Cash: 

Operating cash flow was $95.3 million in Q4 for a 35.2% margin, up 7.1 points YoY and 1.3 points QoQ. For 2025, operating cash flow was $319.3 million for a 37.5% margin, expanding 3 points YoY.  

Free cash flow was $76.6 million for a 28.3% margin, up 11.1 points YoY but flat QoQ. For the year, free cash flow was $281.8 million for a 33.1% margin, up 7.3 points YoY.  

Cash and equivalents totaled $1.19 billion while debt remained zero. 

Valuation: 

Astera Labs trades at a forward P/S ratio of 20.9. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 10.5 and a maximum of 60.4 in recent years. Astera Labs is currently trading significantly lower than mid-range. On the bottom line, it trades at a forward P/E ratio of 67.1. The company has traded at a minimum of 29.9 and the highest of 202.2. Astera Labs is currently trading significantly lower than mid-range on the bottom line too.  

Notable Risks: 

Astera Labs may see near-term margin pressure as hardware becomes a larger part of the revenue mix, which can dilute profitability relative to lighter, higher-margin revenue streams from retimers. In addition, the company is likely to maintain elevated operating expenses as it invests aggressively to support growth and expand its position in AI infrastructure with Scorpio and other product lines. As a result, strong top-line growth may not translate as cleanly into bottom-line upside in the near term. 

AI Ethernet Switches and Broadcom Partner 

On our Discovery tier, we recently covered a leading supplier in back-end networking with over 41% market share of the 200G switch market and 55% share of the custom switch market, up from 40% in 2024.

The back-end networking positioning is important for this stock as it means the company is exposed to the faster-growing segment of Ethernet switching – the back-end TAM is forecast to grow at a 56% CAGR through 2029 on scale-out, and potentially soon, scale-up demand, whereas front-end (user-facing) is forecast to grow at a 20% CAGR.   

Per management, the back-end also sees a much faster refresh rate of every 18-24 months versus >5 years for front-end deployments, and  adopts the newest and fastest bandwidths (800G and soon 1.6T) due to the greater performance and reliability requirements of XPU-to-XPU and rack-to-rack communications.   

The company is a lead supplier to Broadcom for 800G switches and 1.6T for Tomahawk6. Both 1.6T switches are optimized for AI back-end networking (scale-out and scale-up), as well as large-scale AI fabrics for AI training and inference for frontier model sizes. Management expects the 1.6T upgrade cycle to emerge in late 2026 but primarily land in 2027, with one customer giving visibility to a back-half 2026 ramp and multiple other ramps occurring through 2027. 

Cooling Technologies 

Vertiv: Facility-Level Cooling is in High Demand 

Nvidia’s future design lineup shows continual increases in power consumption, with Vera Rubin expected to boost thermal design power (TDP) by 50% over Blackwell at up to 180 kW to potentially 230kW per rack, with the Rubin Ultra boosting this to 600kW by late 2027. These advancing power requirements place much more emphasis on liquid cooling, fluid management, and related thermal management technology.  

Goldman Sachs’ Mark Delaney question about cooling product mix evolution and opportunity per MW, noting that “there was some discussion that Rubin raised racks may not need chillers, and conversely post-Supercompute last fall, there was a proposal from a competitor about stainless steel chillers maybe displacing CDUs.”   

Vertiv CEO Giordiano Albertazzi said that this topic is not theirs to confirm, but even if CDUs are reduced, Vertiv stands to benefit as its portfolio spans the entire thermal management chain. He also emphasized that CDUs are likely to persist into the foreseeable future as other cooling tech remains too niche:   

“All in all, we see that design continues to be mixed. If anything, this complicates the thermal chain and this complexity is something that we like as someone who has got the entire portfolio, we certainly are perfectly positioned to support our customers. And again, going back to what we're saying enable the right choice for our customers.  

Cooling chips directly in other ways than through CDU in this moment is not something that we see. Simply because it would — in most of the cases, it will be niche applications probably, but in most of the cases, that would be too dangerous. Blast radius is a little bit too big, et cetera.” 

Regarding CDUs, Vertiv acquired CoolTera in late 2023, a specialist in CDUs and data center liquid cooling. This acquisition expanded Vertiv’s IP, patents and engineering expertise ahead of Vera Rubin, which is primarily liquid cooled. 

Revenue: 

Vertiv delivered a strong Q4 with exceptional strength across key metrics, with backlog more than doubling YoY, orders more than doubling sequentially, and a significant step-up in book-to-bill ratio. Supported by these strong key metrics and ordering patterns, Vertiv guided for revenue growth to accelerate to 32% YoY in FY26, a more than four point YOY acceleration.  

Vertiv reported a solid Q4 with revenue up 22.8% YoY (19% organic) and 7.6% QoQ to $2.88 billion, decelerating from 29% YoY in Q3. This revenue growth was driven entirely by strength in the Americas with revenue up 50.2% YoY, as Europe and APAC both registered YoY declines. 

For Q1, Vertiv guided revenue to be $2.5 billion to $2.7 billion, marking a reacceleration to 27.7% YoY and 22% organic growth at midpoint; however, this will mark a QoQ decline of (9.7%) at the midpoint of this forecast, following typical first quarter seasonality (though slightly better compared to Q1 2025’s (13.2%) QoQ decline). As noted above, growth is expected to accelerate towards the 38% range by Q4, supported by orders growth, backlog and book-to-bill.  

Looking ahead to FY26, Vertiv laid out initial guidance for revenue to be between $13.25 billion to $13.75 billion, accelerating to 32% YoY from FY25’s 27.7% growth; organic growth is projected to be 27-29% YoY, a slight acceleration from 26%. This also marked a significant beat over consensus estimates for $12.39 billion.    

AI Revenue: 

Vertiv reported 109% YoY and 57% QoQ growth to $15 billion in Q4, accelerating sharply from 28% YoY and 12% QoQ in Q3. On a dollar basis, Vertiv added $5.5 billion to its backlog sequentially.  

This backlog growth was out of the ordinary for a few reasons – over the last two years, Vertiv’s fastest QoQ backlog growth up until this point was 15%, yet now growth was ~57%.   

It also created an entirely new dynamic for backlog-to-revenue ratios. Vertiv has seen its backlog to forward revenue (full year guidance from Q4) ratio hover between 72% to 78% over the last three years, yet now this ratio stands at ~111%, suggesting much more elevated revenue visibility through next year with the majority being firm orders.   

Additionally, Vertiv’s conversion time for this backlog has been pushed out, from its typical 9 months to roughly 15 months, with management stating it expects the backlog to be shipped in the next 12 to 18 months. 

Aiding the backlog growth was an increase in organic orders in Q4, with Vertiv reporting organic orders up 252% YoY (though against a flat YoY comp).   

This marked a substantial 192 point acceleration from 60% YoY growth, while QoQ growth accelerated from 20% in Q3. This strong Q4 order intake drove TTM order growth up to 81% YoY, from 21% YoY in Q3. Despite this surge, management emphasized that the pipeline continues to grow across all regions and has not depleted, with the order growth simply reflecting the level of demand in the market with no abnormalities in purchasing.  

Despite this strength, Vertiv's management emphasized that orders are lumpy, and in fact, management plans to drop this metric from future reporting. 

Driven by Q4’s order growth, Vertiv’s book-to-bill ratio jumped to 2.9X, up from 1.4X in Q3. As is the case with orders, book-to-bill has seen some lumpiness quarter to quarter, though there are some key parallels that we can draw here given the simultaneous strength in orders and backlog.   

EPS: 

While adjusted EPS decelerated 26 points in Q4 to 37% YoY, Vertiv forecast a sharp rebound in Q1 to 53%, with FY26’s guide implying that growth will persist at a similar rate through the year.   

Adjusted EPS was $1.36 in Q4, up 37% YoY but decelerating from 63% in Q3, coming in 4.9% ahead of estimates. GAAP EPS growth was exceptionally strong, up 200% YoY to $1.14, though growth was off a smaller base.   

For Q1, Vertiv guided for adjusted EPS to be $0.95 to $1.01, up 53% YoY at midpoint. Estimates point to ~50% growth being maintained in Q2 before a step lower towards the 40-45% range in the second half of the year.   

FY26 adjusted EPS was guided to be $5.97 to $6.07, up 43% YoY and decelerating only slightly from 47% growth in FY25. 

Margins: 
Vertiv saw slight gross and operating margin expansion in Q4, though in line with seasonal trends. Q1 margins are projected to take a step down QoQ but remain higher YoY; however, management added that they expect “to have materially offset unfavorable margin impact from tariffs as of the first quarter of this year,” providing more room for upside beginning in Q2.  

GAAP gross margin was 38.9% in Q4, up 1.1 points QoQ and 1.8 points YoY.  

GAAP operating margin was 20.1% coming in below management’s guidance for 20.7%.  

Adjusted operating margin was 23.2% (versus guidance for 22.4%). Looking ahead to Q1, GAAP operating margin was guided to be 16.3%, down 3.8 points QoQ but up 2 points YoY, while adjusted operating margin was guided to be 19%, down 4.3 points QoQ but up 2.5 points YoY.  

GAAP net margin was 15.5%, flat QoQ and up 9.2 points YoY, as the year-ago quarter recorded a $180 million negative impact related to warrant liabilities. Adjusted net margin was 18.5%, up 0.4 points QoQ and 2.1 points YoY. 

Vertiv guided for solid margin expansion for FY26, suggesting that Q2 through Q4 will see much stronger margins to offset Q1’s softness. GAAP operating margin was guided to be 20.5%, up 2.6 points YoY, while adjusted operating margin was guided to be 22.5%, up 2.1 points QoQ. This will flow through to net margin, with GAAP net margin guided at 15.4%, up 2.4 points, and adjusted net margin guided at 17.5%, up 1.5 points YoY. 

Cash: 

Driven by the surge in orders and larger advanced payments, Vertiv reported robust cash flows in Q4.   

Operating cash flow in Q4 was $1.01 billion for a 34.9% margin, up 15.9 points QoQ and 16.8 points YoY; for the full year, operating cash flow was $2.11 billion (with Q4 accounting for nearly half of that) for a 20.7% margin, up 4.1 point YoY.   

Adjusted free cash flow was $910 million, up 151% YoY, representing a 31.6% margin, up 14.3 points QoQ and 16.2 points YoY. For FY25, adjusted FCF was $1.89 billion for an 18.4%, up 4.2 points YoY.   

Cash and equivalents were $1.83 billion, while debt was $2.91 billion; however, Vertiv’s net leverage ratio remained at 0.5X.   

Inventories increased marginally in Q4, up ~1.8% QoQ to $1.46 billion, while accounts receivable showed a larger jump at 10.6% QoQ to $3.11 billion.   

In accordance with the order surge, deferred revenue jumped more than 60% QoQ to more than $1.81 billion, with management noting that order mix and order type are the two drivers, with mix possibly having a larger influence in Q4.   

Valuation: 

Vertiv trades at a peak forward P/S ratio of 8.4 and traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 2.2 in April 2025. On the bottom line, it trades at a forward P/E ratio of 48.7. Vertiv has traded at a minimum of 14.4 and a maximum of 52.5 in recent years.  

Notable Risks: 

As long as hyperscalers continue building capacity, demand for Vertiv’s power and cooling infrastructure should remain supported, particularly since Blackwell systems already require advanced thermal solutions. However, if analysts are modeling a step-function increase in revenue per rack from Rubin’s higher power density and more demanding liquid cooling requirements, that uplift could be pushed out depending on when the Rubin delay resolves. 

Dell: Margin Story; then Revenue 

Dell is not a stock we would own indefinitely, but given the strong recent performance, there’s a chance the stock is in play right now. Above and beyond revenue, Dell’s stock depends on its margins. 

Dell reported some of the strongest AI revenue numbers in the industry in Q4 with AI server revenue up 342% YoY to $9.0 billion, orders up 1,906% YoY to a record $34.1 billion and backlog up 177% QoQ to a record $43 billion.  

Margins: 

The market was growing concerned that rapidly rising memory costs would squeeze on Dell’s margins (“you're supposed to miss numbers, by the way, when memory prices go up”), yet Dell’s margins are among the highest they’ve been since we began tracking the stock. This is quite impressive given the AI server and memory headwinds, with storage being a key piece of this margin strength despite being a much smaller portion of revenue at $4.8 billion this quarter.    

Q4 gross profits were $6.7 billion or 20.2% of revenue compared to $5.7 billion or 23.7% in the same period last year. The lower margins reflect higher proportion of AI revenue mix.    

Q4 operating income grew by 43.2% YoY to $3.1 billion primarily driven by operating leverage. Operating margin was 9.3% compared to 9% in the same period last year.     

Q4 net income was $2.3 billion or 6.8% of revenue compared to $1.5 billion or 6.4% of revenue in the same period last year.   

Revenue: 

Dell’s Q4 revenue grew by 39.5% YoY and 23.6% QoQ to $33.4 billion driven primarily by outperformance in AI servers. Revenue growth accelerated by 28.7 percentage points from 10.8% YoY growth in the previous quarter and significant improvement from the (9.3%) QoQ decline in the previous quarter.  

Management also provided strong Q1 guidance of $34.7 billion to $35.7 billion, implying YoY growth of 50.6% and 5.5% QoQ at the midpoint. 

Cash: 

Similar to margins, Dell’s cash flows were equally as strong, with operating cash flow margin expanding by double digits and free cash flow following. Cash flow margins were also around the highest they’ve been over the last three years. 

Q4 operating cash flow was $4.7 billion or 14% of revenue compared to $585 million or 2.4% of revenue in the same period last year.  

Q4 adjusted free cash flow was $5.1 billion or 15.2% of revenue compared to $474 million or 2% of revenue in the same period last year. 

The company had a high debt of $31.5 billion compared to cash & investments of $13.3 billion at the end of Q4. The company repurchased shares worth $1.85 billion and paid dividends of $346 million in Q4. 

Valuation: 

Dell trades at a forward P/S ratio of 0.9. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 0.4 and a maximum of 1.3 in recent years. The company is currently trading at the mid-range. On the bottom line, it currently trades at a forward P/E ratio of 15.8. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/E ratio of 7.2 and a maximum of 22.3. The company is currently trading at the mid-range on the bottom line too.  

Notable Risks: 

The company had a high debt of $31.5 billion compared to cash & investments of $13.3 billion at the end of Q4. 

AI Software: 

Meta: Tied for the Best Mag 7 Stock 

Meta is an “eyeballs” company, and thus, an important lever to growth is increasing user engagement. In the most recent quarter, the company drove incremental engagement from ranking and product improvements. Primarily, the company optimized their systems to consider longer interaction histories to better identify a person’s interests. This led to the highest lift in feed views that the company has seen in two years: “The optimizations we made in Q4 drove a 7% lift in views of organic feed and video posts on Facebook, resulting in the largest quarterly revenue impact from Facebook product launches in the past two years.”  

Moving forward, Meta’s goal this year is to scale their training data to offer more personalized recommendations. By moving away from algorithms driving the feeds to LLMs, Meta can make the systems more responsive to real-time interest.  

This may seem like a subtle shift, but it’s actually not subtle at all – Meta is proposing a complete overhaul in how their systems surface content. Moving forward, LLMs will offer reasoning for a level of personalization not possible in the current approach, which is more pattern recognition based. Think of how Spotify works – it surfaces music you’ve already listened to. Facebook feeds are similar. However, moving forward, Meta can offer a personalized agent approach to where AI optimizes a feed to suggest content that does not require a direct signal.   

Here is what was stated on the call:  

“We're seeing in our early testing that personalized responses drive higher levels of engagement, and we expect to significantly advance the personalization of Meta AI this year. This dovetails with our investments in content understanding, which will enable our systems to develop a deeper understanding of each person's interests and preferences while also identifying the most relevant content across our platform to pull into responses.”  

Although Meta uses AI in its recommendations, the current systems are based on pattern and behavior-driven algorithms. For 2026, Meta will offer content that goes beyond the bounds of what you’ve already searched for/engaged with AI agents that can more intelligently infer your interests.   

The result will be more time spent on the platform and with higher engagement. Even incremental gains here will lead to more advertising dollars. 

The second area that Meta is making “big bets” by increasing monetization efficiency. Last quarter alone, the company doubled the number of GPUs used to train their GEM model for ads ranking. Similar to what was stated above, part of the improvements is using longer sequences of user behavior to inform the feed plus which ads are placed and when: “This new sequence learning architecture is significantly more efficient than our prior architectures which should enable us to further scale up the data, complexity and compute we use in our future ranking models to deliver performance gains.”  

Meta’s main approach to increasing the effectiveness of ad placements remains user targeting, but just smarter user targeting. This results in 4X better results than using AI to increase overall ad load: “In fact, in the second half of 2025, our initiatives on Facebook to redistribute ads across users and sessions delivered a nearly 4x larger revenue impact than Facebook ad load increases.”  

As you’ll see below in the Financials section, these improvements are making a material difference with Q4 revenue growing 17% QoQ and with a forward guide that implies the highest YoY growth rate for Meta since Covid-fueled 2021. 

Revenue: 

Q4 revenue grew by 23.8% YoY and 16.9% QoQ to $59.9 billion, beating estimates by 2.4%. Although strong sequential growth in Q4 is seasonal and Meta posted a 19.2% QoQ increase in Q4 2024, the current sequential growth is being achieved on a substantially higher revenue base of $51.2 billion versus $40.6 billion in the prior-year period. The strong revenue growth was primarily driven by robust demand stemming from AI advancements in ad recommendations, monetization, and user engagement.   

Management issued strong revenue guide of $53.5 billion to $56.5 billion, implying a 30% YoY growth and a sequential decline of (8.2%) at the midpoint. While the QoQ contraction reflects normal seasonality, the implied 30% YoY growth represents the fastest pace in the last 4.5 years. 

The company’s 2025 revenue grew by 22.2% YoY to $200.97 billion. Looking ahead, revenue growth is expected to accelerate 2.7 percentage points to 24.9% YoY growth to $250.97 billion in 2026 and will moderate to 17.8% YoY to $295.7 billion in 2027. 

AI Revenue: 

Meta is already seeing tailwinds from AI recommendation models driving higher ROI for advertisers following increased time spent across its family of apps.   

Q4 advertising revenue grew by 24.3% YoY to a record $58.1 billion. Notably, absolute advertising revenue growth reached $11.3 billion in the quarter, surpassing the $10.2 billion increase recorded in Q3. 

Perhaps the most important metric for Meta’s ad monetization is Family ARPP (average revenue per person). It reached a record $16.56 in Q4 2025, highlighting that Meta’s AI-driven ad performance improvements and monetization efforts are bearing fruit. While the 16.2% YoY growth in Q4 reflects a deceleration from the 17.7% seen in Q3, such a trend is common on a higher base and less of a concern given Meta is guiding for a modest acceleration this fiscal year. Notably, Q4 ARPP outpaced the 15.6% growth recorded in the prior-year period. 

EPS: 

Q4 GAAP EPS grew by 10.7% YoY to $8.88, beating estimates by 8%, driven primarily by higher revenue from stronger AI monetization. Analysts expect EPS to grow 2.9% YoY to $6.6 in Q1 2026. 

Looking ahead, GAAP EPS is expected to grow 25.8% YoY to $29.5 in 2026 and 15.9% YoY to $34.2 in 2027. 

Margins: 

Q4 gross margin was 81.8%, up 10 basis points YoY and down 20 basis points sequentially.  

Q4 operating income grew by 5.9% YoY to $24.7 billion with an operating margin of 41.3%, up 130 basis points sequentially and down 700 basis points YoY primarily due to higher AI-related operating expenses.  

Q4 net income grew by 9.3% YoY to $22.77 billion with a net profit margin of 38% compared to 43.1% in the same period last year. 
Cash: 

Meta’s cash flows improved in Q4, driven by higher profits.   

Q4 operating cash flow grew by 29.4% YoY to $36.2 billion with an operating cash flow margin of 60.5% compared to 57.8% in the same period last year and 58.5% in Q3. 

Q4 free cash flow grew by 7% YoY to $14.1 billion with a free cash flow margin of 23.5% compared to 27.2% in the same period last year, and 20.7% in Q3.  

The company had cash & marketable securities of $81.6 billion and debt of $58.7 billion. 

Valuation: 

Meta trades at a forward P/S ratio of 6.4. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 5.3 and a maximum of 9.9 in recent years. Meta is currently trading slightly lower than mid-range. On the bottom line, it trades a forward P/E ratio of 21. Meta has traded at a minimum of 15.2 and a maximum of 27.9. Meta is currently trading around the mid-range on the bottom-line. 

Notable Risks: 

Elevated capex increases financial risk by requiring substantial upfront investment before returns are fully realized. If monetization lags spending, margins and sentiment could come under pressure. 

Google: Tied for First Place Among Mag 7 

Revenue: 

Google delivered Q4 revenue of $113.83 billion, up 18.2% YoY, accelerating from 16.2% YoY in Q3 and marking the fastest growth since Q1 2022, driven by the accelerations in both Search and Cloud revenues.  

AI Revenue: 

Of the Big Three, Google reported the strongest AI-driven cloud acceleration this quarter, coupled with strong AI metrics and backlog growth that support this acceleration continuing through 2026.    

Google Cloud growth accelerated each quarter this year, though Q4 recorded the sharpest acceleration at 14 points to 48% YoY, with revenue coming in at $17.66 billion. Notably, this marked the segment surpassing a $70 billion annualized run rate, up from less than $50 billion annualized at the start of 2025. This would also mark its fastest revenue growth in more than four years. For Q1, Google expects strong growth to continue despite having tight accelerator supply.   

While the sharp acceleration is certainly impressive, sequential growth figures show a strong underlying trend within Cloud – for three quarters in a row, Cloud has delivered >$1 billion in QoQ growth, with each quarter larger than the last and Q4 increasing more than $2.5 billion versus Q3. Putting this in perspective to highlight Google Cloud’s strong AI-driven momentum, this was nearly as large as a QoQ increase as AWS, which rose $2.57 billion sequentially despite being double the size of Google Cloud.   

In percentage terms, Cloud growth accelerated from ~11% QoQ in Q2 and Q3 to 16.5% QoQ in Q4; this compares to 7.8% QoQ for AWS in Q4 and likely <2% QoQ for Azure.   

Google also provided a handful of stats accentuating AI’s impacts to growth. Revenue from products built on Google’s own genAI models increased nearly 400% YoY. Revenue from third-parties building AI applications rose 300% YoY. In total, Google Cloud has 14 product lines spanning infrastructure, platform and high-margin AI products and services exceeding $1 billion in annual revenue.    

It’s important to note that growth is currently off of a small base, thus the market will likely look toward overall AI revenue to justify the capex increase Alphabet is guiding for. While there were no specific updates to Cloud’s AI revenue or contribution, assuming that AI contributed roughly half of the quarter’s 48% YoY growth, this would place AI’s run rate at more than $11 billion.   

EPS: 

Google reported EPS of $2.82 in Q4, beating estimates by 6.8% and representing a growth of 31.1% YoY.   

Margins: 

Google reported a gross margin of 59.8% in Q4, up 1.1 points YoY. 

Operating margin was 31.6%, down 0.5 points YoY but up 1.1 points QoQ. 

Net margin was 30.3% in Q4, up 2.8 points YoY but down 3.8 points QoQ (as Google recorded a $10.7 billion gain on equity investments in Q3 that impacted the bottom line).   

Cash: 

Google’s cash flows remained rather resilient in 2025, with free cash flow margin declining marginally in the face of a 74% increase in capex. However, FCF must be tracked closely as the capex surge could easily bring free cash flow margin to the single-digits. Google has guided capex of $175-$185 billion in 2026, up 96.7% YoY at the midpoint. 

In Q4, Google reported operating cash flow of $52.4 billion for a 46% margin, up from a 40.6% margin in the year ago quarter but down from a 47.2% margin in Q3. For the full year, Google reported OCF of $164.7 billion for a 40.9% margin, up from 35.8% in 2024.  

Q4 free cash flow was $24.55 billion for a 21.6% margin, contracting on both a YoY and QoQ basis, from 25.8% in the year ago quarter and 23.9% in Q3. For 2025, free cash flow was $73.3 billion for an 18.2% margin, down from 20.8% in 2024.  

Looking ahead to 2026, analysts project Google to generate operating cash flow of $195.9 billion, though this would leave just $15.9 billion in FCF at the midpoint of capex guidance. Based on current revenue estimates for $471.4 billion, this would roughly project FCF margin to be 3.4%.  

Google’s balance sheet remains healthy with cash and marketable securities of $126.8 billion, while debt was $46.5 billion, up from $21.6 billion in Q3 as Google issued more than $26.5 billion in debt in the quarter. Debt is likely to rise sharply again in Q1 as Google’s recent bond sale reportedly took in over $30 billion. 

Valuation: 

Google trades at a forward P/S ratio of 8.6. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 4.4 and a maximum of 9.7 in recent years. Google is currently trading slightly higher than mid-range. On the bottom line, it trades at a forward P/E ratio of 28.9. Google has traded at a minimum of 13.7 and a maximum of 30.5. Google is currently trading slightly higher than the mid-range on the bottom line too. 

Notable Risks: 

The high capex would put pressure on the company’s cash flows.  

Reddit: The Scarce Asset in an AI-Generated Internet 

Reddit reported revenue of $725.6M for 70% YoY growth and 24.1% QoQ growth, which reflects seasonality from the holiday quarter. When comparing to last year's Q4, the company reported 130 basis points higher growth on a QoQ basis – no small feat given the tough comps the company is lapping with six quarters of 60%+ growth.   

The bottom-line shines with this stock as adjusted EBITDA was 45.1%, up from 36.1% in the year ago quarter. The GAAP operating margin of 31.9% has expanded sizably from the 12.4% margin reported last year for operating income of $232M. The free cash flow margin is 36.3%, leading the company to announce $1 billion in share repurchases.   

Although many investors consider Reddit niche compared to larger sites like Facebook or Google, the key metrics steadily move up on this audience of roughly 500 million monthly users and 120 million daily users. Global average revenue per user (ARPU) grew 42% YoY, up from 23% YoY growth in Q4 of last year. Advertising revenue also accelerated to 75% growth compared to 60% last year.  

Despite the strong report, the stock price has been slightly volatile. Management guided for a deceleration to 52.9% YoY growth, which leaves the market wondering if there is a catalyst in Reddit’s future. On the call, management pointed out they’ve guided conservatively for a few quarters now and discussed a new initiative to onboard advertisers at the bottom of the funnel with their AI-powered MAX platform. Another reason is that the company will no longer report logged-in users separately from logged-out users. This has been a point of contention for the Street for some time, which we covered in our previous analysis.  

That said, stocks with unwavering fundamentals with 50%-60% growth on the top line and 100%+ growth on the bottom line have a way of being mispriced quickly during periods of uncertainty. Consider that Reddit offers a Rule of 40 (revenue growth plus adjusted EBITDA margin) of 115 compared to Palantir’s Rule of 40 (revenue growth plus adjusted operating margin) of 127. Reddit’s rule of 40 is up 7 percentage points sequentially and 8 percentage points YoY.  

Reddit has always monetized through advertising, but Reddit Max marks a shift from primarily brand and contextual ads toward AI-driven, automated performance advertising that can increase the number of advertisers that Reddit onboards.   

Although early, this could put Reddit on the map for using its personalized data to compete for ad dollars in performance advertising. Should it prove successful, this would also be a strong motivating factor for Reddit to drop the logged-in/logged-out user metric given users will see the performance ads regardless of logged-in status. Most importantly, these ads monetize at a higher rate than brand ads. 

Revenue: 

Reddit once again reported stellar revenue growth of 69.7% YoY and 24.1% QoQ to $725.6 million. Revenue growth has been more than 60% for the sixth consecutive quarter. The company’s revenue beat estimates by a solid 8.8% and was better than last quarter’s beat of 6.4%. The strong revenue growth was primarily driven by 75% YoY growth in the advertising revenue to $690 million. While its other revenue, which includes licensing deals with Google and OpenAI, rose by a modest 8% YoY to $36 million. Regionally, U.S. revenue grew 68% and international revenue grew 78% YoY.  

Management guided Q1 revenue of $595M to $605M, implying a YoY growth of 52.9% YoY and down (17.3%) QoQ. The company’s Q1 guide beat the analysts estimates by 4% and was also stronger than last quarter’s beat of 3.5%. Analysts expect Q2 revenue to grow 42.8% YoY and Q3 revenue to grow 40% YoY to $818.8 million.   

Full year 2025 revenue grew by 69.4% YoY to $2.20 billion. Looking ahead, analysts expect 2026 revenue to grow by 42.7% YoY to $3.14 billion and 2027 revenue to grow by 30.2% YoY to $4.1 billion. 

AI Revenue: 

Q4 advertising revenue grew by 75% YoY to $690 million, accelerating from 74% growth in the previous quarter. Management attributed to impression growth as the main driver of revenue growth as the company’s AI investments are driving efficiency for advertisers delivering more outcomes and lower cost per action. Since last year, enhancements to the shopping ad ML models delivered over 75% improvement in advertisers return on investment.  

In Q4, click volume in the mid-funnel grew over 60% and lower funnel conversion volume doubled YoY. The company’s active advertisers grew by 75% YoY in Q4 and Reddit added new customers across its channels, including large, mid-market and SMBs.  

The company’s average revenue per user (ARPU) grew by 42% YoY and 19% QoQ to $5.98. ARPU growth accelerated from 41% YoY and 11% sequential growth in the previous quarter. 

The US ARPU grew by 53% YoY to $10.79. Although it slightly decelerated from 54% YoY growth in Q3, on a sequential basis it accelerated to 19% growth from 15% QoQ in the previous quarter. 

EPS: 

Q4 GAAP EPS grew by 244.4% YoY and 55% QoQ to $1.24, beating estimates by a solid 33.1%.  

Analysts expect EPS to grow by 286.6% YoY to $0.50 in Q1 and 86% YoY to $0.84 in Q2.  

Looking ahead, analysts expect 2026 EPS to grow by 56.9% YoY to $4.11 and 39.5% YoY to $5.74 in 2027. 

Margins: 

The company is experiencing strong profit growth, primarily driven by operating leverage.  

Q4 gross profits grew by 68.5% YoY to $666.9 million with a gross margin of 91.9%. The company reported its sixth consecutive quarter of above 90% gross margins.  

Operating margin improved by 19.5 percentage points YoY and 8.2 percentage points sequentially to 31.9% primarily driven by strong operating leverage.  

Net profit margin improved by 18.1 percentage points YoY and 6.9 percentage points sequentially to 34.7%.  

Q4 adjusted EBITDA grew by 112% YoY to $327 million with an adjusted EBITDA margin of 45.1%, beating the management guidance of 42.4%. Adjusted EBITDA margin improved by 9 percentage points YoY and 4.8 percentage points sequentially.  

Management has guided Q1 adjusted EBITDA margin of 35.8%, down 9.3 percentage points sequentially and up 6.4 percentage points YoY. 

Cash: 

Reddit reported strong cash flows primarily driven by record profits. The company’s balance sheet is robust, providing financial flexibility to invest in future growth and support share repurchases.  

Q4 operating cash flows grew by 196.5% YoY to $266.8 million with an operating cash flow margin of 36.8%, up 15.8 percentage points YoY.  

Q4 free cash flows grew by 195.7% YoY to $263.6 million with a free cash flow margin of 36.3%, up 15.5 percentage points YoY.  

The company has cash and marketable securities of $2.48 billion with no debt and cash increased by $250 million sequentially. 

Valuation: 

Reddit trades at a forward P/S ratio of 8.9. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 4.2 and a maximum of 24.4 in recent years. Reddit is currently trading significantly lower than mid-range. On the bottom line, it trades at a forward P/E ratio of 22.4. Reddit traded at a minimum of 18.2 and a maximum of 95.8. The company is trading significantly lower than mid-range on the bottom line too. 

Notable Risks: 

Reddit’s decision to stop reporting logged-in and logged-out user metrics in the second half of 2026 may lead to a transparency risk for investors. Those metrics help the market assess engagement quality, traffic mix, and monetization potential across the platform. Where the site ranks in terms of web traffic could change at any time as it’s entirely dependent on the Google partnership. 

Palantir: Commercial Surges, Yet Software Stocks Will be Tested 

Palantir reported another very strong quarter in Q4, with revenue accelerating to 70%, an impressive 57 point acceleration over the last ten quarters, while guiding for revenue to accelerate further to 73.6% in Q1.   

US commercial momentum remained unabated, with revenue accelerating 16 points sequentially to 137% YoY, surpassing the $500 million mark in the quarter. When looking at the strength of both QoQ and YoY growth, it’s likely Palantir represents the highest AI segment growth across the AI universe.   

On top of that, Palantir initially guided for fiscal 2026 revenue to accelerate from 56.1% to nearly 61% YoY, driven by US commercial revenue accelerating six points to >115% YoY. Driving such an acceleration at these growth rates is undeniably difficult, yet there are hints that Palantir could go above and beyond these figures by this time next year.   

If Palantir can outperform to a similar degree as 2025, such as 45-50 points above the first guidance, the revenue projection for US commercial would look much different. This scenario would need around a 10 to 12 point raise each quarter, and could project revenue as ~160% YoY, a 51 point acceleration. In dollar terms, this would project $3.82 billion, or ~$680 million above guidance.    

The main takeaway here is that even a modest outperformance and guidance raises of a few points each quarter could easily drive US commercial revenue growth to a double-digit acceleration from 2025’s 109% growth.   

Revenue: 

Palantir reported revenue of $1.41 billion in Q4, accelerating to 70% YoY while QoQ growth ticked 1.5 points higher to 19.1%, and marking a 50 point acceleration over the last two years. This also is Palantir’s highest revenue growth in their history as a public company.  

More impressively, Palantir guided for this revenue acceleration to continue into Q1 and for 2026, suggesting that the AI-driven growth engine that propelled shares higher through 2024 and 2025 is still intact, and potentially strengthening.  

Q1 revenue was guided to be $1.532 billion to $1.536 billion, accelerating 3.6 points to 73.6% YoY at midpoint (and what would be a fresh record growth rate), though QoQ growth would be just 9%.   

For 2026, Palantir offered an initial guide for $7.182 billion to $7.198 billion, up 60.7% YoY at midpoint, or $900 million ahead of consensus for $6.29 billion for 42.8% growth. This would also mark a 4.6 point acceleration, a significant feat considering the swift acceleration the company saw through the back half of 2025.   

AI Revenue: 

Palantir’s AIP-driven US commercial segment remains the company’s core revenue driver, with growth accelerating once again in Q4 to the fastest rate in four years. What’s more impressive is that Palantir not only has guided for US commercial revenue to more than double in 2026, but that it was guided to accelerate from 2025’s already-rapid 109% growth.  

US commercial revenue rose 137% YoY and 29% QoQ to $507 million in Q4, surpassing a $2 billion annualized run rate in the quarter, up from a $1 billion run rate at the start of 2025. QoQ growth accelerated only one point from 28% in Q3, though accelerating sequentially at this pace is difficult. 

On a YoY view, US commercial continued to accelerate, with the 137% growth in Q4 marking a 16 point acceleration from 121% YoY in Q3. Since the start of the year, US commercial revenue growth has accelerated a tremendous 66 points.   

RPO saw a meaningful step up in Q4, rising 62% QoQ to $4.21 billion, with YoY growth accelerating from 65.6% in Q3 to 143.4% in Q4. This also represented the company’s strongest RPO growth since the start of 2023 on both a YoY and QoQ basis.   

EPS: 

Palantir reported $0.25 in adjusted EPS in Q4, up 78.6% YoY, with GAAP EPS coming in at $0.24, up 700% YoY and beating estimates by 8.7% and 33.3% respectively.  

Palantir did not provide guidance for Q1, though consensus estimates currently call for adjusted EPS of $0.28, up 114.5% YoY, and GAAP EPS of $0.24, up 200% YoY.   

For the full year, Palantir delivered adjusted EPS of $0.75, up 82.9% YoY, and GAAP EPS of $0.63, up 231.6% YoY. Again, Palantir did not provide guidance for the forward fiscal year, though current consensus points to adjusted EPS up 76.2% to $1.32 and GAAP EPS up 79.4% to $1.13. 

Margins: 

While its revenue growth and acceleration are second-to-none in AI software, so are Palantir’s margins, with the company showcasing an impressive ability to drive margin expansion of >10 points while simultaneously accelerating revenue.  

For example, Palantir’s adjusted operating margin in Q4 was a record 57.4%, well ahead of its guidance for 52.4% and expanding 12 points YoY. This is a remarkable feat as it highlights Palantir’s ability to maintain its cost profile despite meaningfully accelerating revenue quarter after quarter.  

Adjusted EBITDA margin also showed strong expansion, coming in at 57%, up 6 points QoQ and 11 points YoY.   

Looking down the line, gross margins expanded nicely in Q4, with GAAP gross margin at 85%, up 6 points YoY and 3 points QoQ. Adjusted gross margin also expanded but at a smaller degree, up 3 points YoY and 2 points QoQ to 85%.  

The operating margin expansion was where Palantir shined. GAAP operating margin was 41% in Q4, up 40 points YoY (coming against a low comp due to the one-time stock appreciation rights (SARs) expense) and 8 points QoQ.  

As noted above, adjusted operating margin was 57.4%, up 12 points YoY and 6 points QoQ. Palantir guided for adjusted operating margin to remain strong in Q1 to 56.8% at midpoint, up 13 points YoY and down marginally QoQ. 

Cash: 

Palantir’s cash flows were robust in Q4, and management guided for adjusted FCF margin to expand in 2026 from an already strong 51% in 2025.  

Operating cash flow was $777.3 million in Q4 for a 55% margin, down slightly from a 56% margin in the year ago quarter but rebounding solidly from a 43% margin in Q3. For the year, Palantir delivered operating cash flow of $2.13 billion, or a 48% margin, up from 40% in 2024.  

Adjusted free cash flow was $791.4 million in Q4 for a 56% margin, down from a 63% margin a year ago but up from 46% in Q3. For 2025, Palantir generated $2.27 billion in adjusted FCF for a 51% margin, up from 44% in 2024.  

For 2026, Palantir guided for a step up in adjusted FCF, projecting it to increase more than 77% YoY to $3.925-$4.125 billion. This would represent an adjusted FCF margin of 56%, a five point expansion from 2025.  

Palantir’s balance sheet remained extremely healthy with cash of $7.18 billion and zero debt. 

Valuation: 

Palantir trades at a forward P/S ratio of 44.8. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 12.5 and a maximum of 112.3 in recent years. Palantir is currently trading significantly lower than the mid-range. However, forward P/S ratio > 30 is considered high. On the bottom line, it trades at a forward P/E ratio of 103.5. Palantir has traded at a minimum of 41.7 and a maximum of 285.8. Palantir is currently trading significantly lower than the mid-range. 

Notable Risks: 

Investors should be prepared for even well-insulated software names like Palantir and Cloudflare to face valuation pressure — not necessarily because their businesses are deteriorating, but because the pace of iteration from Anthropic, OpenAI, and a growing cohort of well-funded private startups continually resets the market's assumptions about who captures value in the AI stack and how quickly incumbents can be commoditized. 

Cloudflare: Strong Positioning, Timing is the Main Question 

While Big Tech witnessed weak price action following capex estimates for 2026, Cloudflare’s earnings report was being met with enthusiasm. Rather than competing with hyperscalers head-on, the company is taking a different route by offering an edge network where latency, global reach and lower costs matter more than compute and scale.   

Key metrics are suggesting an important inflection is underway, which was a theme from our coverage last quarter. Cloudflare reported the strongest revenue growth since Q1 2023. The company’s Q4 revenue grew by 33.6% YoY and 9.3% QoQ to $614.5 million, beating estimates by a solid 3.9%. The company’s Q1 revenue guide also beat estimates by 1%.    

The company reported a record new annual contract value (ACV) in Q4, which grew by nearly 50% YoY and was the fastest growth rate since 2021. Q4 remaining performance obligations (RPO) grew by 48% YoY and was the fastest growth rate since June 2022. Similarly, paying customers grew by 40% YoY and accelerated by 7 percentage points from 33% growth in the previous quarter. Notably, active developers on the Workers platform grew by 50% YoY to 4.5 million.   

Cloudflare’s CEO buried the lead a bit in the opening remarks, finally stating what is perhaps the most important element to his quarter’s beat: AI Agents. Although the key metric was provided for January, it’s clear that Cloudflare is seeing a strong inflection: “Over the month of January alone, the number of weekly requests generated by AI agents more than doubled across the Cloudflare network. This is driving increased demand for our whole platform.”  

According to management, this creates a “virtuous flywheel” as more agents drive more code execution on their Workers Platform, which in turn, drives more demand for their security products and networking services.  

AI agents also drive sheer infrastructure consumption for Cloudflare as agents look at many more sites and are always-on – which leads to more overall usage.   

Here was some commentary from the previous earnings call:  

“You've got a bunch of the agents of the world that are interacting with the Internet and they're interacting with it at a volume that we've just never seen before. And that's just driving more need for what are classically Cloudflare’s services. So the fact that more than 20% of the Internet sits behind us means that the agents have to interact with us, which means we have a seat at the table in defining exactly what the rules and the rails and the guardrails of the future of agentic commerce is going to look like; and be, and we are sitting in the middle of that.” 

Revenue: 

Cloudflare reported the strongest revenue growth since Q1 2023. The company’s Q4 revenue grew by 33.6% YoY and 9.3% QoQ to $614.5 million, beating estimates by a solid 3.9%. Revenue growth accelerated 2.9 percentage points from 30.7% growth in Q3 and was primarily driven by strong AI demand for its services, particularly from its enterprise customers. The company guided Q1 revenue of $620 million to $621 million, implying a YoY growth of 29.5% YoY and 1% QoQ and beating estimates by 1%.   

The company 2025 revenue grew by 29.8% YoY to $2.17 billion. Management provided a strong 2026 revenue guide of $2.785 billion to $2.795 billion, implying a YoY growth of 28.7% and beating estimates by 1.8%.  

AI Revenue: 

Note that Cloudflare does not have enough AI revenue to breakout into a standalone segment. However, many of the companies key metrics are benefitting from the overall increased internet traffic from AI agents with the CEO stating: “If you look at the last 30-plus years of the Internet and software ecosystem, they were built for human consumption, people in seats and clicks. Now the agentic Internet is emerging, and we can already see its trends. If humans looked at 5 sites when they were making a decision, agents might look at 5,000.” 

Over time, Cloudflare will see more revenue from edge inference, but right now, it’s mainly visible in internet usage. Here are some examples: 

Q4 remaining performance obligations (RPO) grew by 48% YoY and 16% QoQ to $2.496 billion, accelerating from 43% YoY and 8% QoQ growth in Q3. It was the fastest growth rate since June 2022. Current RPO was 63% of total RPO and grew 34% YoY. 

Cloudflare reported a record new annual contract value (ACV) in Q4. Matthew Prince said in the earnings call, “We blew away our previous record for new ACV in the quarter, with strong year-over-year and quarter-over-quarter acceleration. In Q4, new ACV book grew nearly 50% year-over-year, making it not only a record quarter in absolute ACV dollars but also the fastest growth rate we've delivered since 2021.” 

However, what has us on alert is the company’s billings grew by 27% YoY and 11% QoQ to $694.9 million. Among the key metrics, billings growth was blemish as it decelerated from 40% YoY and 12% QoQ growth in Q3. Billings represents real-time demand, and thus, RPO could be less meaningful if it’s signaling multi-year contracts. 

EPS: 

The company’s Q4 adjusted EPS grew by 47.4% YoY to $0.28, beating estimates by 3.2%. GAAP EPS was in line with estimates of ($0.03) compared to ($0.04) in the same period last year.  

Management Q1 adjusted EPS guide of $0.23 was lower than the estimates of $0.25. However, it implies a YoY growth of 43.8%. 

Margins: 

Q4 gross profits grew by 28.8% YoY to $452.5 million. Adjusted gross profits grew by 29% YoY to $460.18 million with an adjusted gross margin of 74.9%, down 270 basis points YoY and 40 basis points sequentially due to higher network expenses from the increase of paid customer traffic.   

Q4 operating loss was ($49.2 million) compared to ($34.7 million) in the same period last year. Adjusted operating income grew by 33.3% YoY to $89.6 million with an adjusted operating margin of 14.6%, which was flat YoY and down 70 basis points sequentially and beat the guidance by 40 basis points. Management Q1 guide is 11.4%. The company reported $132.4 million in stock-based compensation in Q4, which explains the difference between GAAP and non-GAAP operating income. 

Q4 net loss was ($12.1 million) compared to ($12.8 million) in the same period last year. Q4 adjusted net profit grew by 55.2% YoY to $106.8 million or 17.4% of revenue compared to 15% in the same period last year. 

Cash: 

Cloudflare’s Q4 operating cash flow grew by 49.6% YoY to $190.4 million with an operating cash flow margin of 31%, up 3 percentage points YoY and 1% QoQ. Similarly, free cash flows grew by 108% YoY to $99.4 million with a free cash flow margin of 16%, up 6 percentage points YoY and 3 percentage points QoQ. 

The company had cash and available-for-sale securities of $4.1 billion, while convertible senior notes outstanding were $3.27 billion at the end of Q4 2025. 

Valuation: 

Cloudflare trades at a forward P/S ratio of 23.1. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 13.8 and a maximum of 41.4 in recent years. Cloudflare is currently trading slightly lower than mid-range. On the bottom line, it trades at a forward P/E ratio of 164.2. Cloudflare has traded at a minimum of 90.6 and a maximum of 277.3. Cloudflare is currently trading slightly lower than the mid-range on the bottom line too. 

Notable Risks: 

The slowdown in billings is an important data point, as it may point to softer demand trends and reduced momentum in future revenue growth. At the same time, the company remains unprofitable on a GAAP basis, which suggests the path to sustainable profitability may be longer than investors typically want from a software company.  

Investors should be prepared for even well-insulated software names like Palantir and Cloudflare to face valuation pressure — not necessarily because their businesses are deteriorating, but because the pace of iteration from Anthropic, OpenAI, and a growing cohort of well-funded private startups continually resets the market's assumptions about who captures value in the AI stack and how quickly incumbents can be commoditized. 

Energy Stocks 

Bloom Energy 

The most important piece of information from Bloom’s Q4 earnings report was the company announcing its total current backlog at $20 billion, including $6 billion in product backlog, up 2.5X, and $14 billion in service backlog, up 1.5X.    

The backlog was driven by “half a dozen” hyperscale and neocloud customers compared to one customer a year ago.   

Bloom says the product backlog is attributable to its existing contractual commitments for purchases by a financier or customer in the future, including expected product revenue and anticipated ITC/tax incentives.   

Product backlog grew 140% year-over-year. Service backlog includes revenue for contracted operation and maintenance services for past and future product sales, in terms ranging from five to 20 years, meaning this backlog will take much longer to convert.   

Revenue: 

Bloom Energy once again delivered revenue more than 20% above analysts' expectations, with Q4 revenue of $777.68 million beating the consensus estimate for $643.5 million by 20.5%. This represented 35.9% YoY growth, decelerating from 57.1% YoY growth in Q3; however, sequential growth was very strong at 49.8% QoQ, accelerating from 29.4% QoQ in Q3 – this is because Q4 is typically Bloom’s seasonally strongest quarter. 

For the full year, Bloom reported record revenue of $2.02 billion, driven by significant AI data center growth and demand from commercial and industrial sectors. This represented 37.9% YoY growth. 

For 2026, Bloom guided for a sharp acceleration to 58% YoY at the midpoint of its guide for $3.1 to $3.3 billion, supported by its capacity expansion towards 2GW. This is a notable 24% beat over the consensus estimate and also would represent just 16% of its total $20 billion backlog. 

Product revenue was $638.5 million in Q4, up 35.4% YoY and 66.1% QoQ, though YoY growth did decelerate from 64.4% as Q4 faced a much tougher, seasonally strong comp. FY25 product revenue increased 41.1% YoY to $1.53 billion.   

Installation revenue was $67.3 million in Q4, up 86.4% YoY, though this did decelerate from 105.2% growth in Q3. FY25 installation revenue increased 66.9% YoY to $204.1 million.  

Service revenue was $61.7 million, up 14.7% YoY, decelerating slightly from 15.5% in Q3. FY25 service revenue increased 6.9% YoY to $228.3 million.  

Electricity revenue did reaccelerate in Q4 but growth continued to decline. Q4 revenue declined (5.3%) YoY to $10.2 million, improving from Q3’s (25.1%) decline. FY25 electricity revenue was $60.3 million, up 14.2%. 

Margins:   

Bloom’s margins showed a sharp sequential rebound in Q4 but remained lower on a YoY basis.  

Bloom reported GAAP gross margin of 30.9% in Q4, down 7.4 points YoY but up 1.7 points QoQ. Adjusted gross margin was 31.9%, also down 7.4 points YoY but up 1.5 points QoQ.   

GAAP operating margin was 11.3% in Q4, down 7 points YoY but up 9.8 points QoQ. Adjusted operating margin was 17.1%, down 6.2 points YoY but up 8.2 points QoQ. Bloom noted that it continues to focus on reducing product cost and driving operating leverage, which will likely be much more visible in 2026 based on its current guide.  

GAAP net margin was 0.1% in Q4, down 18.2 points YoY but up 4.5 points QoQ – to note, Bloom incurred a $66.2 million debt conversion expense charge that negatively impacted GAAP income this quarter. Adjusted net margin was 17.2%, down 3.5 points YoY but up 10.4 points QoQ. 

Earnings:   

Bloom reported GAAP EPS of $0.00 in the quarter, though adjusted EPS saw a large 50% beat, coming in at $0.45 versus the $0.30 estimate.   

Cash: 

Q4 is seasonally Bloom’s largest quarter for cash flows, with operating and free cash flow margins in excess of 50% this quarter, though this was much lower than the >80% margins it reported in Q4 2024. However, these large margins simply offset weak cash flows in the rest of the year, with full-year margins in the single-digit range.   

Operating cash flow was $418.1 million in Q4 for a 53.8% margin, down from an 84.6% margin in the year ago quarter.  

Free cash flow was $395.1 million in Q4 for a 50.8% margin, down from an 82.7% margin in the year ago quarter.  

Bloom reported $2.45 billion in cash, though debt rose to $2.61 billion, as Bloom raised $2.5 billion in convertible notes while also paying down $975 million in existing debt in the quarter.   

Valuation: 

Bloom Energy is currently trading at a peak forward P/S ratio of 19.1. The company has traded at a minimum of 1.4 in February 2024. On the bottom line, the company trades at a forward P/E ratio of 157.9. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/E ratio of 28.8 and a maximum of 462.4 in recent years.  

Notable Risks: 

Due to the strong stock outperformance of 1,180% in the past year. Bloom Energy is currently trading at a peak forward P/S ratio of 19.1 and leaves with less room for error if growth or guidance falls short of expectations. 

GE Vernova 

GE Vernova exited 2025 with one of the strongest AI demand and backlog profiles in the energy industry. In Q4, management emphasized accelerating slot reservations, rising pricing, improving backlog margins and multi-year visibility extending into the end of the decade.   

The company signed 6GW of incremental gas contracts in the final three weeks of December, bringing total Q425 contracts to about 24GW. As a result, the Gas Power backlog plus slot reservation agreements (SRAs) expanded from 62GW to 83GW sequentially.  

Management now expects to reach 100GW under contract in 2026, an upward revision from the 60GW discussed in mid-2025. Notably, the current 83GW under contract is heavily allocated toward 2029 delivery. By the time that 100GW is reached, both 2029 and 2030 capacity will be sold out.   

Revenue: 

GE Vernova Q4 revenue grew by 3.8% YoY to $10.96 billion, beating estimates by 7.1%, driven by rising AI energy demand. Organic revenue grew by 2% YoY to $10.8 billion. The company is a major beneficiary of the increasing energy requirements from the global AI infrastructure build-out, positioning the company as a key beneficiary of this secular trend. The continued slowdown in the Wind segment was offset by the growth in power and electrification segments that are benefitting from rising electricity consumption driven by data centers and artificial intelligence demand.   

AI Revenue: 

Q4 power orders increased 77% YoY to $11.7 billion, driven primarily by a sharp acceleration in gas power equipment orders, which more than tripled on higher volumes and favorable pricing. Gas turbine orders rose 71% YoY to 41 units, while power services orders grew 15%, reflecting continued customer investment in existing fleets.   

Q4 power segment revenue grew organically by 5% YoY to $5.7 billion. Management expects high single-digit organic growth in Q1. 

Electrification orders were 2.5x revenue and were up 50% YoY to $7.4 billion primarily due to growing grid equipment demand, particularly for synchronous condensers, substations partially to support data center growth and switchgear. The company also witnessed strong equipment orders growth in the Middle East, which increased over $1 billion and in North America, which more than doubled YoY.   

Q4 organic electrification revenue grew by 32% YoY to $2.9 billion primarily driven by strong growth in switchgear and High-Voltage Direct Current (HVDC) equipment. Management expects a similar revenue as Q4 in the next quarter, which will also include Prolec GE.   

Due to a sudden surge in AI-related electricity demand, the company’s turbine orders are vastly outpacing demand, and the company’s order book is sold out through 2028. 

Margins: 

The company’s Q4 adjusted EBITDA grew by 7.3% YoY to $1.16 billion with an adjusted EBITDA margin of 10.6%, an improvement of 250 basis points sequentially and 40 basis points YoY. Organic adjusted EBITDA margin improved 10 basis points YoY to 10.7%. 

Q4 net income was $3.7 billion or 33.5% of revenue compared to $484 million or 4.6% of revenue in the same period last year. The Q4 net income included a one-time tax benefit of $2.9 billion. 

Earnings: 

Q4 GAAP EPS was $13.39, up from $1.73 in the prior-year period, reflecting a one-time tax benefit of $10.58. Excluding this benefit, GAAP EPS would have been $2.81, below the consensus estimate of $3.13, primarily due to losses in the Wind segment. 

Cash: 

The company’s cash flows are improving driven by growth in profits and also improvement in working capital.   

Q4 operating cash flows grew by 169% YoY to $2.48 billion with an operating cash flow margin of 22.6% compared to 8.7% in the same period last year. The company benefitted from down payments on higher orders and slot reservations at Power as well as higher orders at Electrification.  

Q4 free cash flow grew by 214.7% YoY to $1.8 billion with a free cash flow margin of 16.5% compared to 5.4% in the same period last year. 

The company had cash of $8.85 billion and no debt at the end of Q4. In February, the company issued $2.6 billion of debt and completed the previously announced acquisition of the remaining 50% ownership stake of Prolec GE. 

Valuation: 

GE Vernova is currently trading at a peak forward P/S ratio of 6.0. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 0.96 in April 2024. On the bottom line, the company is trading at a forward P/E ratio of 69.4. The company has traded at a minimum of 38.5 and a maximum of 136.7 in recent years. GE Vernova is currently trading slightly lower than the mid-range on the bottom line.  

Notable Risks: 

The ongoing weakness in the wind segment is to be watched. That said, management expects a meaningful recovery in the wind business to materialize in the second half of 2026. 

NextEra Energy 

NextEra has traditionally been known as a regulated utility with a renewables development arm, yet is pivoting to become one of the few companies in the United States that can build power infrastructure at large scale across renewables, storage, gas, transmission and potentially nuclear. As you’re well aware, data center demand is insatiable, and NextEra’s ability to work across two growth engines is poised to benefit: Florida Power and Light provides the large, regulated utility platform while the Energy Resources solutions (NEER) provide renewables and storage. This can help break NextEra out of the bucket of being a passive beneficiary of load growth and into a builder that is enabling critical data center growth. In other words, NEE is pivoting toward being one of a handful of credible, large-scale solutions for the power demands of AI. 

Revenue: 

NextEra Energy’s (NEE) Q4 2025 revenue grew by 20.7% YoY and down (18.4%) QoQ to $6.5 billion. Revenue growth accelerated by 15.4 percentage points from 5.3% YoY growth in the previous quarter. The company is a beneficiary of AI data center energy demand. The Q4 sequential decline was seasonal as the company’s Q4 2024 revenue was down (21.7%) YoY and (28.8%) QoQ. 

During the Investor Day in December, management said they expect to develop data center hubs totaling 15 GW to 30 GW by 2035, and they reiterated this guidance during the Q4 earnings call. They have already identified 20 potential hubs and expect to identify 40 by the end of 2026. 

Margins: 

The company’s Q4 operating margin improved YoY, primarily driven by operating leverage.   

Q4 operating income was $1.59 billion or 24.4% of revenue compared to $941 million or 17.5% of revenue in the same period last year.   

Q4 net income was $1.54 billion or 23.6% of revenue compared to $1.2 billion or 22.3% of revenue in Q4 2024.  

Q4 adjusted net income was $1.13 billion or 17.4% of revenue compared to $1.1 billion or 20.3% of revenue in the same period last year.   

Earnings: 

The company’s Q4 adjusted EPS grew by 1.9% YoY to $0.54. Analysts expect Q1 adjusted EPS to be down (2.3%) YoY to $0.97 and expect adjusted EPS growth to accelerate to 5.6% and 12.4% in the subsequent two quarters.    

Looking ahead, analysts expect adjusted EPS to grow by 8.2% YoY to $4.01 in 2026 and 9% YoY to $4.37 in 2027. During the Q4 earnings, management reiterated its guidance set at Investor Day in December to grow adjusted EPS at a CAGR of 8% from 2025 to 2032 and at the same rate from 2032 to 2035. 

Cash: 

The company has steady operating cash flows. However, due to high capex, there is a wide difference between operating cash flow margin and free cash flow margin.  

Q4 operating cash flow was $2.5 billion or 38.4% of revenue compared to $1.98 billion or 36.8% of revenue in the same period last year.  

Q4 free cash flow was $519 million or 8% of revenue compared to $204 million or 3.8% of revenue in Q4 2024. 

The company had a high debt of $95.6 billion compared to cash of $2.8 billion at the end of Q4 2025. The company recently priced a $2.3 billion offering of equity units on March 3. The hybrid security will consist of a contract to purchase the common stock in about three years and undivided beneficial ownership interests in two series of debentures issued by NextEra Energy Capital Holdings. It provides the company with immediate liquidity while deferring common equity dilution for approximately three years. 

Valuation: 

NextEra Energy is currently trading at a forward P/S ratio of 6.1. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 4.2 and a maximum of 6.5 in recent years. NEE is currently trading slightly higher than the mid-range. On the bottom line, it trades at a forward P/E ratio of 23.1. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/E ratio of 16.1 and a maximum of 25. NEE is currently trading slightly higher than the mid-range on the bottom line too.  

Notable Risks: 

The company has high debt of $95.6 billion compared to cash of $2.8 billion at the end of Q4 2025. 

Conclusion: 

The 70-page report is not meant to explain the AI market or what AI companies do. Plenty of commentary already does that. Rather, the report and our I/O Fund Research site are designed to help our members act before the rest of the market catches up. What we offer is execution; not merely information. 

The AI trade is evolving, but the opportunity is far from over. If anything, the next phase will prove even more important as leadership broadens and the market becomes more selective. I can’t think of a better team to take on this challenge. 

Outsized returns will come not from following the crowd, but from being positioned ahead of it. That requires more than information. It requires judgment, discipline, and the willingness to act before consensus fully forms. Previous Quarterly Top 15 reports identified Bloom, Lumentum and AAOI early in their cycles, and the same discipline that found those names is driving this report. 

Our earnings season officially kicks off on Wednesday – Let’s go!

Royston Roche and Damien Robbins, Equity Analysts at I/O Fund contributed to this analysis.

I/O Fund Members Get 40% off Discovery 

Discovery members recently received an analysis on a stock poised to benefit as Nvidia tackles the context memory bottleneck and extends KV cache memory with its new Inference Context Memory Storage platform. To subscribe to Discovery with 40% off, click here to email usclick here to email us or email premium@io-fund.compremium@io-fund.com and mention code DISCOVERY40DISCOVERY40 

I/O Fund Pro Members Get 30% Off Advanced Market Signals 

Unlock real-time trade alerts, access to the I/O Fund’s momentum stock list, and weekly webinars every Thursday at 4:30 p.m. ET. To join Advanced Market Signals with 30% off, click here to email usclick here to email us or email premium@io-fund.compremium@io-fund.com and mention code ADVANCED30ADVANCED30

Please note: The I/O Fund conducts research and draws conclusions for the Fund’s positions. We then share that information with our readers. This is not a guarantee of a stock’s performance. Please consult your personal financial advisor before buying any stock in the companies mentioned in this analysis.

Recommended Reading:

  • The I/O Fund’s Top 15 Stocks for Q1 2026
  • The I/O Fund’s Top 15 AI Stocks for Q4 2025
  • Micron Fiscal Q2: Record-Breaking Fundamentals
  • Nvidia Q4: Stellar Report; Stock Remains Range Bound
Posted in Broad Market Today, Market Updates, Pin ContentLeave a Comment on The I/O Fund’s Top 15 Stocks for Q2 2026

2026 Stock Market Outlook: Cycle Convergence & What’s Next

Posted on April 10, 2026June 30, 2026 by io-fund
2026 Stock Market Outlook: Cycle Convergence & What’s Next

In our last broad market update, the S&P 500 was trading near 6,850, grinding through its fifth consecutive month of going nowhere. I drew a clear line in the sand at the 6,780 level. This was where the bulls needed to hold to keep the broader uptrend intact heading into 2026. 

This level (SPX6780) remains of utmost importance for the bulls. If it breaks, then the period of volatility has already begun as we head toward 6500 – 6300 in the coming weeks. This will likely complete the first leg in a larger correction, as we mount a bounce that makes a lower high into later 2026.  

That level clearly broke, dropping the broad market over 400 points, and finally bottoming at 6,316 on March 30th. We are now staging a bounce, which our analysis suggests will likely fail to make new highs, as the period of volatility that we have been flagging since November takes accelerates. 

This should not be new to our readers. In our February 2026 report we pointed widening divergences across the Magnificent 7, deteriorating price action in non-tech sectors, and historically elevated bullish sentiment supported by record high margin debt. Each of these warning signs precedes periods of volatility, and all were present well before the index peaked on February 25th, 2026. 

Since then, the evidence has continued to build. The dominant cycles that best correlate with 2026 are all pointing lower, which is being confirmed by a growing number of markets and sectors breaking critical support globally. The current bounce will likely draw investors back in, while the weight of evidence suggests a more cautious stance. 

Our commitment is not to a single outcome; it is to follow the evidence wherever it leads. As of now, we are seeing the evidence suggest a multi-quarter topping process is finally starting to break lower, which should set up an excellent buying opportunity for those prepared. 

Why Broad Market Deterioration Points to Extended Volatility in 2026 

In our February report, we flagged that the S&P 500's push to new highs was not being confirmed by key markets beneath the surface. Most notably, the Magnificent 7, which collectively account for roughly 30% of the S&P 500's weighting, had already begun rolling over. This was substantiated by every single Mag 7 stock putting in a top between July and February, even as the index pushed to one final high on Feb 25th. 

This kind of divergence, where the index makes a new high while its most dominant components quietly deteriorate, is a classic warning sign of a market in the late stages of a bull run. 

Chart showing the S&P 500 index alongside Magnificent 7 stocks breaking down earlier, highlighting bearish divergences leading into the 2026 market correction.

Chart showing the S&P 500 index alongside Magnificent 7 stocks breaking down earlier, highlighting bearish divergences leading into the 2026 market correction. 

The weakness, however, was not confined to technology. Financials (big banks) had also put in a notable top in early January, completing a full 5-wave advance off the April 2025 low, and subsequently making their first series of lower lows since that uptrend began. This suggested that weakness that started in tech in July of 2025 was spreading.  

Daily chart of the Financial Select Sector SPDR ETF (XLF) showing a completed five‑wave advance, breakdown below key support, and early corrective structure heading into 2026

Daily chart of the Financial Select Sector SPDR ETF (XLF) showing a completed five‑wave advance, breakdown below key support, and early corrective structure heading into 2026. 

Since that report, the list of confirmed tops has only grown. Across multiple sectors and markets, we are seeing the same technical signature: a completed 5-wave advance off the 2025 lows, with the final 5th wave pushing to new highs on deteriorating volume and weakening momentum, followed by the first meaningful lower low since the uptrend began.  

Small caps tell the same story. The IWM completed its advance off the April 2025 low with a final push on fading volume and momentum. It has since printed its first lower low since the bull run began, a meaningful structural shift for a segment of the market that typically leads both up and down. 

Daily chart of the Russell 2000 ETF (IWM) showing a completed advance, failed breakout near resistance, and early corrective structure forming in 2026. 

Daily chart of the Russell 2000 ETF (IWM) showing a completed advance, failed breakout near resistance, and early corrective structure forming in 2026. 

Industrials have been a leading sector since the 2025 bottom. As you can see below, based on the above criteria, it is also confirming a period of weakness has likely begun. 

Daily chart of the Industrial Select Sector SPDR ETF (XLI) showing a completed five‑wave rally, rejection near Fibonacci resistance, and early corrective structure in 2026.

Daily chart of the Industrial Select Sector SPDR ETF (XLI) showing a completed five‑wave rally, rejection near Fibonacci resistance, and early corrective structure in 2026. 

What makes this picture more concerning is that this topping process is not a uniquely United States phenomenon, it is playing out globally. To name a few, The German DAX completed a 5-wave advance off its April 2025 low and has since recorded two consecutive lower lows.  

Daily chart of the German DAX Index showing a completed multi‑leg advance, break below support near 23,400, and early corrective structure forming in 2026.

Daily chart of the German DAX Index showing a completed multi‑leg advance, break below support near 23,400, and early corrective structure forming in 2026. 

The Canadian TSX traced the same pattern – a full 5-wave advance accompanied by weakening momentum, followed by a decisive shift in trend structure and its first lower low on elevated volume. 

Weekly chart of the S&P/TSX Composite Index showing a completed multi‑year advance, rejection near Fibonacci extension resistance, and early corrective structure forming in 2026.

Weekly chart of the S&P/TSX Composite Index showing a completed multi‑year advance, rejection near Fibonacci extension resistance, and early corrective structure forming in 2026. 

Taken together, the weight of this evidence points to two unsettling conclusions. First, the volatility we are currently experiencing is likely in its early stages, not a brief interruption of the bull market, but the beginning of a more sustained and complex corrective period.  

Second, and perhaps more importantly, this is a globally synchronized topping process. When markets around the world begin rolling over in unison, each completing the same technical structure, each showing the same deterioration in breadth and momentum, it signals that the forces driving the correction are not localized.  

This raises an important question: if this is the beginning of something larger, what is driving it, and how long could it last? 

To answer that, we turn to cycles. 

2026 Market Cycle Analysis: Gann’s 60-Year Great Cycle Meets the Presidential Cycle 

As we move into April, we now have a full quarter of price action to analyze. The pattern that has emerged is relatively unique, which helps narrow down which cycles best correlate with 2026's market behavior, so far.  

This year saw a top form within the first few weeks of the year, followed by a controlled yet choppy downtrend that bottomed into late March. The market is now staging a bounce. 

When we overlay this specific price pattern against historical cycles, two important time periods stand out as the strongest matches converging simultaneously in 2026: the 60-year cycle, which Gann himself called the Great Cycle and considered the most powerful of all his time periods, and the 4-year cycle, widely known as the Presidential Cycle.  

mid

The fact that both cycles are converging in the same window is not something that happens often. In Gann's framework, the more cycles that align simultaneously, the more powerful and significant the resulting turning point. This confluence adds meaningful weight to our view that 2026 is setting up to be a challenging year, but also that the low forming this year may ultimately represent another incredible buying opportunity. 

The 60-Year Cycle Great Cycle 

W.D. Gann is widely considered the master of market cycles. His work was largely built on the rhythmic repetition of the 60-year Great Cycle. He observed that markets, economies, and even geopolitical events tend to generally rhyme across 60-year intervals. His view was that human nature, collective psychology, and the underlying forces driving economic expansion and contraction repeat themselves on this grand cycle, making it one of the more reliable long-term roadmaps available. 

As you can see below, when we overlay the S&P 500's price trend from 60 years ago onto the current secular bull market, it shows a strong correlation to the general trend, and at times, a near-perfect correlation to specific price movements. 

Monthly chart of the S&P 500 overlaid with Gann’s 60‑year market cycle, illustrating historical cycle alignment and heightened volatility risk approaching 2026.

Monthly chart of the S&P 500 overlaid with Gann’s 60‑year market cycle, illustrating historical cycle alignment and heightened volatility risk approaching 2026. 

According to the 60-year cycle above, we should now be entering a period of heightened volatility. If we zoom into how this year is lining up with the 60-year cycle, we are seeing stark similarities, already.  

Daily S&P 500 chart comparing the 1966 market cycle with 2026, highlighting similarities under Gann’s 60‑year Great Cycle and key volatility windows.

Daily S&P 500 chart comparing the 1966 market cycle with 2026, highlighting similarities under Gann’s 60‑year Great Cycle and key volatility windows. 

The 4-Year Presidential Cycle 

Markets also tend to follow a well-documented 4-year rhythm driven by the political and economic policy cycle of a US president's term. What the data consistently shows is that the 2nd year of this cycle is the weakest of the four, characterized by policy uncertainty, elevated volatility, and below-average returns. 

Bar chart showing average S&P 500 returns by year of the four‑year U.S. Presidential Cycle from 1950 to the present, with Year Two delivering the weakest performance.

Bar chart showing average S&P 500 returns by year of the four‑year U.S. Presidential Cycle from 1950 to the present, with Year Two delivering the weakest performance. 

Within each 4-year cycle, there is always a significant low that tends to launch a multi-year uptrend. This low consistently falls within year 2. Since 1950, the 2nd year of a president's term has produced the cycle low 56% of the time — 9 out of 16 election cycles. The market only posts a positive return in year 2 about 53% of the time, making it the riskiest year for investors within the four year cycle.  

When we overlay the 4-year Presidential Cycle onto 2026's price action, the correlation to what we have seen so far is striking — a top in the early weeks of the year, followed by a controlled and choppy decline into late March, now setting up for a bounce into late April through early May. 

Daily S&P 500 chart comparing the 2026 market with the 2022 cycle under the four‑year Presidential Cycle, highlighting similar drawdown phases and volatility windows.

Daily S&P 500 chart comparing the 2026 market with the 2022 cycle under the four‑year Presidential Cycle, highlighting similar drawdown phases and volatility windows. 

The Composite Cycle Roadmap for 2026 Markets 

If we combine both dominant cycles into a composite, we get a general roadmap for the general trend in 2026.  

Daily S&P 500 chart illustrating the convergence of the 60‑year Gann cycle and the 4‑year Presidential Cycle in 2026, highlighting key volatility and timing windows.

Daily S&P 500 chart illustrating the convergence of the 60‑year Gann cycle and the 4‑year Presidential Cycle in 2026, highlighting key volatility and timing windows. 

What stands out is how closely the price behavior we have observed so far – a controlled, overlapping decline into late March, now transitioning into a bounce – mirrors what both cycles would have predicted. If accurate, this bounce will likely draw many investors back in, and it is the kind of move that tends to create false confidence before the next leg of volatility resumes. 

What makes 2026 particularly significant is that the 4-year Presidential Cycle low and Gann's 60-year Great Cycle are lining up at the same moment in time. In Gann's own words, it is at the simultaneous convergence of cycles, not any single one in isolation, where the most powerful and lasting market turning points are made.

Three Market Scenarios for 2026 — And What Would Trigger a Bullish Pivot 

The famous economist, John Maynard Keynes stated, “It is better to be roughly right, than precisely wrong.”  It is a sentiment that has been echoed by the world's great money managers across generations – the conviction to take a clear position, paired with the discipline to abandon it when the evidence demands otherwise. 

That principle guides the thesis presented in this report. The weight of evidence, from completed topping patterns across diverse global markets and multiple U.S. sectors, to the convergence of dominant market cycles, points to the volatility we are currently experiencing as the beginning of a more sustained corrective period, not the end of one. 

That said, markets do not always follow the most probable path. If the divergences we are tracking reverse and start making new highs, and/or if the cycles we are monitoring break their historical rhythm, we will update our analysis and pivot our stance accordingly.  

How this can translate into a clear pivot can be found in the NASDAQ-100 (QQQ). If this index breaks out to new high and closes the week over these highs, this will be a clear signal that the market is shrugging off these warnings and likely mounting a push higher.   

The NASDAQ-100, led by the Mag 7, have been leading this market down. It has been the weakest major index since the topping process began in late October. For this reason, if it can confirm a new high, and close over this high on a weekly basis, this will be the line in the sand that will warrant a pivot away from our defensive posturing. 

Intraday chart of the Invesco QQQ Trust showing a corrective decline, rebound attempt toward a critical pivot zone, and risk of a lower‑high failure in 2026.

Intraday chart of the Invesco QQQ Trust showing a corrective decline, rebound attempt toward a critical pivot zone, and risk of a lower‑high failure in 2026. 

When the facts change, we will change our mind. Until they do, we will continue to follow the evidence.  Right now, the evidence points clearly to a multi-quarter topping process finally breaking lower, which for the patient and prepared, should set up one of the better buying opportunities this cycle has to offer. 

How this looks on a larger time frame can be viewed below. Based on the price structure of the bull market off the 2022 low, two scenarios present themselves as the most probable paths forward. 

  • Scenario 1 (Blue) — Wave 4 Correction 

The current decline represents the early stages of a larger 4th wave correction. Under this scenario, the NASDAQ-100 finds its low in the $500 – $445 range, setting up a meaningful buying opportunity for a final 5th wave advance to new all-time highs in the coming year. This remains the primary count. 

  • Scenario 2 (Red) — Wave 5 Top 

What cannot be ignored is that all the necessary waves are already in place to complete the bull market pattern off the 2022 low. The overlapping swings and deep corrections throughout this advance are consistent with an ending diagonal pattern. Unfortunately, because the NASDAQ-100 is tracing an ending diagonal pattern, this determination cannot be made until we see a sizable drop and mount some type of bounce.  

  • Scenario 3 (Green) – One More Swing into the Fall 

Based on the weight of evidence, this is not my primary perspective. However, as stated above, the QQQs can close the week at all-time highs, this will become the primary perspective that we track. Here, the broad market will trend to new highs, likely on decelerating volume and momentum, completing a final 5th wave sometime into the Fall of 2026. 

Weekly chart of the Invesco QQQ Trust showing a completed multi‑year advance, potential Wave 4 correction, and key Fibonacci support levels into 2026.

Weekly chart of the Invesco QQQ Trust showing a completed multi‑year advance, potential Wave 4 correction, and key Fibonacci support levels into 2026. 

In conclusion, the evidence presented in this report did not emerge overnight. It accumulated gradually, across months and several markets, in the way that meaningful trend changes always do. From the Magnificent 7 rolling over well before the February peak, which has now spread to Financials, Industrials and Small Caps, to the synchronized topping patterns spreading across global markets, to the rare convergence of Gann's 60-year Great Cycle and the Presidential Cycle, the weight of evidence has been pointing in the same direction for some time.  

That does not mean the path forward will be a straight line lower. Markets rarely are. The current bounce was anticipated, and it will likely do what bounces in corrective markets are designed to do — restore confidence, draw investors back in, and set the stage for the next leg of volatility. That is the nature of the environment we are navigating. 

Our posture remains patient and defensive. Not because we are committed to a bearish outcome, but because the evidence has not yet given us reason to be otherwise. The line in the sand is clear. A weekly close at new all-time highs in the NASDAQ-100 changes the conversation. Until that signal arrives, the most probable path continues to favor a defensive posture.

Since our inception in May 2020, I/O Fund has delivered a cumulative return of 326%— if we were a hedge fund, we’d rank #1 and if we were a tech ETF or Mutual Fund, we’d rank #3 in the United States.     326%— if we were a hedge fund, we’d rank #1 and if we were a tech ETF or Mutual Fund, we’d rank #3 in the United States.    

Combining broad market analysis to buy at the lows has helped us achieve these results, including 20 entries in April of 2025 that saw up to 400% returns in one stock. To get our Top 15 AI stocks, real-time trade alerts, weekly webinars and deep-dive research from a proven team in AI and tech stocks, Sign up now.Top 15 AI stocks, real-time trade alerts, weekly webinars and deep-dive research from a proven team in AI and tech stocks, Sign up now.

Please note: The I/O Fund conducts research and draws conclusions for the Fund’s positions. We then share that information with our readers. This is not a guarantee of a stock’s performance. Please consult your personal financial advisor before buying any stock in the companies mentioned in this analysis.

Recommended Reading:

  • Arm Stock Could Win as Agentic AI Shifts the Bottleneck to CPUs
  • Nvidia Stock Prediction: The Path to a $20 Trillion Market Cap is Strengthening
  • “Tech Bubble” Warnings Cost Investors a 550% Nasdaq-100 Run
  • My Top 2026 Stock Pick for the AI Boom
Posted in Broad Market TodayLeave a Comment on 2026 Stock Market Outlook: Cycle Convergence & What’s Next

“Tech Bubble” Warnings Cost Investors a 550% Nasdaq-100 Run

Posted on March 6, 2026June 30, 2026 by io-fund
“Tech Bubble” Warnings Cost Investors a 550% Nasdaq-100 Run

Investors have been hearing “tech bubble” warnings for more than a decade — but instead of collapsing, the Nasdaq‑100 has gained 550%. If we look back ten years ago to 2015, headlines such as “Sell everything! 2016 will be a cataclysmic year” confronted investors with calls for an imminent recession. The bears made repeated claims that a “tech bubble” was about to burst with some of the world’s most prominent venture capitalists drawing parallels to the dot-com era. 

What followed tells a very different story with not only the Nasdaq-100 up 550% over a 10-year period but also high-flying stocks like Shopify returned as much as 5200% and Nvidia returned 22,000% over the same period. 

It’s true that capturing those gains does not come easy. Investors had to hold through five drawdowns that were greater than 20%, including two declines greater than 30%, while tuning out a constant stream of bearish commentary – often from reputable sources – proclaiming the long-awaited tech bubble has finally “popped.” Despite these strong convictions, the long-term trend remained intact. 

Below, I examine periods when normal market resets were mischaracterized as a bubble. I then discuss why today’s AI cycle does not share those characteristics before concluding with the technical signals we are monitoring to confirm that AI remains in a sustained uptrend. 

Timeline of Tech Bubble Talk: 

The idea of a “tech bubble” — now rebranded as an “AI bubble” — is not a unique prediction.   

  • 2015: Headlines warned that tech valuations were unsustainable, with calls to “sell everything” ahead of a widely anticipated 2016 recession. Particularly, there were concerns due to high valuation of Chinese tech stocks. “Chinese technology stocks do resemble the dot-com bubble,” Vincent Chan, the Hong Kong-based head of China research at Credit Suisse Group AG, said in an interview on April 2. “Given stocks fell 50 to 70 percent when that bubble burst in 2000, these small-cap Chinese shares may face big corrections when this one deflates. On the other hand, the US was also preparing to raise interest rates for the first time since the financial crisis of 2008.
  • In 2015, despite the warnings, broader U.S. markets proved more resilient than feared, with the Nasdaq-100 rising 8.4% in 2015. Even though these narratives continued in 2016, the Nasdaq-100 managed to close in green with a gain of 5.9% in 2016.   
  • In 2017, investors were once again worried about high valuations and the unwinding of quantitative easing. Despite all the concerns, the Nasdaq-100 rose 31.5% in 2017.   
  • In 2020, despite rapid earnings growth, with companies like Zoom growing 326%, tech stocks were labeled a bubble amid pandemic-driven volatility and policy uncertainty. “Everybody loves a party … but, inevitably, after a big party there’s a hangover,” the billionaire investor Stanley Druckenmiller said in a Squawk Box interview. “Right now, we’re in an absolute raging mania.”" Although tech would later reset, the most explosive move followed these bubble warnings. 
  • In 2022, rising rates and tightening financial conditions reignited claims that the tech bubble had finally burst and the Nasdaq-100 was down (33%) in 2022. However, tech stocks recovered in 2023, and the Nasdaq-100 rose 53.8% in 2023.  
  • In 2024, the narrative re-emerged once again—this time framed as an “AI bubble”—despite strong balance sheets, accelerating earnings, and durable long-term demand drivers. However, Nasdaq-100 rose 24.9% with Nvidia rising 171.2% in 2024. 
Line chart showing the NASDAQ‑100 index rising more than 550% from 2016 to 2026, with several pullbacks marked at −19%, −24%, −30%, −37%, and −25%. The chart includes annotated media headlines predicting tech bubbles at various points along the upward trend.

Chart showing the long‑term performance of the NASDAQ‑100 from 2013 to 2026, highlighting more than a 550% gain since the 2016 low. It marks periods of major market corrections—ranging from (19%) to (37%)—alongside media headlines predicting a tech bubble or market crash, underscoring the gap between short‑term market fears and long‑term NASDAQ growth. 

Supply Constraints Make a Widespread AI Bubble Unlikely 

Bubbles are typically defined by oversupply, yet many pockets of today’s market are the opposite – they are supply constrained.  

During the dot-com era, the market was flooded with far more e-commerce and internet sites than demand could support, largely because barriers to entry were low. AI is quite the opposite as it’s an expensive technology that has a very high barrier to entry and lacks democratization. The buildout is constrained across critical inputs, such as compute, memory, networking, power, and advanced packaging, which further raises the hurdle for new entrants and slows supply growth. 

mid

TSMC, the world’s largest contract chipmaker and critical supplier for AI logic chips, has stated that its advanced-node capacity is roughly three times short of what AI demand requires, even amid ongoing expansion efforts. This reflects a real gap between what customers want and what TSMC can physically produce.  

AI data centers and accelerators consume an outsized share of DRAM and HBM, driving a global memory shortage that is now described as unprecedented and likely to persist beyond 2026. Companies like Tesla and Apple have also signaled a shortage of DRAM. The shortage has also led to the price hikes, and the cost of one type of DRAM soared by 75% from December to January. 

Energy is another gating factor that makes an “oversupply” outcome unlikely anytime soon. In 2024, we highlighted Wells Fargo’s projection that AI power demand could surge 550% by 2026, rising from 8 TWh in 2024 to 52 TWh, before accelerating another 1,150% to 652 TWh by 2030 — an 8,050% increase versus the 2024 baseline. Under that framework, training drives the bulk of demand earlier in the cycle, while inference becomes a larger driver later in the decade. 

There is more data from IEA, which projects global data center electricity demand will more than doube from ~415 TWh in 2024 to ~945 TWh by 2030 in its base-case scenario. Under the agency’s AI “lift-off” scenario, demand reaches 1,250 TWh — a trajectory that more closely aligns with Wells Fargo’s more aggressive outlook. 

The message from management teams is consistent with these forecasts: Google CEO Sundar Pichai noted that Google has been “supply constrained” even as it ramps capacity, citing longer supply-chain time horizons. Meta CFO Susan Li echoed the same point, saying Meta remains capacity constrained and will “likely still be constrained through much of 2026” until additional capacity from its own facilities comes online. 

AI is Driving Significant Revenue and Profits 

The late 1990s was defined by pre-revenue companies with many dot-com darlings reporting a mere $10 million to $20 million in revenue. This fact alone has been the reason other so-called tech bubbles were rather quick corrections such as mobile, social media, cloud infrastructure, and now AI are all trends that drove significant revenue and profits for public companies.  

Our firm was early to point out that Meta was now second to Nvidia on AI revenue with its AI ads automation platform reaching a $60 billion run rate in 2025; three-and-a-half years from launch. launch. Similarly, we can look at OpenAI’s trajectory from $1 billion in revenue in 2023 to an estimated $20 billion annualized revenue in 2025 – which represents the steepest rise in technology history.  

When you compare a successful dot-com company, the profile is very different from what we see in AI stocks today. Amazon rose 3,320% from January 1995 to March 2020 yet the bottom-line was deep in the red with a negative profit margin of (56%).  Meanwhile, a few AI companies like AppLovin, TSMC, and Reddit have reported net profit margins of 66%, 48%, and 35%, respectively in their recent Q4 results; a stark contrast to one of the dotcom bubble’s best stocks.  

Notably, prices across leading AI companies are not broadly untethered from fundamentals. In fact, a handful of companies are fundamentally cheaper now than they were at the first sight of this AI-driven boom in early 2023. For example, Nvidia currently trades at 21.7x forward earnings, and is lower than the multiple it traded the day prior to its May 2023 Hopper-driven blowout earnings report, despite shares rising 475% over the same period. 

Line chart showing NVIDIA’s forward price‑to‑earnings (P/E) ratio from mid‑2023 to early 2026, with values fluctuating between roughly 20 and 50.

Chart showing the forward price‑to‑earnings (P/E) ratio of NVIDIA (NVDA) from 2023 to 2026, illustrating how the valuation has fluctuated between approximately 20 and 50 over the period. Source: YChartsYCharts

Most importantly, those funding AI are highly profitable tech companies compared to venture capitalists who pushed unprofitable companies public for a quick exit during the dotcom bubble. Big tech is not looking for a quick exit and on track to spend $655 billion in 2026, up 60% YoY. 

AI Is Early Cycle; Not Late Cycle 

Cycle timing is arguably the most critical part of being a tech investor. Enter too early, with autonomous vehicles being a good example, and the opportunity cost can be very high as capital sits idle while adoption lags. Enter too late, like chasing the dot-com boom at the peak, and you risk buying the top with little hope for a near-term recovery. Equally as painful is closing a promising stock too early in the cycle, and seeing it rise sharply in the years that follow.  

Because cycle timing is emotionally taxing, investors often equate sharp downside volatility with “bubble” conditions—yet the two are not the same. 

The smartphone cycle was one of the most powerful product cycles in modern history. Apple launched its first iPhone in June 2007, just four months before the market topped in October. When the market top occurred, smartphone adoption was still in its nascent stages, leaving little opportunity for bubble dynamics to form; exiting the GFC, smartphone adoption proved to be robust, with TTM growth of 63% from August 2008 to August 2009, while also marking one of the fastest 10-quarter adoption curves in consumer tech history. Momentum on the app side was explosive with the App Store reaching 1 billion paid and unpaid downloads within nine months.   

Despite the rapid adoption post-iPhone launch, this did not insulate Apple from realizing several meaningful periods of volatility, including a 61% drawdown shortly after that launch in the 2008 bear market. Over the next decade, Apple again faced two major drawdowns of 45% and 34%; however, shares ended this decade more than 724% higher, highlighting that extreme volatility does not always mean it is a bubble. 

Line chart showing Apple’s stock performance from 2002 to 2026, highlighting a long‑term gain of more than 6,700%. The chart marks major drawdowns ranging from 32% to 61% and notes the release of the first iPhone during the 2007 period, illustrating the long-term mobile technology trend.

Chart illustrating Apple’s long-term stock performance from 2002 to 2026, showing a cumulative gain of more than 6,700% driven by the rise of mobile technology. Key drawdowns ranging from 32% to 61% are highlighted throughout the trend, including the significant decline around the time the first iPhone was released. Despite multiple large corrections, Apple’s overall trajectory reflects the strength and durability of the mobile technology mega‑trend.

Salesforce is another stocks that saw shares enter a multi-month drawdown of 73% in late 2008, though shares quickly returned to new highs in just 16 months and went on to rally 131% in the time it took the broader market to exit from the bear market. This is because Salesforce was still witnessing rapid revenue growth early in its adoption curve – revenues more than doubled to over $1 billion in the two years from 2007 to 2009, and by 2013, revenue had surpassed $3 billion. 

Dual-line chart comparing the S&P 500 and Salesforce from 2007 to 2014. The S&P 500 shows a 63% decline during the financial crisis and recovers over 4.1 years, while Salesforce drops 73% and later rises more than 131% from its low within 16 months.

Chart comparing the performance of the S&P 500 and Salesforce (CRM) during the 2007 market peak, the 2008–2009 financial crisis, and the recovery period through 2014. The S&P 500 experienced a 63% drawdown and required roughly 4.1 years to return to previous lows, while Salesforce declined 73% but rebounded far more quickly—surging more than 131%. The comparison highlights the significant difference between broad‑market recovery timelines and the faster rebound potential of high‑growth technology stocks.

Looking back to a similar time period, AWS is an excellent example of the build phase versus the yield phase to where it required extensive upfront capital that later became fast growing revenue. AWS revenue grew by 24% YoY in Q4, accelerating 4 percentage points from 20% growth in the previous quarter and was the fastest growth in the last 13 quarters.  

Cloud Software Nearing the End of its Cycle 

The cloud category has treated investors quite well with recurring revenue, resiliency during Covid, and some of the strongest examples of product-market fit available on the public markets over the past ten to fifteen years. However, I made the argument three years ago that cloud software was in the later innings of its cycle, as many best-of-breed companies saw growth fall off a cliff in 2022 and 2023.  

We had pointed out in our free analysis in late 2022, Slowing Growth In Cloud Stocks: When Will We Hit A Bottom, that nearly all cloud companies were reporting a notable, sequential slowdown between Q3 to Q4. These Q4 2022 guides marked a ‘historic slowdown’ for the once-resilient category, as Q4 is typically the strongest seasonal quarter for the industry. Snowflake was a prime example of this, as it had guided for 3% QoQ growth in Q4 2022, what would mark a 12 point decline from 15% QoQ the year prior. 

We followed up in March 2023, asserting in the analysis, Slowdown In Cloud Stocks On Thin Ice Following Q1 Guides, that hyperscalers were seeing growth rates plummet. AWS reported Q4 2022 growth of 20%, half of the 40% reported in Q4 2021 while guiding for Q1 2023 growth in the mid-teens; Azure saw a similar nearly 20 point deceleration from 49% in the March 2021 quarter to 30-31% guided for March 2022.  

These decelerations are clearly visible looking at some of the best-of-breed names over the last five years. Snowflake reported revenue growth north of 100% in Q1 2022, yet exited 2023 seventy points slower at 31% YoY; Twilio decelerated from 67% to the low single-digits.  

Line chart comparing quarterly year‑over‑year revenue growth for Snowflake, Twilio, MongoDB, SentinelOne, and CrowdStrike from 2021 to 2026. All companies show declining growth rates over time, with Snowflake at 30.12%, SentinelOne at 22.91%, CrowdStrike at 22.18%, MongoDB at 18.69%, and Twilio at 14.32% in early 2026.

Chart comparing quarterly year‑over‑year revenue growth for five major high‑growth software companies—Snowflake, Twilio, MongoDB, SentinelOne, and CrowdStrike—from 2021 through early 2026. The visualization shows a broad deceleration in revenue growth across the software sector, with each company gradually trending downward from higher peak growth rates recorded in 2021–2022. By 2026, Snowflake leads the group with 30.12% YoY growth, followed by SentinelOne at 22.91%, CrowdStrike at 22.18%, MongoDB at 18.69%, and Twilio at 14.32%. Source: YChartsYCharts

Simply put, the hypergrowth cloud era from 2015 through 2021 has passed, with sharp growth deceleration as rates rose leading to multiple compression. Those who think AI is disrupting cloud software are not accounting for the fact that cloud software was as the end of its cycle and ripe for both consolidation and disruption (a terrible place for investors to be positioned) – which is why I went to great lengths to make sure my premium research members knew to steer clear of cloud software three years ago.  

There is also more evidence that cloud is now late cycle, with the market being extremely saturated with more than 30,800 SaaS companies worldwide, each competing with one another for wallet share as production differentiation narrows. Market saturation preceded the disruptive fears from AI-based solutions automating workflows.

Today, the same narrative has resurfaced around AI. This analysis breaks down why the AI market is fundamentally different from past bubbles, why corrections have been misinterpreted, and what indicators we’re watching to confirm the trend remains intact. 

There Will Be a Correction; It Won’t Be a Bubble

While we do not believe AI is a classic bubble, that doesn’t mean we won’t see meaningful selloffs that create attractive buying opportunities. In fact, warning signs have been building since October 2025 that we may be approaching one of these pullbacks. One of the more concerning signals is that the Magnificent 7—what I consider the generals of this market—appear to have topped well before the S&P 500. 

Since November 2021, periods in which the equal-weight Mag 7 index fails to confirm new highs in the S&P 500 have been a reliable signal of a weakening market environment. A similar divergence is developing today, and until it resolves to the upside, it remains a meaningful warning for the durability of the broader uptrend. 

Chart comparing the S&P 500 (top, light blue line) with the Equal Weight Mega‑Cap 7 index (middle, dark line) from 2021 to 2026. Several shaded red regions mark periods of market weakness. A lower panel shows a small indicator line with green and red vertical markers.

This chart compares the performance of the S&P 500 with an equal‑weight index of the “Mega‑Cap 7” from 2021 through 2026. The upper panel shows the S&P 500 trending higher with periodic pullbacks highlighted by red‑shaded regions.

Looking under the hood, all 7 of the Mag-7 are currently making lower highs while the S&P 500 made higher highs. For reference, this is roughly 32% of the S&P 500’s weight that is preventing the broader market from moving higher.  

Multi‑panel chart showing the S&P 500 at the top and individual stock price movements for MSFT, META, NVDA, AMZN, AAPL, TSLA, and GOOGL beneath it from mid‑2025 to early 2026. Red arrows highlight notable reaction points for each stock on specific dates.

Chart comparing the performance of the S&P 500 with seven major mega‑cap technology stocks—Microsoft, Meta, Nvidia, Amazon, Apple, Tesla, and Alphabet—between mid‑2025 and early 2026. Each stock is displayed on its own horizontal price panel, while the S&P 500 appears at the top as the market benchmark. Red arrows highlight key reaction points, likely tied to earnings releases or major announcements, where individual stock prices either spike or decline.

Also, before volatility started picking up, we noted in prior reports, both retail and professional investor sentiment are elevated to historically concerning levels, suggesting an environment where risk is being discounted and investors behave as if there is no price too high. 

The AAII weekly survey (retail sentiment and positioning) and the NAAIM weekly survey (professional manager exposure) are at levels that exceed the average for most major tops. Since late October—around when several markets began topping out—NAAIM readings have ranged between the 78th and 96th percentile of all bullish readings, suggesting managers have been heavily allocated to equities for more than three months, and maintain this exposure.  

When compared to levels seen before prior market tops, these readings suggest sentiment and positioning are among the more extreme observations on record. 

Multi‑panel chart showing the S&P 500 at the top and individual stock price movements for MSFT, META, NVDA, AMZN, AAPL, TSLA, and GOOGL beneath it from mid‑2025 to early 2026. Red arrows highlight notable reaction points for each stock on specific dates.

S&P 500 Sentiment Comparison Table: Identifying NAAIM and AAII sentiment readings at major S&P 500 market tops, showing that current levels—high stock exposure, elevated bullish sentiment, low cash, and a strong bullbear spread—closely match historical conditions seen at previous peaks.  bear spread—closely match historical conditions seen at 

In other words, both retail and professional investors appear to expect higher prices and have expressed that view through high equity exposure. What is more concerning is that margin debt in the U.S. is at record highs, surpassing the 2021 peak.

Dual‑line chart showing the S&P 500 on the upper panel and broker‑dealer margin account levels on the lower panel from 1997 to 2025. Vertical red dashed lines mark prior peaks in margin debt that coincided with major market tops. The latest circle highlights a sharp rise in margin balances.

S&P 500 (SPX) margin debt chart highlighting how rising margin debt at brokerdealers has historically aligned with major S&P 500 peaks, with current margin levels approaching prior extremes that preceded significant market tops.  

These conditions often precede periods of volatility. However, late-cycle behavior does not automatically imply that a bubble is forming. Since 1980, only a small number of major market peaks coincided with the bursting of true systemic bubbles—most notably technology in 2000 and housing and credit in 2007. Many other peaks resolved into corrections and recoveries within longer secular bull markets. 

In terms of where this volatility could take us, the below scenarios are the most probable based on the current price action: 

  • Green – If we can continue to bounce through SPX 6869, 6901 and finally 6952.50, then we will likely push toward the 7200 range in the coming weeks. This will complete the final 5th wave in a very extended uptrend that started off the April low in 2025. If this happens, we will look for more stocks and markets to not make new highs with the S&P 500 to further confirm we are setting up for a period of volatility.
  • Red – In our last broad market article we outlined the importance of the 6780 – 7720 region in SPX. So far, these levels have held and it is where the market staged a bounce.

    These same levels remain of utmost importance for the bulls. If they break, then the period of volatility has already begun as we head toward 6500 – 6300 in the coming weeks. This will likely complete the first leg in a larger correction, as we mount a bounce that makes a lower high into later 2026. 

A line chart showing the NASDAQ‑100 index rising more than 550% from 2016 to 2026, with several pullbacks marked at −19%, −24%, −30%, −37%, and −25%. The chart includes annotated media headlines predicting tech bubbles at various points along the upward trend.

Chart showing the S&P 500 through detailed Elliott Wave analysis, highlighting major support and resistance zones, projected wave counts ((A), (B), (C), ①–④), and key Fibonacci‑based levels. Green bands mark overhead resistance and upside targets, while red bands outline a “danger zone” that could signal deeper downside if broken. Two shaded timing windows identify potential reversal periods. The chart emphasizes the market’s attempt to regain upper resistance after a corrective low, offering traders a clear view of breakout levels, downside risks, and the broader wave structure guiding the next move in the index.

Conclusion: 

AI will almost certainly deliver more volatility, and investors should expect meaningful selloffs that create buying opportunities. But volatility is not proof of a classic bubble. The dot-com era was defined by oversupply and fragile fundamentals; today’s AI buildout is being led by the world’s strongest operators, backed by real revenues and profits, and constrained by hard limits in compute, memory, networking, and power. 

The more important question isn’t whether we’ll see a pullback — it’s where we are in the cycle. AI is still transitioning from the training phase into the inference phase, where monetization will accelerate and the “capex with no revenue” narrative will begins to fade. In other words, the loudest bubble debates are arriving before the most important revenue engine fully turns on. 

We’ll continue to watch the same signals that matter in every tech cycle: whether fundamentals keep compounding, whether supply constraints remain binding, and whether the market’s leadership confirms a durable uptrend. If those conditions hold, then “it’s a bubble” may once again prove to be the most expensive words in tech for those sitting on the sidelines. 

Since our inception in May 2020, I/O Fund has delivered a cumulative return of 326%— if we were a hedge fund, we’d rank #1 and if we were a tech ETF or Mutual Fund, we’d rank #3 in the United States. 326%— if we were a hedge fund, we’d rank #1 and if we were a tech ETF or Mutual Fund, we’d rank #3 in the United States.   

Being early to many lesser-known AI winners helped us to achieve these results. To get our Top 15 AI stocks, real-time trade alerts, weekly webinars and deep-dive research from a proven team in AI and tech stocks, Sign up now.Top 15 AI stocks, real-time trade alerts, weekly webinars and deep-dive research from a proven team in AI and tech stocks, Sign up now.

Please note: The I/O Fund conducts research and draws conclusions for the Fund’s positions. We then share that information with our readers. This is not a guarantee of a stock’s performance. Please consult your personal financial advisor before buying any stock in the companies mentioned in this analysis.

Recommended Reading:

  • My Top 2026 Stock Pick for the AI Boom
  • I/O Fund Jumps to 326% Cumulative Return, Ranking Among Wall Street’s Best
  • Bitcoin After the Cycle Peak: What Comes Next and How We’re Positioning
  • S&P 500 Outlook 2026: Rising Volatility Risk and Key Support Levels
Posted in Broad Market TodayLeave a Comment on “Tech Bubble” Warnings Cost Investors a 550% Nasdaq-100 Run

S&P 500 Outlook 2026: Rising Volatility Risk and Key Support Levels

Posted on February 5, 2026June 30, 2026 by io-fund
S&P 500 Outlook 2026: Rising Volatility Risk and Key Support Levels

The performance of the S&P 500 in 2025 was a rare anomaly in market history. We witnessed a technical bear market that lasted a mere two months, followed by an aggressive, nearly vertical recovery. Within six months of the February 2025 top, the index was trading double digits over the high—a feat seen only twice in 125 years (1980 and 1999).  

Interestingly, both prior periods align with key market cycles—the 45-year cycle (1980) and the 26-year cycle (1999), which we covered in detail in our last market update, Market Cycles, Not Headlines: What History Says About the 2025 Rally and What Comes Next. The similarities between today and these cycles were too close to ignore and helped keep us aligned with the prevailing trend through most of 2025’s recovery and into year-end. 

“The 45-year and 26-year cycles appear to be the prevailing forces. As long as the SPX holds between 6,552.50 and 6,345 on any near-term weakness, the market is likely to continue tracking these patterns, both of which point toward the potential for continued strength into year-end.”  

Now that we have completed the first month of 2026, nearly every major cycle we track, including the predominant one we are following, is suggesting a period of volatility ahead.  

This is further supported by clear and concerning weakness across several major markets, including the Mag 7 Index, Bitcoin, High Beta Growth, and even Financials. Like dominos, we are seeing these supporting markets top out earlier, which can serve as a warning for the broader market. This is also occurring alongside extreme bullish sentiment by retail and institutional investors, who appear heavily allocated to equities by any historical measure. 

Although my base case is that October marked the start of a multi-month topping process that is still playing out, we always have a backup plan at the I/O Fund given we champion risk management (we don’t blindly rely on predictions). Below, I discuss what you need to know about the broad market and how it’s informing a top-performing tech portfolio as we enter 2026 at all-time highs

Under the Hood of the Rally: Divergences in the Mag 7, High Beta, Bitcoin, and XLF 

Markets, sectors, and stocks do not move in unison, which can provide advanced warning of a trend change. This phenomenon is known as divergence, and it is a key element of technical analysis as well as an integral part of our risk assessment process. 

For example, we highlighted notable divergences in real time around the October 2022 low. These signals suggested a low was forming and could be durable: 

“We are seeing multiple key sectors within the U.S. not follow the S&P 500 down to a new low last week. Transportation stocks, High Beta and Small Caps have been leading the markets since 2021, and last week, when the S&P 500 made a new low, these risk-on markets made a new high. These types of divergences tend to signal a trend change is brewing…. I do believe many stocks and some markets have bottomed.” 

DJT chart with Transportation stocks, High Beta, and Small Caps

S&P 500 (SPX) technical analysis chart highlighting a divergence between the S&P 500 trending lower while high‑beta stocks, small caps, and transports trend higher—signaling improving market breadth beneath headline index weakness. 

Magnificent 7 (Mag 7) 

The Magnificent 7 have been the current bull market leaders, helping drive the recovery out of the 2022 bear market and often providing early signals of broader market shifts. We discussed this in our broad market article, The Magnificent 7 Are Falling Like Dominos; Only 3 Remain, which was one of the reasons we positioned more defensively into early 2025.

mid

Since November 2021, when the equal-weight Mag 7 Index does not confirm a new high in the S&P 500, it has been a reliable signal of a weakening market environment. A similar divergence is occurring today and, until it resolves to the upside, it remains a meaningful warning for the durability of the broader uptrend.

Technical analysis chart comparing the S&P 500 (SPX) with the equal-weight Mag 7 index, showing repeated periods of market stress highlighted by shaded zones where mega-cap stocks lag broader market strength.

S&P 500 (SPX) technical analysis chart comparing the S&P 500 with the equal‑weight Mag 7 index, showing repeated periods of market stress highlighted by shaded zones where mega‑caps lag broader market strength.

Looking under the hood, only 1 stock out of the Mag 7 is pushing to new highs alongside the S&P 500—Google. 

Technical analysis chart of the S&P 500 (SPX) showing that among the Magnificent 7 tech stocks, only Google is reaching new highs in line with the S&P 500, while Microsoft, Nvidia, Meta, Amazon, Apple, and Tesla lag, highlighting market divergence and weakening breadth among top tech leaders.

S&P 500 (SPX) technical analysis chart showing that among the Magnificent 7 stocks, only Google is reaching new highs in line with the S&P 500, while Microsoft, Nvidia, Meta, Amazon, Apple, and Tesla all lag. This highlights market divergence and weakening breadth within top tech leaders. 

Microsoft, Nvidia, Meta, and Amazon topped between October and November 3 of 2025. Apple topped in early December, while Tesla topped in late December. On average, the six laggards are more than 15% below their all-time highs, and collectively they account for more than 28% of the S&P 500’s weighting. 

However, it’s not just the Mag 7 signaling potential weakness. 

High Beta Growth (ARKK) 

High beta growth stocks tend to perform well in a specific environment – economic growth is accelerating while inflation is decelerating. In this environment, revenue growth tends to be the driving force behind investor psychology, while ignoring other line items within a company’s fundamentals.   

These riskier stocks have been leading the market off the April low, until topping in early October, as it remains comfortably below all-time highs. The bounce off the late November low did not resemble a clean continuation of the uptrend, which is being confirmed with a drop below $73.50. It is likely ARKK (high beta proxy) will provide final confirmation with a bounce that will make a lower high.

ARKK Innovation ETF technical analysis chart showing a completed five-wave advance followed by an A-B-C corrective decline, with weakening volume and momentum signaling risk of a deeper pullback toward Fibonacci support levels.

ARKK Innovation ETF technical analysis chart showing a completed five‑wave advance followed by an A‑B‑C corrective decline, with weakening volume and momentum signaling risk of a deeper pullback toward Fibonacci support levels.  

Bitcoin (BTCUSD) 

Bitcoin is a risk asset that tends to be sensitive to global liquidity, which we have extensively discussed in prior articles, including I/O Fund Called the Bitcoin Selloff: What Liquidity & DXY Predict Next. 

A simplified way to think about this correlation is that the ease one can access credit with cheap collateral, the more money is left over to buy risk assets, like bitcoin. Since mid-2025, we have seen liquidity trend lower, which historically affects markets around the margins – i.e., crypto and high beta equities. This was one of the reasons we exited roughly 90% of our Bitcoin exposure at an average cost basis of $105,017. 

More concerning, Bitcoin appears to have formed a secular top based on the pattern traced off the 2022 low.

Technical analysis chart of Bitcoin (BTCUSD) showing a completed five-wave rally followed by an A-B-C corrective structure, with weakening volume and a persistent RSI downtrend suggesting risk of a deeper pullback toward key Fibonacci support zones.

Bitcoin (BTCUSD) technical analysis chart showing a completed five‑wave rally followed by a corrective A‑B‑C structure, with weakening volume and persistent RSI downtrend suggesting risk of a deeper pullback toward key Fibonacci support zones.  

Not only does a completed five-wave pattern appear to have topped in late October, but Bitcoin’s internals have shifted into a less constructive posture. Note how volume expanded with price from the 2022 low into the late-2024 high. During that period, rallies were generally accompanied by rising volume. Also, RSI tended to find support around the 33.5 region on dips—often referred to as a bull-market support zone. 

Since the last advance into 2025, volume decelerated as price increased and then expanded as price declined. Buyers appeared to fade and sellers became more aggressive, shifting supply/demand dynamics. This was reinforced by a break in RSI support and an inability to regain the prior trend line. These are the types of signals we often see early in trend transitions and do not bode well for crypto—and potentially other risk assets—in the coming months. 

This also is not the first time Bitcoin weakened materially while the broad market continued higher. The last time we saw this was late 2021.

Comparative chart showing Bitcoin (BTC) versus the S&P 500 (SPX), highlighting Bitcoin’s sharp drawdowns of roughly 40% during prior risk-off periods while the S&P 500 remained steadier, illustrating repeated cycles where Bitcoin enters deep corrections while equities remain more resilient.

Comparative chart of Bitcoin (BTC) vs. S&P 500 (SPX) performance showing Bitcoin’s sharp drawdowns of roughly 40% during prior risk‑off periods with the S&P 500’s steadier performance, highlighting repeated cycles where Bitcoin enters deep corrections while equities remain more resilient.  

Bitcoin topped nearly two months before the S&P 500 and dropped over 40% before the S&P 500 followed. Today, Bitcoin topped roughly three months before the S&P 500 and has also dropped over 40% while the broad market continues its advance. 

Financials (XLF) 

It’s not just risk-on sectors showing stress, either. Financials, next to Technology, are one of the most important sectors in U.S. (and global) markets. It has also been a leading sector off the April 2025 low until recently. In fact, the chart suggests a top may be forming in XLF.

Technical analysis chart of the XLF Financials ETF showing a completed five-wave advance into major resistance, followed by weakening volume and bearish momentum divergence, signaling risk of a corrective pullback toward lower trend-channel support.

XLF Financials ETF technical analysis chart showing a completed five‑wave advance into major resistance, followed by weakening volume and bearish momentum divergence—signaling risk of a corrective pullback toward lower trend‑channel support. 

Note the clear five-wave structure off the April low. Price went vertical in April–May as volume and momentum expanded (often consistent with a third wave). A period of congestion from September through November 2025 followed (often consistent with a fourth wave). The final push higher into early January appeared to occur with decelerating volume and momentum (key characteristics that define the psychology of the final 5th wave). 

Finally, the drop from the January 2026 high is deeper than what is typical in a healthy, ongoing uptrend. Taken together, the odds that financials have entered a period of weakness are elevated.

Contrarian Investing: How AAII and NAAIM Surveys Signal an S&P 500 Reversal  

Bull markets end when there are no buyers left—when everyone who wants to buy has already bought, leaving only one direction for markets to go. For that reason, it is worth tracking what both professional money managers and retail investors are doing with their money. 

For this, we use the AAII weekly survey (retail sentiment and positioning) and the NAAIM weekly survey (professional manager exposure). The model below ranks each weekly reading as a percentile relative to the history of the surveys. The higher the percentile, the more bullish the reading.

Sentiment table showing the AAII Bullish-minus-Bearish spread and NAAIM Exposure Index for 2026, highlighting elevated stock exposure and strong bullish sentiment through late 2025 into early 2026, with persistently low cash levels and declining bearish sentiment indicating increasingly crowded optimism.

Sentiment table of AAII Bullish-minus-Bearish spread and NAAIM Exposure Index for 2026 highlighting elevated stock exposure and strong bullish sentiment through late 2025 into early 2026, with persistent low cash levels and declining bearish sentiment signaling increasingly crowded optimism. 

Since late October—around when several markets began topping out—NAAIM readings have ranged between the 78th and 96th percentile of all bullish readings, suggesting managers have been heavily allocated to equities for more than three months, and maintain this exposure. The AAII readings also suggest retail investors have been positioned heavily in stocks, with relatively little cash.

When compared to levels seen before prior market tops, these readings suggest sentiment and positioning are among the more extreme observations on record.

Sentiment comparison table showing NAAIM and AAII readings at major S&P 500 market tops, illustrating that current levels—high stock exposure, elevated bullish sentiment, low cash, and a strong bull-bear spread—closely match historical conditions seen at previous peaks.

S&P 500 Sentiment Comparison Table: Identifying NAAIM and AAII sentiment readings at major S&P 500 market tops, showing that current levels—high stock exposure, elevated bullish sentiment, low cash, and a strong bull‑bear spread—closely match historical conditions seen at previous peaks.  

In other words, both retail and professional investors appear to expect higher prices and have expressed that view through high equity exposure. What is more concerning is that margin debt in the U.S. is at record highs, surpassing the 2021 peak.

Chart of S&P 500 (SPX) margin debt highlighting how rising margin debt at broker-dealers has historically aligned with major S&P 500 peaks, with current levels approaching prior extremes that preceded significant market tops.

S&P 500 (SPX) margin debt chart highlighting how rising margin debt at broker‑dealers has historically aligned with major S&P 500 peaks, with current margin levels approaching prior extremes that preceded significant market tops.  

This section is what defines contrarian investing. Investing in public markets is a zero-sum game, and in order to keep pushing higher, new buyers have to be found at higher prices. Once everyone is all in, it increases the risk of a reversal, which is needed to reset sentiment for the next leg higher.

Market Cycles & Liquidity: Why Gann’s 26-Year Rhythm Forecasts 2026 Volatility 

Decades of research suggests that market movements often unfold in rhythmic, repeating patterns influenced by human psychology and broader market structure. These cycles imply that many of the same behavioral forces that shaped prior bull and bear markets can continue to influence markets today, while offering a general roadmap of what is to come. 

W.D. Gann, known for his work on market cycles, identified several recurring cycles that often appear to correlate with major market movements. The 45-year cycle, which aligns with the 1980 period, and the 26-year cycle, which aligns with the 1999 period, are two that have historically exerted influence on broader market trends. The fact that the only two comparable periods in 125 years that resemble the anomalous year we had in 2025 also correspond to major cycles Gann discussed makes these comparisons noteworthy. 

In 1980, the market dropped just over 20% in less than two months, followed by an aggressive 50% move off the low that lasted roughly nine months. In 1998, the market also dropped just over 20% in less than two months, followed by a 53% rally off the low that lasted roughly ten months. Today, after another 20% drop over roughly two months to start 2025, we are now in the 10th month of an aggressive rally that is ~45% off the April low. 

Because the current trend has moved into its 10th month, it appears to be tracking the 26-year cycle more closely. That cycle suggests a continuation of the broad market uptrend into late February, followed by a notable correction.

Technical analysis chart of the S&P 500 (SPX) comparing 2026 price action to the 1999 26-year market cycle, highlighting a February 2026 volatility window.

S&P 500 (SPX) technical analysis chart comparing the 2026 price action to the 1999 26-year market cycle, highlighting a February 2026 volatility window.  

Furthermore, if we create a composite of the major cycles, it suggests a choppy push higher into late March, followed by a period of volatility.

Technical forecast chart of the S&P 500 (SPX) showing a composite of major market cycles—60, 52, 49, 45, 30, 26, 20, and 15-year cycles—projected into 2026, highlighting a potential market peak in March followed by a sharp downside trend into late 2026.

Technical forecast chart for S&P 500 (SPX) showing the composite of major market cycles—60, 52, 49, 45, 30, 26, 20, and 15‑year cycles—projected into 2026, highlighting a potential market peak in March followed by a sharp downside trend into late 2026.  

Interestingly, across the major cycles that tend to influence market movements, all of them suggest an elevated probability of volatility in Q2/Q3, and only 3 of 8 suggest the year finishes higher. We do not know which cycles will correlate with the current trend. In 2022–2025 it was the 60-year cycle, and from 2025 through today it has been the 26-year cycle. However, the probabilities support expecting a potential period of volatility beginning in Q1.

Why Markets Can Still Grind Higher: Key Support Levels and Sector Rotation 

The primary reason the market can continue to grind higher into Q1 is that no major support level has broken yet. Even with the warnings noted above, the upward drift can persist until key levels fail.  

The reason for this is that Markets tend to move within established patterns, and the further an advance extends, the fewer bullish structures remain available to sustain it. For the current patterns to continue, specific support levels must hold. If those levels break, the number of viable upside paths narrows materially, increasing the probability of a larger drawdown. 

While the S&P 500 pattern still has room for another swing higher, it is unlikely that this very extended pattern can persist deep into 2026 without some type of reset. We appear to be tracing the final swings in an extended fifth wave.

Elliott Wave chart of the S&P 500 (SPX) for 2026, highlighting a potential Elliott Wave structure with support tests near the 100% retracement zone and bullish upside targets toward 7,300–7,900, indicating key inflection points for the next trend move.

S&P 500 (SPX) Elliott Wave chart for 2026 highlighting a potential Elliott Wave structure with support tests near the 100% retracement zone and bullish upside targets toward 7,300–7,900, highlighting key inflection points for the next trend move.  

As long as further weakness holds above 6,780–6,720, the pattern appears incomplete and points toward 7,132–7,375 in the coming weeks.

This is supported by Semiconductors (SMH), one of the most important markets in this bull cycle, which also appears to be tracing an incomplete uptrend. As long as any additional weakness holds above $383–$367, SMH likely needs at least one more swing higher in the coming weeks.

Technical analysis chart of the SMH Semiconductor ETF highlighting a Wave IV corrective pullback to the $383–$358 support zone and a projected Wave V breakout toward Fibonacci targets of $440–$513.

SMH Semiconductor ETF technical analysis chart highlighting a Wave (iv) corrective pullback to the $383–$358 support zone and a projected Wave (v) breakout toward Fibonacci targets of $440–$513.  

Another reason we could see the market extend is sector rotation. In early 2025, risk-on sectors such as Tech, High Beta, and Transports underperformed more defensive areas. We are not seeing that today. 

In fact, since the October 2025 high, we have seen a rotation from a tech-led risk-on regime to a broader risk-on participation. 

Market leadership performance table from October 2025 to February 2026 showing Google, Gold, Biotech, Energy, and Materials leading gains, while high-beta stocks, Nvidia, Tesla, Meta, and Microsoft lag sharply, highlighting a shift toward defensive and reflation sectors.

Market leadership performance table from Oct 2025 to Feb 2026 showing Google, Gold, Biotech, Energy, and materials leading gains, while high‑beta stocks, Nvidia, Tesla, Meta, and Microsoft lag sharply, highlighting a shift toward defensive and reflation sectors.  

Lagging groups such as Consumer Discretionary, Small Caps, Transports, Retail, and Industrials have rotated higher as High Beta and much of the Mag 7 have lagged. For now, this suggests broader risk participation, which is constructive. Until we see support levels break in major indexes and an orderly (or disorderly) rotation into defensives, we could see the market grind higher into February/March.

Conclusion 

In conclusion, the major market cycles we track suggest an elevated probability of volatility in Q2/Q3. This is supported by extreme bullish sentiment among both professional and retail investors, who appear heavily allocated to equities and using record levels of margin. We are also seeing several key markets begin a topping process dating back to October 2025, some of which could be signaling more than a standard correction, even as the S&P 500 continues to drift higher. 

At the I/O Fund, we don’t focus on predicting the market’s exact path. Instead, we steer the portfolio based on the key levels the market holds or breaks through. Most importantly, we always operate with a plan, and at this stage, that plan is increasingly defensive.

The I/O Fund published a 60+ page report (over 20,000 words) that details our Top 15 AI Stocks for Q1 2026. In the report, we identify lesser-known stocks across AI chips, AI networking and AI energy that are leading the way, with nearly $600 billion in Big Tech capex now in motion. 
Sign up to receive the full 50-page Top 15 AI Stocks report plus an invite to Knox Ridley’s upcoming webinar held Thursday at 4:30 p.m. Eastern.

Please note: The I/O Fund conducts research and draws conclusions for the Fund’s positions. We then share that information with our readers. This is not a guarantee of a stock’s performance. Please consult your personal financial advisor before buying any stock in the companies mentioned in this analysis.

Recommended Reading:

  • The Future of AI Stocks? TSMC Commentary Suggests AI Megatrend
  • The $530 Billion AI Question: Which Big Tech Stock is Winning?
  • Palantir Stock 2026 Forecast: Is Its High Valuation Sustainable?
  • I/O Fund Called the Bitcoin Selloff: What Liquidity & DXY Data Predict Next
Posted in Broad Market TodayLeave a Comment on S&P 500 Outlook 2026: Rising Volatility Risk and Key Support Levels

The I/O Fund’s Top 15 Stocks for Q1 2026

Posted on January 29, 2026June 30, 2026 by io-fund

The stocks selected for the Q1 report passed stringent tests for technical positioning, competitive advantage, and underlying fundamentals. Before presenting the list, I also revisit the trends driving the AI market—as you’ll see, much has changed in just three months. 

Despite these trends being long-term bullish, the team at the I/O Fund fully accepts the inevitable downturns that characterize not only technology, but the growth markets that historically drive a disproportionate share of returns. 

For example, last year Nvidia reported mild returns, and did not even beat the broader semiconductor sectors SMH and PHLX, despite continuing to offer some of the strongest fundamentals the market has ever seen (the keyword here is “continuing”). The market is clearly not static and requires a level of discipline that comes naturally to the analyst team at the I/O Fund.  

On the topic of investment discipline, what you have in your hands is a 61-page report totaling over 24,000 words – nearly a novel. What drove this report is a mind-numbing amount of due diligence on the stocks included in the report, but also those we passed on. 

Below are the I/O Fund’s Top 15 AI Stocks for Q1 2026 and the trends driving the AI market forward.  

Reference our Q4 2025 AI Stocks list here and our Q3 2025 AI Stocks list here. 

Top 3 Emerging AI Trends for 2026-2028 

#1 Networking Shifts with Rubin, Yet Importance Remains 

As you’ll recall from our previous coverage, Blackwell and Blackwell Ultra are fundamentally a networking problem. We began to form this thesis nearly a year ago with non-stop AI networking coverage, and we have ample evidence the thesis is playing out.  

Nvidia’s networking segment surged again this past quarter to 162% growth YoY and was up 13% QoQ for $8.2 billion in revenue. We began to see initial signs last quarter from Nvidia with 78% growth YoY and was up 46% QoQ.  

This represents an acceleration of 84 percentage points from 78% YoY growth in Q2, driven by NVLink scale-up, Spectrum-X Ethernet and Quantum X-InfiniBand. For Nvidia’s systems, there is a 75% attach rate which leaves about 25% for smaller networking vendors – therefore, even though this growth is driven by Nvidia’s proprietary networking stack, the growth rates are directionally aligned with smaller players, as well. 

As discussed in last quarter’s Top 15 AI Report, Nvidia’s Blackwell architecture drives a new growth trajectory for AI networking, as it requires 5× to 9× more networking components for 72-GPU and 36-CPU systems to operate as a single node. Because these systems are now shipping in volume, the current networking stack largely reflects the companies capturing this demand. As a result, it is reasonable to expect growth rates among the highest-growth networking stocks to remain healthy over the next one to two quarters.  

Rubin Redefines AI Networking as a Bandwidth-First Constraint  

Inside the Rack: The Copper-to-Optics Boundary 

However, as we turn our attention to the Vera Rubin generation, there is a notable shift in the networking stack. While copper-based links remain essential for short-reach, low-latency connections—particularly within NVLink scale-up domains—the expansion of Ethernet fabrics, higher port counts, and the adoption of co-packaged optics are driving an inevitable shift toward optical content.  

Blackwell and Blackwell Ultra are fundamentally focused on solving scale-up problems, where the primary challenge is binding large numbers of GPUs into a single coherent node using ultra-dense, low-latency NVLink fabrics.  

Rubin, by contrast, is primarily focused on assisting higher bandwidth requirements, as the focus is now on sustaining inference and training workloads at scale without bottlenecks forming beyond NVLink. The limiting factor is how efficiently bandwidth can be delivered and distributed across racks and fabrics, resulting in higher port counts, faster link speeds (800G now and moving toward 1.6T).  

Further necessitating a need for higher bandwidth is Rubin’s “extreme co-designed” nature, as CEO Jensen Huang puts it, where “GPUs, CPUs, networking, security, software, power delivery, and cooling are architected together as a single system rather than optimized in isolation” to deliver substantial performance upgrades for inference, such as a 5X increase in FP4 performance with just a 1.6X increase in transistor count on Rubin’s GPU.  

The increasing amount of computing nodes (especially as Nvidia pushes towards the NVL576 with Rubin Ultra) along with increasing amount of interconnects means that bandwidth must also increase, from 400G to 800G and now to 1.6T, to ensure that low-latency, high-throughput communication remains across the entire platform. 

As a result, it’s expected that optics move closer to the switch, as copper and AEC content becomes constrained by reach and signal integrity. The result is a networking stack where silicon photonics capture incremental value, even though copper remains relevant and intact at the shortest distances.  

With Rubin, Nvidia is doubling NVLink scale-up bandwidth over Blackwell with its sixth-gen NVLink 6 interconnect, offering 3.6 TB/s of bidirectional bandwidth for GPU-GPU communication and 1.8 TB/s for GPU-CPU communication.  

This is accomplished with 36 NVLink 6 switches, deployed as a full all-to-all fabric across the NVL72 rack, delivering 2X throughput for inference at scale with total bandwidth of 260 TB/s per rack, versus Blackwell’s 130 TB/s. 

Source: Nvidia 

Packing more NVLink switches per rack (18 in Blackwell to 36 with Rubin) and doubling bandwidth emphasizes Nvidia’s goal of maximizing scale-up bandwidth to deliver increasing throughput and inference performance gains.  

However, the content opportunity for copper and AECs may slowly erode at the copper-to-optics boundary as the design goal with Rubin is to bring Ethernet closer to the switch, in a shift that favors silicon photonics over time, first through shorter electrical reaches and earlier optical transitions, and eventually through architectures such as CPO, while leaving copper relevant at the shortest distances.  

The industry remains favorable on copper in the near future, with Broadcom CEO Hock Tan saying that the industry will “try to do scale-up within a rack in copper as long as possible” but the shift to SiPho at the electrical-optical transition point appears to be inevitable. Therefore, copper is not going away, rather it faces a lower attach rate. This is due to copper’s reach limitations and needing GPU systems to scale further with a low power, low latency and high bandwidth solution. 

For Credo, the company is expanding its presence into optics as well with its ZeroFlap Optical DSPs and transceivers, though it faces potential decreasing AEC content. 

Scale-Out: CPO Signifies the Shift Toward SiPho 

For scale-out networking, Nvidia announced its new NVIDIA Spectrum-X Ethernet Photonics switch, which it says will deliver 10X greater reliability with co-packaged optics (CPO), bringing 1.6T silicon photonics (SiPho) optical engines directly onto the switch. Maximum bandwidth is also doubled to 102.4Tb/s per ASIC, matching Broadcom’s new Tomahawk6 switch, though Nvidia is also offering the industry’s first four-ASIC design, delivering 409.6Tb/s bandwidth.   

The push towards the new Spectrum-X Ethernet switches will reduce reliance on traditional pluggable transceiver designs. There are a few main advantages this architectural shift: it eliminates the need for digital signal processing (DSP) retimers, reducing latency, and it reduces network power, driving up to 5X better power efficiency with a lower cost versus pluggable transceivers.   

It also will drive increasing content for the SiPho-laser ecosystem and CPO photonics components, as SiPho will serve as the backbone for the CPO switches. This extends beyond the photonics ICs to include CW lasers, ultra-high-power (UHP) lasers for external light source (ELS) modules, fiber array units, optical interconnects, and more.  

PCIe Remains Relevant from Nvidia’s “Extreme Co-Design" 

Inside the server, PCIe remains firmly intact. Growth should persist as PCIe continues to serve as the foundational interconnect for intra-server connectivity between GPUs, CPUs, DPUs, NICs, and NVMe SSD storage. 

This directly ties back to Nvidia’s “extreme co-design” philosophy. As Rubin brings multiple compute, networking, and memory components together into a single, tightly integrated platform, the need for rapid, low-latency data movement within the server increases—therefore, it is our understanding PCIe as the connective tissue does not decrease.  

This extends further with Nvidia’s move to PCIe Gen6 alongside expanded CXL support on its Vera CPU, up from PCIe Gen5 on Grace. CXL enables low-latency, high-bandwidth memory and cache sharing between CPUs, GPUs, and attached memory devices, reinforcing PCIe’s role at the heart of the system architecture. PCIe fabric switches are also expected to remain critical for backend GPU-to-GPU communication and for linking CPUs, NICs, and storage at scale. 

#2 AI Energy: AI's Biggest Bottleneck 

The AI market has moved from being compute-constrained to being energy constrained. Hyperscalers have access to GPU supply, making the limiting factor how quickly those GPUs can be energized and deployed.  

As we’ve discussed in our analysis, Why Power is Critical for Data Centers and their Hyperscaler Customers, every month that GPUs sit idle waiting for power delays – revenue, profits and market share can be affected. This is especially true given GPU generations refresh annually and is driving significantly higher power requirements. 

For the energy section, I break down both the problem and the solution — each central to how we plan to position heading into 2026. Many of these energy solutions have existed for decades yet are now experiencing a resurgence in product-market fit driven by rapid AI data center expansion. For that reason, even if we have already covered the scale of AI data center investment, it is critical to double-click on why energy has become the bottleneck nearly overnight.  

The Problem: 

Nvidia’s Blackwell lineup is bringing a significant increase in power consumption, nearly double the H200’s 70 kW at 120 kW for the GB200 NVL72 and 140 kW for the upcoming GB300 racks.   

Beyond Blackwell, Nvidia’s future design lineup shows continual increases in power consumption. Its Vera Rubin generation is expected to boost thermal design power (TDP) by 50% over Blackwell at up to 180 kW to potentially 230kW per rack, with the Rubin Ultra boosting this to 600kW by late 2027.  

In its largest configuration, the Vera Rubin NVL576, dubbed the ‘Kyber’ rack, could draw as much as 600 kW (0.6 MW), or 5x that of the GB200 NVL72 in just a two-year design timeframe. These figures do not include networking, interconnects, cooling and other hardware, which will further boost power draw per rack. 

Existing data center infrastructure is largely incompatible with next-gen AI. Nearly 70% of data centers were built for 4-9kW racks with fewer than 2% able to handle even 50kW, which is forcing new construction and major retrofits. 

Furthermore, there exists a significant disconnect between when hyperscale and colocation developers expect to have site power, and when utilities expect to be able to deliver said power. Connecting new data centers to the grid in quick fashion may not be the most feasible option for hyperscalers looking to deploy gigawatts of capacity quickly, and instead, alternative power sources may be in higher demand. 

For example, across the board, developers are expecting to have power delivered by late 2026 to early 2027 on average, with most regions seeing expectations as early as late 2025. This is likely driven by consistent strong demand for AI infrastructure services, as new capacity will allow hyperscalers to meet more demand and drive more revenue. 

Yet, utilities do not expect to be able to meet these delivery timelines in most of these primary and secondary markets, with many projecting late 2027 through 2028, with major hub Northern Virginia seeing one of the longest timelines at nearly 2029. 

Most importantly, the AI race is not merely a battle between companies like Google, Amazon and Microsoft. Rather, it is a battle among global powers. While the news has latched onto China-fears such as DeepSeek, tariffs or rare earth materials, and H200 bans (that are later lifted), the true challenge lies in the fact that China has significantly more power than the United States.  

In a recent Fortune article, energy experts stated China’s reserve margin has never dipped below 80% to 100% nationwide, meaning it’s at 2X the capacity the country needs. Meanwhile, the United States is at a 15% reserve margin. The article states, “The gap in readiness is stark: While the U.S. is already experiencing political and economic fights over whether the grid can keep up, China is operating from a position of abundance.” Specifically, the article calls out that large-scale infrastructure projects depend heavily on private investment, yet returns can take years and up to a decade to pay off. Meanwhile, private investors greatly prefer software with returns realized on a much shorter timeline.  

Therefore, there are dual forces placing outsized pressure on this trend – not only is the AI data center expansion physically dependent on power availability and it is now the bottleneck, but one could argue that United States global dominance is also highly dependent on this sector. The United States undeniably has the world’s best design companies with Nvidia, AMD, Broadcom and soon TSM will be on our soil. We also have the best software companies – from Big Tech to the entrepreneurial culture of our country with startups coast to coast.  

What the United States doesn’t have is enough power.doesn’t have is enough power. 

The Solution: 

The bottleneck has shifted from compute supply to energy. As a research firm, we want to be early in providing you analysis on the companies that solve this problem, as energy determines the timing and economics of AI deployment. 

The disconnect described above is driving demand for behind-the-meter power, on-site natural gas turbines, fuel cells, nuclear and SMRs in the long-term and retrofitted Bitcoin mining sites. Each GW of AI data center capacity costs roughly $30 to $38 billion all-in, which puts total required capex into the trillions this decade.  

Compute still remains the bulk of the data center spend (i.e., the overall pie), however, energy is growing its slice of the pie. Breaking it down on a MW basis, Alpha Matica, an AI consultant company that specializes in AI, states electrical systems are 50% of the initial construction costs which range from $900M to $1.5B per 100MW.  

There are multiple different ways that hyperscalers, neoclouds and developers can get power to data centers to meet upcoming demand growth over the next few years, each offering its own benefits and drawbacks.  

Grid interconnection: This is when data centers connect to the power grid under standard service, providing access to flexible power needs with no additional capex and a wide range of power generation options, including renewables. However, grid interconnection requests are often the longest time to power, ranging from three to seven years for hyperscale data centers in most key markets. 

Behind-the-meter: How Power is Contracted can offer a time to power advantage 

BTM refers to when data centers connect directly to the power source and bypass the retail grid (meter) and associated tariffs, which can offer significant time advantage with stand-up times often in the range of several months to a year, along with cost savings from buying power direct versus at retail price.  

BTM arrangements also provide greater control over power supply and reduce exposure to grid outages. These deals can be structured across multiple power sources, including solar, wind, nuclear, and natural gas.  

On-site power generation: Where Power is located can offer time to power benefits and is increasingly becoming attractive to AI data centers 

With on-site power, data centers will install their own power source within the facility grounds or adjacent, also offering a relatively quicker time to power of a few months to over a year as this bypasses the need for a grid connection and transmission upgrades. 

These solutions are modular and designed for rapid installation, as they can be manufactured off-site and be built in parallel with a data center. This also offers the benefit of foregoing regulatory risks and delays that come with grid connections. Controlling the timeline can be a significant asset for the reasons described above in terms of when increasingly-power-hungry GPUs are shipped.  

In addition, grids are designed for lower, flatter power loads and gradual increases. With Blackwell Ultra, Rubin and Rubin Ultra on the product road map through 2027, data centers need ultra-dense loads and to scale power locally without overwhelming the grid. In addition, as discussed above, time-to-power is technically time-to-revenue, and thus, circumventing the grid as much as possible is the aim. 

Lastly, on-site power is seen as more reliable as it’s not subject to grid failures. This is why on-site backup power sources are also becoming a major growth market. 

On-site power can come in many forms, such as Bloom’s fuel cells, natural gas turbines or generators such as those from GE Vernova or Caterpillar, and in the 2030s and beyond, potentially small modular nuclear reactors. These power sources are discussed more below. 

  • Natural gas turbines/generators: Behind-the-meter and on-site

NG is a widely available fuel source with a broad pipeline in the US, offering continuous power to data centers. Turbines can come in a range of sizes and be easily deployed, such as Caterpillar subsidiary Solar’s SMT-130 turbines that xAI is using, or GE Vernova’s LM2500XPRESS that Crusoe is using, scaling up to 1GW capacity. Notably, NG turbines could help meet substantial future demand, as GE Vernova is expanding manufacturing in South Carolina to be able to ship 20 GW worth in 2027. Large (>225MW) turbines are reportedly sold out over the next three years.

  • Fuel cells: Behind-the-meter and on-site 

Similar to NG, fuel cells can be quickly deployed (in as little as three months per Bloom and Oracle’s deal), and provide continuous power for operations. Due to being a relatively newer tech, SOFCs can come at a higher cost than NG, but without the related emissions. Bloom is planning to double its SOFC manufacturing capacity to 2GW in 2026 to meet rising on-site power demand.

  • Small modular reactors: Not behind-the-meter right now (will be around 2030) and on-site or near-site

SMRs are drawing more interest for future demand needs, as commercialization at scale is not likely until 2030 or beyond. Google is working with Kairos to bring 0.5 GW of SMR capacity online from 2030 through 2035, while Oklo and NuScale are progressing with commercialization plans and a long-term combined ~20 GW backlog.

  • Retrofitting existing infrastructure, i.e. Bitcoin mining: How power is contracted and delivered is nuanced (see below); effectively on-site

Miners leverage existing infrastructure with secured power to the building, offering quick delivery times as short as a few weeks to a year, depending on cooling, flooring or other upgrades needed. Overall, the value proposition of Miners is that they are cheaper and faster than new, greenfield data center sites. 

Bitcoin mining is not behind-the-meter in a strict sense, but it is effectively behind-the-meter because miners secure direct, wholesale power through upfront contracts that are not renegotiated.  

They are considered on-site power as there is minimal transmission dependency due to co-locating near a mix of power sources (near gas plants, augmented by wind, solar, water/hydro). In most cases, even if a utility meter exists, the power system is purpose-built for that site and is not shared retail infrastructure.  

While this method can offer quick time to power for >100MW sizes with low latency, low electricity costs and cooling expertise compared to greenfield projects, miners are capital constrained and may be unable to build-out capacity beyond what is currently in their pipelines. For example, they are not suitable for training a frontier model. 

Miners have been attracting substantial deal activity, primarily from neoclouds, from an ability to deliver larger chunks of power quickly, with capex costs well below greenfield builds. 

Click here for our most recent full write-up on Why Power is Critical for Data Centers and Their Hyperscaler Customers. The I/O Fund first covered this topic  in June of 2024, many quarters before the problem became well-known. We furthered this by investing early in a Bitcoin miner and one of the year’s highest-performing AI energy stocks.Why Power is Critical for Data Centers and Their Hyperscaler Customers. The I/O Fund first covered this topic  in June of 2024, many quarters before the problem became well-known. We furthered this by investing early in a Bitcoin miner and one of the year’s highest-performing AI energy stocks.

#3: The Incoming AI Inference Market (i.e., the AI Boom Hasn’t Happened Yet) 

As you’ve likely noticed, we have been writing 10,000-foot level analysis on the AI inference phase, which is synonymous with the Monetization Phase for AI. The last few years have been marked by intense R&D and high compute costs, yet the economic reality is that training large language models is an initial research stage, and this is not the stage to expect recurring revenue and expanding profits.  

Rather, it is my assertion that AI development is nearing a crux where peak capex spending intersects steeply with low ROI. However, to call this a bubble or to claim that AI does not drive enough revenue in exchange for the hundreds of billions being spent on data center expansion is to assume we are in the final stages of AI rather than the early stages. The AI market will take off when the inference phase fully arrives – my estimates are 2027-2028 for this. However, as you know by now, the I/O Fund has no intention of being late to this trend.  

The aggregators and distributors for AI – whether that’s Big Tech, best-of-breed software companies, or enterprises that are already using AI to increase profits will be able to fully leverage LLMs and AI automation once AI inference becomes faster and cheaper. It is a mix of hardware and software that will achieve this, and we will want to assess this market carefully as the inference opportunity is expected to exceed the training market in both size and velocity. You can expect to hear extensively from us on this trend over a 2-3 year time period.  

For now, what is most important is to track some of the hardware companies that are unlocking this opportunity. We want to understand the “why” behind Nvidia’s Vera Rubin architecture, the “why” behind AMD’s Helios and the “why” behind Broadcom’s rise in custom silicon. The breadcrumbs are crucial for positioning correctly into H2 2026 and 2027.   

We will also highlight select software opportunities with the understanding that timing may be early. In these cases, price action will play a decisive role. That means if we see a breakout or strength in the chart align with product, we will move accordingly. 

Memory: 

Memory's medium-term thesis is based on the shift from training to inference. Inference workloads require only a forward pass, making them significantly less compute- and power-intensive than training. However, to achieve low latency, especially at small batch sizes, models must remain resident in device memory, which shifts the primary bottleneck from compute over to memory capacity and bandwidth. 

Forward pass refers to taking an input and pushing it through a trained neural network. No learning occurs and no weights are updated. Rather, input tokens are embedded – which requires frequent memory access, yet this step has low compute requirements. Attention layers read fixed, pre-trained model weights, and the GPUs repeatedly read the weights from memory. From there, KV cache grows with usage to where the longer the conversation, the larger the KV cache. While reading from the KV cache reduces redundant computation, it materially increases memory capacity and bandwidth requirements. 

The point of the above paragraphs is to help illustrate the technical shift toward memory for the inference workloads, whereas compute requirements on a relative basis become reduced. 

Discovery Members Discovery Members recently received an analysis on a stock that is positioned to benefit as Nvidia tackles the context memory bottleneck and extends KV cache memory with its new Inference Context Memory Storage platform. To subscribe to Discovery with 40% off, click here to email us or email  premium@io-fund.compremium@io-fund.com and mention code DISCOVERY40DISCOVERY40

Top 15 Stocks List

Section 1: AI Accelerators 

AI accelerators are technically the #1 trend in the AI market by size, and in my opinion, offer a solid way to participate with lower risk than other AI trends over a longer-time frame. While we did not rank accelerators among our Top 3 themes, given that other areas of the market offer higher near-term growth rate, that should not be mistaken for a lack of structural strength. 

As last year illustrated, keeping up on the ins/outs can be advantageous given AMD outperformed Nvidia with 3X higher returns whereas Nvidia underperformed its sector. I review this in more detail below. 

Additionally, in a similar way that doctors check vital signs, we revisit capex ahead of earnings and immediately following Big Tech earnings as this remains a critical signal to the strength of the AI market. One day, we will be tracking enterprise AI spend and sovereign AI. However, those markets are not large enough to offset Big Tech’s investment levels for many quarters (if not years). Therefore, the customer concentration works in our favor as these particular customers must disclose their budgets in their quarterly filings. 

Capex signals from Big Tech/hyperscalers (Microsoft, Meta, Alphabet, Amazon, Oracle) are projected to be around $435 billion for 2025, while initial estimates for 2026 capex are around $583 billion, up approximately 34% YoY. On a dollar basis, this points to an initial estimate of ~$148 billion in growth, versus ~$173 billion in 2025, signaling AI demand is poised to continue.  

Keep in mind, capex estimates for 2025 started out much lower – estimates entered the year at about $320 billion, or more than $100 billion short of where the year ultimately ended. Therefore, the same could be true for 2026 to where capex ultimately ends up higher by year-end — some analysts are already penciling in the five to spend more than $600 billion next year, which could mean absolute dollar growth on a YoY basis this year surpasses 2025.  

Nvidia: Greater Emphasis on Memory 

Overview: 

There are two primary factors to track when assessing Nvidia’s path toward a potential $20 trillion market capitalization by 2030. The first is the cadence of GPU generations and the product road map, which when executed well, supports higher average selling prices and drives system-level expansion in data centers. The second is analyst estimates, which when conservative, can create opportunities for valuation upside as expectations are forced to reset.  

Jensen Huang spoiled the CY2026 alpha party by stating that management has a line of sight to $500 billion across two years from Blackwell and Rubin. Our firm had already stated we would see over $300 billion this calendar year, and that statement puts Nvidia’s revenue squarely at our estimate. Nvidia resuming H200 sales could perhaps bump that up 10% to 20% – not chump change for a stock this size yet a bit boring for I/O Fund’s purposes. 

From there, things get interesting. If we look at calendar year 2027, we see 27% growth estimated to $409 billion. If we look at calendar year 2028, we see only 8.4% growth to $443 billion. Yet in the 27% growth year we will see Rubin Ultra, a 144-GPU AI system that will shatter all previous records on training frontier models as it tests the upper limits of the amount of compute, memory and networking that can function as a single node. In terms of what is accomplished on the inference side, quite a bit depends on how memory and networking evolves over the next 1-2 years to improve efficiency at the system-level.   

Let’s say we get to CY2028 and Nvidia growth flatlines – what would cause this? While the broader market likely anticipates it will come from the pace at which compute can be monetized, yet the more likely cause would be power availability first and foremost, but also deployment complexity, as we saw from the meaningful delays in Blackwell’s 72-GPU systems.  

In the more near-term, 2026 is shaping up to be a year where Nvidia is firing on all cylinders. Vera Rubin was officially launched at CES and is an architecture that opens doors for the impending inference market. Jensen Huang calls the Rubin “extreme co-design" across six elements– CPUs, GPUs, NVLink, Ethernet, DPUs and NICs – with this generation more focused on memory movement and networking than the architectures in the past (which were centered around raw compute). 

The Rubin architecture delivers substantial performance gains at the system level, with up to ~5× improvements in inference and ~3.5× in training relative to prior generations (as always, this depends on workload and configuration).  

A key driver of these gains is a significant expansion in memory capacity and bandwidth, with Rubin designed to support up to roughly 288GB of HBM-class memory per GPU and materially higher memory bandwidth. This addresses one of the primary bottlenecks in inference: memory access and data movement. 

To support this shift, Nvidia is focusing on the context memory window, which refers to the memory used to store and access the model during inference. The key-value (KV) cache is a memory mechanism used in transformer models to store attention keys and values from prior tokens. This allows models to reuse previous computations and reduce latency from increased memory usage. 

In a Discovery tier article where we covered a major memory beneficiary of the KV cache increase, it was stated the KV cache has a substantial memory footprint, and during deployment it can consume 30% of GPU memory, making it a major bottleneck for large-context applications, such as coding, natural language processing, or handling simultaneous requests from many users on large models.    

In day-to-day use, the key-value cache is the memory that lets LLMs remember what’s already been said so it doesn’t have to rethink everything for each query. Each new response then builds on the stored context instead of recomputing the conversation again. When you use ChatGPT or Claude, the prior context is stored in the KV cache rather than relying on repeated compute.  

With the Rubin generation, by expanding the KV cache capacity, Nvidia greatly reduces the need for recomputation, and redirects resources to memory capacity, bandwidth and data movement to improve throughput and responsiveness. 

This becomes even more important in agentic AI systems, where models operate autonomously across multiple inference steps rather than responding to a single prompt. Agentic workflows require longer context windows and sustained access to KV cache as agents reason, plan, and act across extended sequences.  

As a result, memory and networking increasingly determine real-world inference performance and scalability as opposed to raw compute. This marks a shift for Nvidia – and one we argued years ago would open the door to more competition in AI accelerators as we exit the training-dominate phase and we approach the inference-driven monetization phase.  

Overall Revenue Growth: 

Nvidia’s Q3 rev grew by 62.5% YoY and 22% QoQ to $57B. Revenue growth accelerated by 6.9 percentage points from 55.6% YoY growth reported in Q2. Revenue beat estimates by 3.5% and is the strongest beat in the last four quarters.  

Management also provided a strong Q4 rev guide of $65B billion, YoY growth of 65.3% and up 14% QoQ. Beat the estimates by 5.1%. 

Nvidia’s total supply-related commitments, such as for CoWoS wafers, HBM memory, or other components, surged nearly 52% QoQ to $50.3 billion in Q3, with management noting that they are “ordering to secure long lead-time components, meet the demand for Blackwell, and support future architecture ramps.”   

Where the disconnect happens with analyst estimates is what will happen after next year as this is where analyst estimates show minimal growth through 2030 revenue with $437 billion whereas I am calling for double that by 2030. While Blackwell Ultra gets us to a new milestone of $50 billion to $75 billion quarterly revenue, quite a bit of my thesis depends on Vera Rubin, Rubin Ultra and the Feynman generations – not only execution on Nvidia’s side but also power availability is crucial. 

AI Segment Growth: 

Data center rev grew by 66% YoY and 25% QoQ to $51.2B. Rev growth accelerated 10 percentage points from 56% growth reported in Q2. Management sounded confident to achieve the $500B target in Blackwell and Rubin revenue set for FY2026/27 and hinted it could be more. Networking rev grew by 162% YoY and 13% QoQ to $8.19B. Rev growth accelerated by 84 percentage points from 78% in Q2. Largest QoQ growth in about two years (and done at scale). 

Nvidia’s guide pointed to this momentum continuing into the fourth quarter, implying that data center revenue could be on track to rise another $8 billion QoQ for 15% growth. Management repeated they “currently have visibility to $0.5 trillion in Blackwell and Rubin revenue from the start of this year through the end of calendar year 2026.”  

Q4’s guidance suggests that this $50 billion data center segment will quickly be in the rear view mirror, with the $65 billion guidance implying data center revenue of around $59 billion assuming similar mix shift as Q3. This represents another 15% QoQ growth on top of Q3’s 25%, or essentially the data center segment rising nearly 44% in just two quarters. 

Earnings: 

Q3 adjusted EPS grew by 60.5% YoY and 23.8% QoQ to $1.30, beating estimates by 3.5%.  

Looking forward, analysts expect FY2027 adjusted EPS to grow 49.5% YoY to $6.83 and 26.7% YoY to $8.65 in FY2028. 

Margins: 

Q3 GM was 73.4%, beat the guidance by 10 bps. Q4 GM guide is 74.8%, up 140 bps seq and up 180 bps YoY. Mgmt expects to maintain GMs in the mid-70s range for FY2027 despite the increase in the input costs. 

Cash: 

Q3 FCF grew by 31.6% YoY to $22.1B with a FCF of 38.7%, compared to 47.9% last year and 28.8% in Q2. The company has cash and marketable securities of $60.6 billion and debt of $8.47 billion. 

Valuation: 

Nvidia trades at a forward P/S ratio of 24.3. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 9.6 and a maximum of 45.8 in recent years. Nvidia is currently trading slightly lower than mid-range. On the bottom line, it trades at a forward P/E ratio of 39.4. Nvidia has traded at a minimum of 15.8 and the highest of 50.7. Nvidia is currently trading slightly higher than mid-range.   

Notable Risks: 

The risks to Nvidia are low – perhaps the lowest of any stock in the tech universe. With that said, I recently stated in a Seeking Alpha webinar that the predominant constraints are memory and energy now, which means Nvidia is losing its top place in terms of GPUs no longer being the top supply constraint in the AI market. 

Broadcom: Ethernet Wins at Scale-Out & Custom Silicon will Prevail with Inference 

It’s widely understood that Broadcom supplies Google with its custom TPUs. The incoming inference growth curve, that the I/O Fund detailed here, has led CEO Hock Tan to state Broadcom may witness an acceleration of XPU demand into the back half of 2026.  

Tan stated, “In fact, what we've seen recently is that they are doubling down on inference in order to monetize their platforms. And reflecting this, we may actually see an acceleration of XPU demand into the back half of 2026 to meet urgent demand for inference on top of the demand we have indicated from training.”    

Something similar was echoed in the FQ3 call, with Tan stating: “But also as for these guys, they got to be accountable to being able to create cash flows that can sustain their path. They [are] starting to also invest in inference in a massive way to monetize their models.”  

On that note, Google’s TPU business received a significant vote of confidence recently with Anthropic signing a deal for up to one million TPUs, including Ironwood, coming online in 2026. The deal is said to be worth tens of billions.   

For Broadcom, TPUs are expected to be the primary driver of AI revenue growth in fiscal 2026 – estimates from HSBC earlier this summer projected Google’s TPUs to represent ~58% of Broadcom’s ASICs shipments at 1.79 million, but account for ~78% of ASICs revenue at $22.1 billion. This is because Google’s TPUs were estimated to carry a significant price premium at $13,000 per chip versus Broadcom’s other projects at $5,000 per chip. However, this is still less than half the cost of Nvidia’s chips at $30,000 to $40,000 for a solo B200 ($60,000 to $70,000 for a GB200).   

Looking beyond fiscal 2026, projections for TPU shipments are surging. Morgan Stanley now expects 5 million TPUs to be shipped in 2027, a 67% rise from its prior estimate for 3 million; for 2028, the firm estimates shipments as high as 7 million, a 120% increase from its prior estimate. This would project YoY growth of 40% from 2027 to 2028, a substantial increase from 6% previously, and will represent more than 2X growth in two years. 

The I/O Fund first covered TPUs versus GPUs back in 2019 and revisited the topic in February 2024 in our analysis, Broadcom: Networking/ASICs Giant and the Second Largest by AI Revenue. Since then, we’ve provided quarterly coverage for two years. Broadcom: Networking/ASICs Giant and the Second Largest by AI Revenue. Since then, we’ve provided quarterly coverage for two years.   

The shift to Ethernet and away from Nvidia’s lock-in ecosystem of GPU + InfiniBand is benefiting Broadcom, with the industry pointing to rising Ethernet demand. Arista said that momentum for Ethernet “has really shifted in the last year” while Nvidia touted that its new Spectrum-X Ethernet is annualizing at $10 billion in revenue, or $2.5 billion quarterly.   

The company is committed to remaining on the leading edge of networking with its Tomahawk 6 switch, the industry’s first 102.4 Tbps Ethernet switch. The next-gen switch doubled the bandwidth of its predecessor, while offering flexible deployment ability with 1,024 100G or 512 200G SerDes options, reducing switch count.   

This raw performance upgrade paves the way for >100K to 1 million accelerator clusters by allowing larger leaf-spine fabrics to be constructed, while drawing less power and keeping latency low. Broadcom exec Ram Velaga said that the demand for the new switch is “unprecedented” with multiple >100K accelerator deployments “using Tomahawk 6 for both the scale-out and scale-up interconnect.”  

When discussing Tomahawk 6, management points toward the flattening of the AI cluster as an important catalyst for this product, stating: “[…] Tomahawk 6 enables clusters of more than 100,000 AI accelerators to be deployed in just two tiers instead of three … this flattening of the AI cluster is huge because it enables much better performance in training next-generation frontier models through a lower latency, higher bandwidth and lower power.” The two-tier topology also reduces complexity of cluster construction and reduces congestion choke points significantly, addressing another critical pain point of building larger and larger clusters.   

Additionally, in terms of the AI networking opportunity, scale up is 5-10X more than scale out – setting up a nice trajectory as AI clusters grow. Oppenheimer analyst Rick Schafer highlighted that they expect next-gen Tomahawk6 volumes to ramp up in the second half of next year, providing added growth and gross margin boost. 

Overall Revenue Growth: 

Second-highest in AI revenue among the semis. Broadcom’s FQ4 revenue grew by 28.2% YoY and 12.9% QoQ to $18.02 billion, beating estimates by 3.2%. Management also provided a strong FQ1 revenue guide of $19.1 billion, implying a YoY growth of 28.1% and 6% QoQ, beating estimates by 4.3%. The expected strong growth is primarily driven by AI revenue, which is expected to double YoY to $8.2 billion.  

FQ4 semiconductor solutions revenue grew by 35% YoY to $11.07 billion, primarily driven by strong AI revenue. Revenue growth accelerated by 9 percentage points from 26% growth reported in FQ3. Management expects semiconductor revenue growth to further accelerate 15 percentage points to 50% YoY, reaching $12.3 billion in FQ1, driven by a surge in AI revenue. For FY2025, semiconductor revenue grew by 22% YoY to a record $36.9 billion.  

Management expects renewals to be seasonal in Q1 and expects Infrastructure Software revenue to be $6.8 billion, down (2%) sequentially and up 1% YoY. 

AI Segment Growth: 

FQ4 AI revenue grew by 74% YoY and 25% QoQ to $6.5 billion and was higher than the management guide of $6.2 billion. For the FY2025, AI revenue grew by 65% YoY to $20 billion. Management expects AI revenue to accelerate in FY2026 and drive most of Broadcom’s growth in FY2026.  

During fiscal year 2025, AI revenue grew 65% year-over-year to $20 billion, leading to semiconductor revenue seeing an all-time high of $37 billion 

Next quarter, AI revenue is expected to double year-over-year to $8.2 billion.  

Broadcom’s total AI-related orders on hand exceed $73 billion, nearly half of the company’s consolidated $162 billion backlog. The $73B backlog is expected to ship over the next 18 months. This backlog includes not only XPUs but also networking components. Most of the earnings call was management explaining the $73 billion is a baseline for the next 18 months. 

Earnings: 

FQ4 adjusted EBITDA grew by 34.4% YoY to $12.2 billion with an adjusted EBITDA margin of 68% and was better than the management guide of 67%. For FQ1, management expects adjusted EBITDA margin to be down 100 basis points sequentially and YoY to 67%.  

Adjusted EPS grew by 37.3% YoY to $1.95, beating estimates by 4.3%.  

FQ4 GAAP EPS grew by 93.3% YoY to $1.74. While adjusted EPS grew by 37.3% YoY to $1.95, beating estimates by 4.3%. Analysts expect adjusted EPS to grow by 23.3% YoY to $1.97 in FQ1 and 28.7% YoY to $2.03 in FQ2. 

Margins: 

Adjusted gross margin was 77.9%, up 100 basis points YoY and down 50 basis points sequentially.  

Operating margin improved 8.8 percentage points YoY and 4.8 percentage points sequentially to 41.7%, primarily driven by operating leverage. This is up 2X from 1-2 years ago. 

The company will have to pass-through more third-party components such as memory, optics, and power infrastructure, which will lead to gross margins contracting. However, management was clear that gross profit dollars and operating income dollars will continue to rise due to scale and operating leverage. 

Cash: 

Broadcom’s cash flows are improving, driven by higher profits. FQ4 free cash flows grew by 36.2% YoY to $7.47 billion with a free cash flow margin of 41.4% compared to 39% in the same period last year.  

The company has debt of $65.1 billion and cash of $16.2 billion. The debt is high due to the past acquisitions. However, the company has a history of successfully reducing debt. Also, the company has strong cash flows. Cash has increased to $16.2 billion from $10.7 billion due to higher free cash flows. 

Valuation: 

Broadcom trades at a forward P/S ratio of 15.9. The company traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 6.7 and the maximum of 28.8 in recent years. Broadcom is trading slightly lower than mid-range. It is trading at a forward P/E ratio of 31.7. The company traded at a minimum forward P/E ratio of 17.3 and a maximum of 57.2. Broadcom is trading slightly lower than the mid-range on the forward P/E ratio as well.  

Notable Risks: 

Similar to Nvidia, the company is a high-quality stock with a relatively low risk profile. The primary risk is high debt, which as we have discussed above, is well controlled. However, Broadcom is in sharky waters on networking in terms of competition, and even on custom silicon with a rumor Google could be moving some orders for its next generation of TPUs (v7 and v8) over to MediaTek. 

AMD: The Element of Surprise 

Overview: 

AMD is a great example of the paradox of stock investing, which is that despite Nvidia and Broadcom posting higher growth on a much larger revenue base, AMD outperformed Nvidia and Broadcom last year by roughly 2X. 

Five years ago, I dubbed AMD the “Dark Horse” for my premium research members as the company had a mere 4% share in the CPU-data center and was up against the near-monopoly of Intel. AMD has proven there is an element of catching the market off guard that helps to compound returns. The opposite of this is known as a crowded trade – which leads us back to the chart pictured above.  

In more recent years, the I/O Fund has remained consistent in our conviction that AMD will eventually contend with Nvidia on GPUs while emphasizing that timing is key. About 18 months ago, I spelled out AMD could outpace Nvidia’s returns by 2030 stating in a Real Vision video interview that the company’s opportunity is closely tied to the inference market. At the time, AMD was in the doghouse: 

“Core to this thesis on AMD is giving time for the budding inference market to take off and mature – [I explained that]“where AMD is going to compete with Nvidia is a market that is very early, so we need time for that to mature, which is inference. Many people may get that confused, because we are fully in the AI market today because Nvidia is putting up those huge data center numbers. We are in the data center training market today; one day, we will be an AI market led by inference.”  

It’s important to note that my prediction that AMD can outpace Nvidia’s returns by 2030 hinges on AMD capturing 20% to 25% of the GPU-market. We all know that Nvidia is not Intel, and thus AMD faces a fiercer competitor on all accounts. However, the path that AMD took to overcome Intel is highly relevant. You can read more about that here and here. 

The overall thesis is that the data center GPU market desperately needs a second-place contender. Investors may appreciate Nvidia’s pricing power, but hyperscalers and companies like OpenAI do not; they’d like to see more competition and optionality including lower prices. That is why we are seeing Meta work alongside AMD to bring Helios to market and a recent 6GW deal from OpenAI. 

One key area where Helios stands out is memory — the platform offers roughly 50% more total memory capacity compared to Nvidia’s Vera Rubin rack architecture. AMD will offer 1.4 PB/s of memory bandwidth, slightly below Rubin’s 1.6 PB/s as Nvidia is said to be requiring pin speeds of 11 Gb/s, above the standard 8 Gb/s, driving the higher bandwidth despite lower HBM content. The HBM content and nearly comparable bandwidth will likely make AMD a compelling solution for inference workloads considering its price-advantage over Nvidia. 

That said, if you’ve followed AMD’s AI story as closely alongside the I/O Fund (and I know many of you have), then the most important leap in this generation of GPUs is not found in Helios specs or even this quarter’s commentary. Rather, it’s in the demand signals. For the first time, some of the most influential AI customers — including OpenAI, Oracle, and Meta — are preparing to deploy the MI400 Series in meaningful volume. That level of hyperscaler commitment is something AMD hasn’t enjoyed in prior GPU generations (MI300s), and it represents an important shift in the company’s competitive positioning. 

There are many investment opportunities in AI across AI networking, AI energy, AI software, AI data layer and more – but none compare to the sheer size and strategic importance of GPUs, particularly when there are so few players competing for that share. That scarcity dynamic is precisely why AMD remains a special case in our portfolio. 

Overall Revenue Growth: 

Q3 revenue grew by 35.6% YoY and 20.3% QoQ to a record $9.25 billion, beating estimates by 5.7%.  

Q4 revenue guide is $9.6 billion at the midpoint, representing a YoY growth of 25.4% and 3.8% sequentially. It beat the analyst's estimates by 4.3%. Similarly, to the last quarter, the revenue guidance does not include any MI308 chip sales to China. However, this time management indicated that MI308 chip sales could be coming soon. 

AI Segment Growth: 

Data Center revenue rebounded strongly in Q3 as it grew by 22% YoY and 34% QoQ to a record $4.3 billion. The strong growth was primarily driven by the ramp of the Instinct MI350 Series GPUs and server share gains. However, we aren’t quite there yet in terms of a strong inflection as it was stated data center would grow 4% QoQ with strong growth server (a nod toward CPUs instead of GPUs). Server CPU revenue reached an all-time high as adoption of 5th Gen EPYC Turin processors accelerated rapidly, accounting for nearly half of overall EPYC revenue in the quarter. The sales of prior generation EPYC processors also continued to be strong.  

The last guide that AMD provided on GPUs was $6.5 billion in revenue by the time we exit this year. Management is hinting they will see “tens of billions” in their AI business by 2027. If we assume this means a minimum of $20B (perhaps more) then it coincides with roughly 200% growth in AMD’s AI business over a two-year time span. 

Margins: 

The gross margin was 52%, up 200 basis points YoY primarily driven by a higher profitable product mix. Management has guided an adjusted gross margin of 54.5% for the fourth quarter.  

The operating margin improved by 300 basis points YoY to 14%. Adjusted operating margin was down by 100 basis points YoY to 24% and missed the management guidance of 25% as the adjusted operating expenses increased by 42% YoY to support the significant AI opportunities and go-to-market activities for revenue growth. Management has guided an adjusted operating margin of 25% for the fourth quarter. 

EPS: 

GAAP EPS grew by 59.6% YoY to $0.75, beating estimates by 10%. Adjusted EPS rose by 30.4% YoY to $1.20, beating estimates by 2.4%.  

Analysts expect adjusted EPS to grow by 22.3% YoY to $1.33 in Q4 and accelerate to 26.4% growth in Q1 and 183.2% YoY growth in Q2 to $1.36. Looking forward, they expect the adjusted EPS to grow by 61% YoY to $6.35 in 2026 and 45.7% YoY to $9.25 in 2027. 

Cash: 

Q3 free cash flows grew by 208% YoY to $1.53 billion or 17% of revenue, up 10 percentage points YoY.  

Cash of $7.24B and debt of $3.22B. 

Valuation: 

AMD is trading at a forward P/S ratio of 9.2. The company has traded at a minimum of 3.7 and a maximum of 13.3. AMD is trading at mid-range. On the bottom-line, it is trading at a forward P/E ratio of 38.6. The company has traded at a minimum of 19.7 and a maximum of 66.5 in recent years. AMD is trading at mid-range on a forward P/E ratio as well.  

Risks: 

AMD carries execution risk as taking Nvidia head-on is not for the faint of heart. Margins tend to be lower with AMD as one of their tactics is to offer much lower prices than their competitors.  

TSM: Multi-Year Visibility for AI Megatrend 

TSMC is one of the least sensational management teams in the AI space, yet management explicitly called AI a multi-year “megatrend” in their most recent earnings call, with demand now being pulled not just by chip designers, but directly by hyperscale cloud providers seeking to lock in capacity.  

Management stated: 

“Our customers’ customers, who are mainly the cloud service providers, are also providing strong signals and reaching out directly to request the capacity to support their business. Thus, our conviction in the multiyear AI megatrend remains strong, and we believe the demand for semiconductor will continue to be very fundamental.”Thus, our conviction in the multiyear AI megatrend remains strong, and we believe the demand for semiconductor will continue to be very fundamental.” 

When the world’s most advanced foundry says hyperscalers are coming to them directly for capacity, it signals that AI demand remains foundational. Perhaps most importantly, TSM is not a “flip the switch" business model to where demand can be turned on and turned off quickly. Wafer capacity must be planned years in advance, which makes these signals particularly meaningful. 

While 2nm defines the next phase of the roadmap, 3nm remains the node supporting most AI deployments today. The company’s advanced 3nm node offers roughly 15% better performance than 5nm at equal power and transistor density, with die sizes estimated to be ~42% smaller. TSMC also states the 3nm process can reduce power consumption by up to 30%, underscoring power efficiency as a key competitive advantage. 

This efficiency helps deepen TSMC’s moat. While Samsung introduced 3nm chips in 2022, it has lagged TSMC on yield and power efficiency by an estimated 10%–20%. This advantage is reflected in pricing power, with TSMC charging roughly 25% more for 3nm versus 5nm, as customers are willing to pay a premium to avoid Samsung. 

The company entered volume production of its most advanced node, N2, in 4Q 2025, marking a transition from FinFET to gate-all-around (GAA) transistor architecture. By wrapping the gate around all sides of the channel, GAA improves electrostatic control and reduces leakage versus FinFET designs. 

N2 introduces NanoFlex technology, enabling designers to mix cell types and optimize for performance or power by adjusting nanosheet dimensions. According to management on the Q2 2025 earnings call, N2 delivers 10%–15% speed improvement at the same power or 20%–30% power reduction at the same speed, along with more than 15% chip density gains versus N3E. 

As chips migrate to advanced nodes—such as Nvidia’s Rubin moving to 3nm and AMD building CPUs on 2nm—TSMC stands to continue to benefit from rising pricing power, as these nodes command significant wafer premiums in exchange for material performance and power efficiency gains.

Overall Revenue Growth: 

TSMC reported Q4 revenue of $33.73 billion, up 25.5% YoY and 1.9% QoQ and exceeding guidance range for $32.2 billion to $33.4 billion, and coming in $1 billion ahead of estimates.  

Full-year revenue was $122.42 billion, up 35.9% YoY; TSMC guided for Q1 revenue between $34.6-35.8 billion, up 37.9% YoY and 4.4% QoQ (also outpacing Q1 '25 growth of 35.3% YoY); 2026 revenue guided to be up close to 30% YoY in USD 

AI Segment Growth: 

HPC revenue rose 4% QoQ in NT$ and accounted for 55% of revenue in Q4. For FY25, HPC revenue in NT$ was up 48% YoY to 58% of revenue. Recent development in the AI market continue to be very positive. Revenue from AI accelerator accounted for high teens percent of the total revenue in 2025. 

Earnings: 

GAAP EPS up 40.2% YoY in Q4 to $3.14, beating estimates by 5.2%. FY25 EPS was $10.65, up 51.3% YoY; GAAP EPS is expected to be $3.28 in Q1, up 54.7% YoY while FY26 EPS is currently estimated to be $13.05, up 22.5% YoY (subject to revisions) 

Margins: 

GAAP gross margin in Q4 was 62.3%, well above guidance for 59-61%, and up 2.8 points QoQ and 3.3 points YoY on due to cost improvement efforts, favorable foreign exchange rate and high capacity utilization rate. For Q1, TSMC guided gross margin to be 63-65%, up 1.7 points QoQ and 5.2 points YoY at MP. GAAP operating margin was 54%, up 3.4 points QoQ and 5 points YoY; For Q1, TSMC guided operating margin to be 54-56%, up 1 point QoQ and 5.5 points YoY at MP; Net margin was 48.3%, up 2.6 points QoQ and 5.2 points YoY. 

Cash: 

Q4 operating cash flow was $23.4 billion for a 69.4% margin, down 2 points YoY, and FCF was $11.9 billion for a 35.2% margin, up 5.4 points YoY. Cash of $97.6 billion and debt of $31.6 billion. 

Valuation: 

TSM is trading at a forward P/E ratio of 22.9. The company has traded at a minimum of 13.5 and a maximum of 29.6 in recent years, placing the current valuation near the midpoint of that range. 

Notable Risks: 

TSM carries geopolitical risk that has been muted in recent quarters, yet could heat up again at anytime. 

Memory: The Leading Constraint in AI Systems 

Memory is typically a cyclical industry that is lower margin and lumpy, yet it is seeing a newfound resurgence from AI that is strong enough to transform commoditized hardware into a secular trend as the AI economy is built out. AI servers use more DRAM and NAND than traditional servers, relying heavily on high-bandwidth memory (HBM) for training and inference.   

The HBM market is projected to reach $35 billion this year, doubling YoY, with Micron’s September results confirming that the market was well on track to be over $30 billion as of Q3. Looking ahead, the shift to HBM4 with Nvidia’s Rubin architecture and AMD’s MI400 series will represent another important growth lever come 2026 as HBM content per GPU and per rack surges, paving the way for HBM to potentially triple again by as early as 2028.  

Not only is HBM a focal point due to its rising importance and thus increasing content per GPU, but other memory products are quickly coming to the forefront, notably low-power DDR5 memory (LPDDR5X) and data center solid state drives (SSDs).  

Through 2026 and 2027, the outlook for HBM remains fairly positive, with SK , SK Hynix, Samsung and Micron already selling out of HBM3e and HBM4 capacity through the end of 2026. This underscores the robust demand environment stemming from AI accelerators, with Micron seeing HBM bit shipments outpacing DRAM bit growth, but also may limit revenue upside as prices have been contracted over the next four quarters.   

On pricing, HBM4 is expected to carry a significant premium to HBM3e, currently used for Nvidia’s Grace Blackwell chips. Analysts from UBS had estimated that HBM4’s price premium could be as much as 30%, though reports of Samsung’s discussions over HBM4 supply with Nvidia dwarfed that – Samsung was said to be targeting price parity with SK Hynix on HBM4 around $500, up ~50% from the mid-$300s for HBM3e. These price increases will support strong growth as HBM4 volumes ramp.  

Looking forward, industry analysts project the HBM market to reach $98 billion to $100 billion by 2030, representing a 31.5% CAGR from 2024’s $18 billion, outpacing DRAM’s growth by 3X, which is expected to rise at an 11.7% CAGR to $194 billion. As a result, HBM’s share of DRAM revenue is expected to surpass 50%.   

However, in its Q1 report, Micron said it now expects the HBM TAM to reach $100 billion as early as 2028, two years sooner than its prior forecast. This would represent a ~42% CAGR from $35 billion, or more than 10 points faster than the base case forecasts.   

For information on HBM3e and the shift to HBM4, DDR5 prices surging and the rising demand for memory bandwidth, plus why NAND SSDs are surging, read our December report “The AI Memory Boom has Arrived.”The AI Memory Boom has Arrived.” 

Micron: Memory Market Takes the Crown from Compute on Growth 

You would be hard pressed to find another segment of the AI data center industry posting growth to this degree on a sequential basis. Data from TrendForce estimates that the global DRAM market recorded growth of 30.9% QoQ in calendar Q3 to $41.4 billion. In dollar terms, this represented QoQ growth of ~$9.7 billion, or nearly as large of a QoQ jump as Nvidia reported in its most recent quarter.  This growth was driven by “significant increases in conventional DRAM contract prices, higher bit shipments, and growing HBM volumes.”   

For a supplier breakdown, SK Hynix’s revenue grew 12.4% QoQ to $13.75 billion, fueled by seasonal price increases and significant bit shipment growth. Samsung also reported similar significant growth in bit shipments, with revenue up 30.4% QoQ to $13.50 billion. Micron followed with a substantial 53.2% QoQ increase to $10.65 billion, per TrendForce (note that this is for calendar Q3 which does not align with Micron’s fiscal year calendar).   

As of November, TrendForce estimates that DRAM contract prices will accelerate into Q4, predicting conventional DRAM contract prices will surge by another 45% to 50% QoQ, while total contract prices (which includes HBM) will increase by 50% to 55% QoQ – this is a substantial uplift from projections for 18-23% QoQ growth in Q4 at the end of October.   

Contributing to strong pricing is DDR5 DRAM, where prices rapidly skyrocketed – from late September to early November, prices have as much as quadrupled, with impacts felt most on consumer products. Samsung also reportedly just boosted DDR5 prices by 100%, citing no stock left.   

However, revenue growth in Q4 could potentially be lower than pricing growth as bit shipments are projected to decline sequentially due to rapid inventory depletion. DRAM supplier inventory levels are projected to range between two to four weeks, a major crunch from 5.5 weeks on average last quarter and more than 15 weeks at the start of the year.   

Overall Revenue Growth: 

Micron reported record Q1 revenue of $13.64 billion, beating estimates by 5.9% and accelerating 10.7 points to 56.7% YoY growth. Sequentially, growth was 20.6% QoQ, just one point slower than Q4’s 21.7% QoQ growth.  

Revenue accelerated from 46.1% YoY in FQ4 to 56.7% in FQ1 at $13.64B; FQ2 guidance points to sharp acceleration to 132.2% YoY, QoQ growth to accelerate from 20.6% to 37.1% QoQ. Some analysts are saying this is the biggest headliner beat they’ve seen since Nvidia’s 2023 moment.

AI Segment Growth: 

DRAM products (within that HBM and LPDDR5X) were the primary driver of Q1’s results, with revenue up 69% YoY and 20% QoQ to $10.8 billion, or 79% of revenue.

DRAM revenue up 69% YoY and 20% QoQ to $10.58B in Q1

Micron’s Cloud Memory Business Unit (CMBU), which consists of its HBM, high-capacity dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs), and low-power server DRAM solutions, saw Q1 revenue of $5.28 billion, up 99.5% YoY and 16.3% QoQ

HBM, high-capacity DIMMs and LP server DRAM revenue reached $10 billion as of Q4, up more than fivefold YoY

Earnings: 

In Q1, Micron reported GAAP EPS of $4.60, up 175% YoY; this also is a sharp uptick from $2.83 in Q4.  For Q2, Micron guided for GAAP EPS to be $8.19, +/- $0.20, nearly 74% ahead of estimates for $4.71 and corresponding to YoY growth of almost 481%, a 306 point acceleration. GAAP EPS growth is expected to remain >250% for both Q3 and Q4 to $9.37 and $10.04.  

For the full year, Micron is expected to deliver GAAP EPS of $31.17, more than quadrupling from $7.59 in fiscal 2025. Earnings estimates also moved more than 60% higher following Q1’s report and Q2’s blowout guide, moving from $19.42 to the now $31.17 estimate. 

Margins: 

GAAP gross margin in Q1 was 56%, up 17.6 points YoY, aided by the strong growth in CMBU which carried a 66% gross margin in the quarter. For Q2, GAAP gross margin was guided to be 67% at midpoint, an 11 point sequential expansion and up 31.2 points YoY.  

GAAP operating margin was 45%, up 12.7 points QoQ and 20 points YoY, again aided by CMBU which carried a 55% margin in the quarter. For Q2, Micron implied operating margin to be 58.7%, up 12.7 points QoQ and 36.7 points YoY, signaling strong tailwinds from surging DRAM prices.  

GAAP net margin was 38.4% in Q1, up 10.1 points QoQ and nearly 17 points YoY. 

Cash: 

Operating cash flow was $8.41 billion in Q1, up more than 159% YoY and nearly 47% QoQ. OCF margin was 61.7%, up 10 points QoQ and up 24.4 points YoY.  

Adjusted free cash flow was $3.91 billion in Q1, up sharply from $803 million in Q4 and $112 million in the year ago quarter. Adjusted FCF margin was 28.6%, up from 7.1% in the prior quarter and 1.3% in the year ago quarter.  

Micron reported total cash and equivalents of $12.0 billion and total debt of $11.76 billion. 

Valuation: 

Micron is now trading at peak multiples on the top line as shares continue to rally, currently valued 6.5x forward PS, in line with the highest level it achieved in the summer of 2024, and well above its 3.6x average multiple over the past five years. 

However, on the bottom line, Micron is trading at a much more reasonable 12.8x forward PE multiple due to the strong margin expansion and expected 300% earnings growth this fiscal year to $33+. This is notably below Micron’s 2025 peaks around 16x forward PE. 

Notable Risks: 

Sharply rising DRAM prices from tight supply could cut into demand for consumer electronics products, which is Micron’s second largest segment and growth driver (Mobile and Client) with nearly $4.3 billion in revenue and a 47% operating margin in Q1. Any demand softness from price hikes could be felt more acutely in 2026 with forecasts now pointing to smartphone and PC shipments declining YoY. 

SanDisk: Marketing-Leading Returns in 2026; Can the Stock Repeat? 

Overview: 

On a broader level, data center/enterprise SSDs are often overlooked but equally critical as HBM when it comes to AI training and inference. This is because data center SSDs offer higher read-write speeds critical for accessing and transferring data rapidly, along with higher performance and energy efficiency, vital factors for larger-scale AI training and inference workloads.    

Nvidia is positioning NVMe SSDs to become the backbone for the Inference Context Memory Storage architecture discussed at CES, there is the potential for SSD suppliers to see solid medium/long-term tailwinds from increased SSD capacity requirements in inference-optimized deployments over the next few years.  

For example, Bernstein estimates that Huang’s CES comments on SSDs and KV cache requirements suggest an additional 16TB per GPU, compared to 3-4TB per GPU today, or 4-5X growth. This will be more weighted towards year-end and into 2027 as ICMS rolls out with Rubin.   

Similar to DRAM, data center SSD shipments and prices were strong in Q3, driven by hyperscaler demand for AI infrastructure and general-purpose servers. Revenue from the top five companies – Samsung, SK, Micron, Kioxia and SanDisk – rose ~28% QoQ to a new record at $6.54 billion, per TrendForce. Notably, this was broad-based strength, with growth at the five firms all ranging between 26-30% QoQ.    

For Q4, there are a few dynamics in play that are likely to keep prices and thus revenue growth strong. For example, supplier inventories are expected to have fallen sharply, from 10-15 weeks in early Q3 to just 7-10 weeks at the start of Q4, which was said to be ‘below healthy levels’, with enterprise SSD supply growth substantially lagging demand. SanDisk says that its storage-focused SSD is “growing in demand with 2 hyperscaler qualifications underway and a third hyperscaler along with a major storage OEM planned for calendar year '26.”  

In November, TLC and QLC SSDs reportedly experienced strong price increases, with 1 TB TLC SSDs seeing sharp increases and the “most significant shortage due to persistent enterprise SSD demand.” 512 GB TLCs were estimated to see the most significant price hikes at ~65% MoM, while the QLC supply chain tightened and forced prices higher.   

Additionally, TrendForce points out that these inventory and demand dynamics mean “supply shortages in 2026 are becoming increasingly apparent,” providing an additional lever for SSD prices to rise through next year and support more revenue growth as long as inventories and bit shipments do not hinder that.   

Overall Revenue Growth: 

SanDisk reported a strong sequential revenue acceleration in its fiscal Q1, driven by NAND demand outpacing supply and increasing demand in its data center, edge and consumer end markets. Q1 revenue increased 22.6% YoY and 21.4% QoQ to $2.31 billion, accelerating from 8% YoY and 12.2% QoQ growth in fiscal Q4. Higher-than-expected bit growth drove the outperformance in the quarter relative to guidance of $2.1-2.2 billion, per management. Next quarter is expected to see 16.5% QoQ at the $2.69 billion consensus. 

AI Segment Growth: 

SanDisk’s data center revenue, as mentioned above, declined (10%) YoY but rose 26% QoQ to $269 million, driven by increasing demand for its ‘Stargate’ enterprise SSD product line. However, revenue contribution remains small, at less than 12% of revenue.   

Management also increased their forecast for data center exabyte growth, explaining that last quarter, exabyte growth expectations were in the mid-20% range, but now are in the mid-40% range. As a result, data center is expected to be the largest market in NAND on an exabyte basis in 2026, surpassing mobile.   

SanDisk’s Edge segment was the primary growth driver in Q1 with revenue up 30% YoY and 26% QoQ to $1.39 billion, driven by increasing NAND content in PCs and smartphones and a positive PC refresh cycle. Consumer revenue rose 27% YoY and 11% QoQ to $652 million, while data center revenue was down (10%) YoY but up 26% QoQ to $269 million.  

Earnings: 

SanDisk stands out for its strong expected earnings growth through fiscal 2026 and fiscal 2027, with adjusted EPS expected to reach more than $21 by then, or >7X higher than the $2.99 it earned in fiscal 2025.   

Q1 GAAP EPS was $0.75, a strong improvement from a ($0.16) loss in Q4, though this was down (49%) YoY from $1.46 in the year ago quarter as margins remained lower YoY. Adjusted EPS was $1.22, up 321% QoQ but down (33%) YoY.   

For Q2, SanDisk guided for adjusted EPS of $3.00 to $3.40, up more than 162% QoQ. Adjusted EPS is expected to further increase to $3.78 in fiscal Q3 and $4.82 in fiscal Q4.    

For fiscal 2026, SanDisk is expected to generate $13.29 in adjusted EPS, up 344.6% YoY, while GAAP EPS is projected to be $11.53, up from ($11.32) in FY25 due to the spin off. Fiscal 2027 is expected to see earnings power surpass $21, with GAAP EPS estimated to be up 86% to $21.47 and adjusted EPS up nearly 62% to $21.50. 

Margins: 

Margins are lower YoY compared to pre-spinoff margins, but Q1 saw strong sequential margin expansion that is expected to accelerate in Q2.    

Q1 GAAP gross margin was 29.8%, down 8.8 points YoY but up 3.6 points QoQ. Adjusted gross margin was 29.9%, down 9 points YoY but up 3.5 points QoQ.   

GAAP operating margin was 8.3%, down 8.3 points YoY but up 5.6 points QoQ. Adjusted operating margin was 10.6%, down 8.2 points YoY but up 5.3 points QoQ.   

For Q2, SanDisk guided adjusted gross margin to be 41-43%, or up just over 12 points QoQ at midpoint on higher pricing and cost reduction tailwinds, while adjusted operating margin is implied to be 24.2% at the midpoint of opex guidance, or up 13.6 points QoQ. Fab startup costs are expected to transition from headwinds to tailwinds during the quarter, potentially aiding more margin expansion into fiscal Q3 and Q4. 

Cash: 

Operating cash flow was $488 million in Q1 for a 21.1% margin, up from a (7%) margin in the year ago quarter and a 4.9% margin in Q4.   

Adjusted free cash flow was $438 million in Q1 for a 19% margin, up from a (10.5%) margin in the year ago quarter and 2.6% in Q4.   

SanDisk’s total gross capex to support the JV was $387 million in Q1, though its cash capex spend was only $40 million (1.7% of revenue) as the remainder was funded through external sources such as subsidies or tool depreciation recorded in COGS.  

Cash and equivalents totaled $1.44 billion while debt totaled $1.35 billion.  

Valuation: 

SanDisk’s valuation is somewhat hard to pin down given the company’s limited history on the public markets after its February spinoff, and its 1,000% rally in the past six months. On the top line, SanDisk is trading at 6.6x forward PS, having traded as low as 0.6x last summer and with an average multiple of 1.6x for its limited public history.  

On the bottom line, SanDisk is trading at 36.3x forward PE, having traded as low as 3x last August with an average around 13.3x. 

Notable Risks: 

The NAND flash market has historically been quite volatile, and is shifting from significant oversupply in 2023 to expectations for substantial supply shortages through 2026. However, if NAND capacity begins to come online quickly through next year, or if demand for PCs and smartphones falters due to rising memory prices, the NAND cycle could reverse and lead to pricing pressures cutting into revenue growth and margins. SanDisk also has limited AI data center exposure, contributing with <12% of revenue last quarter. 

AI Networking Stocks

Please refer to the section above entitled “Rubin Redefines AI Networking as a Bandwidth-First Constraint” for an update on the AI Networking trend, which is a Top 3 trend for the I/O Fund in 2026. 

Lumentum: EMLs Power 400G/800G Transceivers as Networking Scales 

EMLs are a critical component with Nvidia’s Blackwell generation, as the scale-up in GPU counts per rack from eight to 72 and subsequent increases in bandwidth and switch density will require low-power, efficient high-speed optics. The power advantages over SiPho also come to the forefront as power consumption becomes a central concern in scaling AI data centers, with Blackwell doubling power consumption versus Hopper at 140kW per rack. 

EMLs are the main driver for Lumentum’s growth as these are good for short-to-medium reach inside data centers up to 2km and a strong choice for 400G and 800G optical transceivers, with the company having begun its 100G EML ramp for these data rates in early 2024. EML laser shipments reached a fresh record in fiscal Q1 2026, driven once again by 100G speeds and an increase in 200G shipments. 

Lumentum’s Q1 provided more confirmation that EML laser shipments are ramping in full force, with another record quarter driven by 100G speeds and an increase in 200G shipments. EMLs have been the primary driver of growth so far for Lumentum, though the supply-demand imbalance is widening due to tight indium-phosphide (InP) capacity. Looking ahead to 2026, InP capacity will be a key factor to focus on as Lumentum is targeting 40% capacity growth over the next few quarters, with the potential for this to drive even stronger revenue growth. 

One important discussion on EMLs is that the supply-demand imbalance continues to widen, meaning that substantial growth in capacity through 2026 should quickly convert to revenue. CEO Michael Hurlston explained that “last quarter, I think we characterized it as roughly a 20% shortfall relative to total customer demand. Even with the add in supply, I would say that number has increased to 25% to 30%. We are quite a bit short right now relative to the customer demand.” 

On the positive side, Lumentum shared that while its indium phosphide fab is fully allocated due to high demand, it has made “better-than-expected progress on yields and throughput and now see a line of sight to add approximately 40% more unit capacity over the next few quarters.” CEO Michael Hurlston clarified at UBS’ tech conference that “we gave in the last earnings call a new benchmark saying, over the next 3 quarters, meaning our December, March and June quarters, we expected to add that 40%. So that’s a forward-looking statement where we’d expect an increase in capacity of 40% on what already is a doubled number.” 

Management expects to be well positioned for both EML and CW lasers ramping for 1.6T transceivers, as its capacity is interchangeable between the two components, despite management noting a difficulty in forecasting how the two will ramp – the primary takeaway here is that even if faster data rates such as 1.6T are less dependent on EMLs, management believes there is more than enough content for them to do well. 

Overall Revenue Growth: 

Lumentum fulfilled its guidance for a >$500 million revenue quarter in calendar 2025, reporting a record $533.8 million in revenue in fiscal Q1, beating estimates by just 1.4%. Revenue growth accelerated 2.5 points to 58.4% YoY through QoQ growth slowed to 11%. Lumentum guided for $630 to $670 million in revenue in Q2, accelerating to 61.6% YoY and 21.8% QoQ, whereas consensus estimates were pegged at almost 40% growth to $561.5 million.  

On the financials side, the number one item was Q2’s impressive 22% QoQ revenue growth guide to $650 million at midpoint. This is significant as Lumentum is reaching its $600 million quarterly revenue target two quarters ahead of schedule, with this also marking its highest revenue in company history. The 22% QoQ guide would also reflect Lumentum’s fastest sequential growth since the September 2020 quarter.  

To put in perspective how strong Lumentum’s growth curve is, current estimates for the June 2026 quarter sit at $740.3 million, more than 23% ahead of the company’s target revenue. This is also up from $689.9 million on November 7, a 7.3% revision higher in less than one week.  

As discussed previously, Lumentum guided for $630 to $670 million in revenue in Q2, accelerating to 61.6% YoY and 21.8% QoQ, whereas consensus estimates were pegged at almost 40% growth to $561.5 million. 

AI Segment Growth: 

Components revenue rose 18.4% QoQ and 63.9% YoY to $379.2 million, fueled by “robust demand inside the data center”, strong momentum for DCI products, and record EML shipments. Looking through 2026, Lumentum expects another breakout year for laser chip shipments, supported by “better-than-expected progress on yields and throughput” providing “line of sight to add approximately 40% more unit capacity over the next few quarters.” Management added that they also “expect a significant increase in shipment volumes in the second half of calendar 2026” for ultra-high power laser assemblies, which are currently in the initial ramp phase.  

Management provided a deeper discussion on margins moving through 2026, with product pricing from supply-demand imbalances serving as a strong lever for margin expansion:  

“I think we're moving the margin line up. Pricing, obviously, is a lever. And when you look at that very, very carefully, I think what you see in the guide is some pricing, very targeted price increases happening. I think as you look out next year in 2026, our agreements with customers will include more pricing, more broad-based price increases, just given the supply-demand imbalance.” 

Earnings: 

Lumentum reported a razor thin $0.05 in GAAP EPS, while adjusted EPS of $1.10, up 511% YoY, beat estimates by 6.8%. 

For Q2, Lumentum guided for adjusted EPS in a wider range of $1.30 to $1.50, up 233% YoY, coming in well ahead of the $1.16 estimate at the midpoint. 

Lumentum did not provide a full year adjusted EPS guide, though consensus now sits at $5.35, up from $4.90 and pointing to growth of 160% YoY. 

Margins: 

GAAP gross margin was 34.0%, in Q1, up nearly 11 points YoY and 0.7 points QoQ. Adjusted gross margin was 39.4%, up 6.6 points YoY and 1.6 points QoQ. 

GAAP operating margin was 1.3%, up nearly 26 points YoY and 3 points QoQ. Adjusted operating margin was 18.7%, up 15.7 points YoY and 3.7 points QoQ, ahead of guidance for 16-17.5%. For Q2, management guided for continued expansion to 20-22%. 

GAAP net margin was 0.8%, up 25.3 points YoY and not comparable QoQ due to an income tax benefit in Q4. Adjusted net margin was 16.2%, up 12.6 points YoY and 3 points QoQ. 

Cash: 

Operating cash flow was $57.9 million in Q1 for a 10.8% margin, down from 11.8% a year ago and 13.3% in Q4. Free cash flow was ($18.3 million) for a (3.4%) margin, up from (10.2%) a year ago but down from 2.1% in Q4. 

Cash and equivalents were $1.12 billion while debt was $3.24 billion. 

Valuation: 

Lumentum is valued at peak multiples, with shares now trading above a 10x forward PS multiple, up from the 4x range in September and October. This is also 3x its five-year average forward PS of 3.3x and at peak levels.  

On the bottom line, Lumentum is trading at 64.6x forward PE, above its prior peaks around 50x and above its 40.6x average over the past five years. Similar to the top-line, shares have seen a pretty rapid expansion from the 25-30x range in October.  

Notable Risks: 

Lumentum has many competitors in the optical transceiver space, while navigating rather severe InP and EML capacity shortages may pose a near-term challenge as the supply-demand imbalance continues to widen. Cash flows are also thin with FCF negative, and debt is around 3x of cash.  

Coherent: InP Capacity to Double 

Overview: 

Coherent is not nearly as flashy as Lumentum when it comes to revenue growth or even data center growth, yet the company is sitting in a prime position moving through 2026 as the industry navigates extremely tight indium phosphide (InP) capacity coupled with elevated demand for InP-based EML lasers. This is because Coherent is preparing to double indium-phosphide capacity via a multi-faceted expansion plan with multiple facilities ramping output in unison, while shifting to a larger wafer size that can deliver 4X output per wafer at half the cost.  

This dynamic is expected to help drive a reacceleration in Coherent’s data center segment to 10% QoQ growth next quarter, a notable uplift from 4% this quarter, along with margin expansion driving solid adjusted EPS leverage. Management also stated they expect “strong sequential growth through the balance of this fiscal year given very strong demand and improving supply.”  

On the product side, Coherent sees strong demand for both its 800G and 1.6T transceivers, with 1.6T expected to drive a significant portion of the guided sequential growth. This first wave of 1.6T growth is expected to be split between both EML-based and CW laser-based silicon photonics transceivers, with Coherent able to benefit from both as it can quickly shift capacity for whichever customers prefer.  

For Coherent’s AI-related revenue exposure, Datacenter and Communications account for ~69% of total revenue. This also includes some contribution from telecom so is not an exact figure yet provides a rough idea as to Coherent’s AI exposure. 

Revenue: 

Coherent delivered 17.3% YoY and 3.4% QoQ revenue growth in fiscal Q1 to $1.58 billion, beating estimates by nearly 3%. On a pro-forma basis excluding the $33 million in Q1 revenue from the now-divested Aerospace & Defense unit, revenue growth was 19% YoY and 6% QoQ.  

For Q2, Coherent guided for revenue between $1.56 billion to $1.70 billion, which on the headline figure would be decelerating to 13.6% YoY and 3.2% QoQ at midpoint, before reaccelerating to 15.9% by Q4. 

However, our internal pro-forma estimate shows a better trajectory for revenue through fiscal 2026 – pro-forma growth may decelerate slightly to the 17.4% YoY and ~5.7% QoQ in Q2, before reaccelerating to nearly 21% by Q4, the highest growth rate in the past five quarters. 

AI Revenue: 

Coherent’s Datacenter and Communications revenue rose 26.2% YoY and 7% QoQ to $1.09 billion, accounting for ~69% of revenue. Growth has decelerated rather steadily since Q1 FY2025’s 68% YoY print. 

Datacenter revenue rose 4% QoQ and 23% YoY. As mentioned previously, Datacenter growth was constrained by InP laser supply, with management expecting QoQ growth to accelerate to 10% in Q2 and remain strong through the end of the fiscal year. 

Communications revenue, which includes telecom and data center interconnect (DCI) rose 11% QoQ and 55% YoY, driven primarily by DCI products. Management said they witnessed strong growth in demand for ZR/ZR+ DCI products, with 100G, 400G and 800G products expected to continue ramping through fiscal 2026. 

Earnings: 

Fueled by margin improvements, Coherent reported a solid adjusted earnings beat in Q1, with adjusted EPS rising 73% YoY and 16% QoQ to $1.16, beating estimates by 11.3%. 

For Q2, Coherent guided for adjusted EPS between $1.10 to $1.30, decelerating sharply to 26.3% YoY at the $1.20 midpoint, and only showing a small sequential improvement. 

Margins: 

Coherent made solid progress on the margin front and expects gross margins to strengthen towards 42% with the ramp of its 6-inch InP wafers and higher margin 1.6T transceivers, and continued cost cutting measures. 

GAAP gross margin was 36.6%, expanding 2.5 points YoY and 0.9 points sequentially. Adjusted gross margin came in at 38.7%, above the midpoint of guidance for 37.5-39.5%, expanding two points YoY and 0.6 points sequentially. Management said the gross margin expansion was driven by “cost reductions and product input costs as well as yield improvements,” while pricing optimization was also a meaningful contributor.  

GAAP operating margin was 16.4%, up nearly 11 points YoY and 16 points QoQ, though this was impacted by a $115 million gain from the Aerospace divestment. Adjusted operating margin was 19.5%, up 3.4 points YoY and 1.5 points QoQ.  

GAAP net margin was 14.3%, up 12.4 points YoY and more than 21 points QoQ; adjusted net margin was 14%, up 3.8 points YoY and 1.4 points QoQ. 

Cash: 

Cash flows were also thin with OCF margin down nearly 10 points YoY, and FCF widened deeper into negative territory due to capex for the upcoming capacity expansion. 

Operating cash flow was $46 million in Q1, down from $130.3 million in Q4 and the first time falling below $100 million in the past seven quarters. OCF margin was 2.9%, down from 11.4% a year ago and 8.5% in the prior quarter. 

Free cash flow was ($57.9 million), widening from ($1 million) in Q4 and a stark contrast to $61 million in the year ago quarter, driven by capex of $103.9 million. FCF margin was (3.7%), widening from (0.1%) in the prior quarter and down from 4.5% a year ago. 

Cash and equivalent totaled $852.8 million, while debt was $3.31 billion, down from $3.69 billion in the prior quarter  

As a result, Coherent has made substantial progress on its debt leverage ratio, paying down $400 million in debt in Q1. On that note, Coherent’s debt has declined approximately $1 billion over the last two years, from $4.29 billion in Q1 FY24 to $3.31 billion this quarter – a nearly 23% reduction.  

Coherent’s debt leverage ratio has now improved to 1.7x, down from 2x in the prior quarter and 2.4x a year ago 

Valuation: 

Similar to Lumentum, Coherent is trading at peak multiples on the top and bottom line. Shares are valued at 5x forward PS, more than double its 2.2x average over the last five years and a significant discount to Lumentum’s 10x multiple likely due to Coherent’s lower growth.  

On the bottom line, Coherent is trading at 42.5x forward PE, just slightly below its June 2024 peak at 45x, though this is also well above its five-year average forward PE of 26.3x. 

Risks: 

Coherent’s data center revenue growth was soft in Q1 at 4% QoQ, though management expects this to return to 10% QoQ in Q2 and remain strong, thus the company needs to execute on this given the multi-faceted tailwinds from 1.6T transceiver demand and InP capacity expansion.   

Astera Labs: Scorpio-X Set to Provide a Boost Amid Tough Comps 

Overview: 

In an effort to identify a catalyst that can sustain Astera’s exceptional growth, it would be this product that does so. The X-series is used to interconnect GPUs for higher GPU utilization, resulting in higher ASPs. 

Regarding the X-Series: “And this one, like Mike noted, it's a greenfield use case, meaning if you keep Nvidia and NV Switch aside, everyone else is starting to build configurations that are obviously going to need some kind of a switching functionality, which is what we are addressing with our X Series device.”  

And on that basis, the X-Series will always be a much more valuable, much more higher ASP product than a P-Series.” 

Notably, Astera maintains their largest opportunity for the X-Series is on the custom silicon side although they foresee hyperscalers wanting to customize their racks in a way that prevents vendor lock-in from both Nvidia and Broadcom.  

Regarding Ethernet Scale-up Networking (ESUN), ESUN is attempting to make Ethernet work for scale-up whereas UALink was built from scratch for scale-up. The primary benefit ESUN offers is to move quicker than UALink (in the most recent earnings report, ALAB stated it’ll be 2027 for UALink to be fully deployed).  

However, in the meantime, Astera’s PCIe solutions are in high demand and deployable now. Even if ESUN moves faster commercially, there is a performance gap that helps to ensure that Astera’s positioning with PCIe/CXL remains intact. That performance gap is best described as the low latency required for what are the most in-demand AI workloads today – those that require memory pooling and GPU-to-GPU communication.   

For more information on how the relevancy of PCIe will persist, read more information on this topic under the Top 3 trends section under AI Networking. 

Revenue: 

Revenue grew by 103.9% YoY and 20.1% QoQ to $230.6M, beating estimates by 11.7%. This maintained Q2’s sequential growth rate of 20%, though YoY decelerated by ~46 points as the company begins to lap tougher comps on a dollar basis.  

For Q4, Astera guided for $245 million to $253 million in revenue, coming in well ahead of estimates for $216.5 million and pointing to YoY growth of 77% and QoQ growth of 8%, driven by continued PCIe 6 momentum and robust growth from Taurus Ethernet SCMs. This would technically mark the company’s first <100% growth quarter since the end of 2024. 

AI Revenue: 

Scorpio P-Series represents 10% of revenue now, yet management stated it will quickly double to exit the year at 20% of revenue. From there, management has implied Scorpio X will exceed Scorpio P’s revenue percentage. Net-net, that means Scorpio will reach 50% of revenue sometime in H1 2026 up from effectively 0% of revenue in H1 2025.  

The longer refresher on Scorpio P-Series and Scorpio X-Series is necessary because the primary catalyst we identified earlier this year has not even ramped yet. Scorpio P-Series only began shipping this quarter and Scorpio X-Series will begin to ship next year. 

Earnings: 

Adjusted EPS grew by 113% YoY to $0.49, beating estimates by 25.6%. GAAP Operating Margin Expands ~32 Points YoY to 24%.  

With the strong expansion in GAAP net margin, Astera delivered a 92.3% beat on GAAP EPS, reporting $0.50 in Q3 versus the $0.26 estimate. Adjusted EPS was $0.49, up 113% YoY and solidly ahead of the $0.39 estimate.  

For Q4, Astera guided for $0.20 in GAAP EPS, below the $0.26 estimate due to a 45% income tax rate. Adjusted EPS was guided at $0.51, up 38% YoY. This guidance would bring FY25 GAAP EPS to $1.17 (versus estimates for $0.96) and adjusted EPS to $1.77 (versus estimates for $1.58). 

Margins: 

Operating margin improved 31.9 percentage points YoY to 24% and adjusted operating margin improved by 9.3 percentage points YoY to 41.7% driven by strong operating leverage.  

GAAP gross margin was 76.2%, ahead of guidance for 75%. This marked a marginal 0.4 point sequential improvement but a 1.5 point YoY contraction. Adjusted gross margin was 76.4%.  

GAAP operating margin was 24.0%, well ahead of guidance for 17.9%, and expanding 3.3 points QoQ and nearly 32 points YoY. This YoY expansion from (7.9%) in Q3 ’24 is quite impressive considering the company was reporting triple-digit revenue growth in each quarter; this also reinforces that the company is comfortably GAAP profitable. Adjusted operating margin was 41.7%, up 2.5 points QoQ and 9.3 points YoY.  

For Q4, Astera guided for slight sequential moderation in margins down the line, with gross margin guidance at 75%, in line with prior quarter guidance. GAAP operating margin was guided to be 22.2% at midpoint, down 1.8 points QoQ but still up more than 22 points YoY. Adjusted operating margin was guided at 39.9%, down 1.8 points QoQ but up 5.6 points YoY. 

Cash: 

The company free cash flows grew by 41% YoY to $65.8M. Cash of $1.13B and debt is Nil.  

Cash flow margins contracted sharply Q3, though this was primarily driven by a large QoQ increase in accounts receivable, providing an extra layer of confidence in the upcoming revenue acceleration in the next couple of quarters.  

Operating cash flow was $49.1 million for a 6.4% margin, though OCF margin had been >22% for the past five quarters. The sharp contraction was primarily due to a $161 million sequential increase in accounts receivable.  

Free cash flow was $2.4 million for a 0.3% margin, down from 20.2% in the prior quarter due to the jump in AR. 

Valuation: 

Unlike many of the other networking stocks on this Top 15 list, Astera is below its average multiples, with shares nearly one-third off the highs. On the top line, Astera trades at 23.8x forward PS, around 10% below its five-year average of 26.6x and far below its 50x peak at the highs of $250 in September.  

On the bottom line, Astera trades at 71.5x forward PE, nearly 13% below its 82x five-year average multiple, with shares having traded as high as 140x in September and as low as 30x last April. 

Risks: 

Astera has faced some fears in the past that ESUN will become a viable third option due to the familiarity of Ethernet, though PCIe solutions remain in high demand and likely will remain relevant in next-gen GPU systems. On the financials, Astera does have to face decelerating growth rates from tougher comps, with current consensus pointing to 77% growth next quarter to 36% by the end of this year.  

SiPho Stock Could See 8X increase in Orders 

Our Advanced Market Signals members received an analysis and real-time trade alerts for a supplier of optical modules that has outlined plans to expand capacity for 800G and 1.6T products by 8.5× by year-end. Management reiterated on both Q1 and Q2 earnings calls that the expansion remains on schedule. Equipment ordered earlier this year has begun arriving, and production is expected to scale through the second half. 

This expansion stands out in the context of an industry that is growing materially, but not at that rate. Industry demand for 800G and 1.6T optics is generally expected to grow at a multiple closer to 3× this year. A capacity ramp that exceeds industry growth implies a strategic effort to capture incremental share as volumes move higher in 2025 and into 2026. 

To learn more—including how this company is rapidly expanding its facilities, why that capacity supports a faster ramp than the broader networking trend, and the resulting revenue implications—join Advanced Market Signals today.Advanced Market Signals today. Members receive real-time trade alerts, access to the I/O Fund’s momentum stock list (including this silicon photonics name), and weekly webinars every Thursday at 4:30 p.m. ET. To Join Advanced with 30% off, please click here to email usplease click here to email us

Key Supplier to the Next Ethernet Upgrade Cycle 

On the I/O Fund’s Discovery tier, we recently covered a Broadcom networking supplier that sits at the center of Broadcom’s Ethernet roadmap, supplying customized systems to two major hyperscalers plus a major deal with OpenAI for 2027. 

Growth opportunities are primarily centered around its high-bandwidth Ethernet switch portfolio focused on back-end networking, with the company being the leading supplier with 41% share of the >200G switch market through Q2, and with 55% share of the custom switch market (up from 40% in 2024).   

The back-end networking positioning is important for this Key Supplier stock as it means the company is exposed to the faster-growing segment of Ethernet switching – the back-end TAM is forecast to grow at a 56% CAGR through 2029 on scale-out, and potentially soon, scale-up demand, whereas front-end (user-facing) is forecast to grow at a 20% CAGR. 

The next leg of growth is expected with the transition to 1.6T switches, which will introduce higher system complexity, new cooling architectures, and expanded content per rack. Initial customer ramps are expected to begin in late 2026, with broader adoption unfolding through 2027. 

To learn more about this company’s positioning within high-bandwidth AI networking and how it fits into the upcoming 800G and 1.6T upgrade cycle, access the full write-up in the Discovery tier. To subscribe to Discovery with 40% off, click here to email usclick here to email us or email premium@io-fund.com and mention code DISCOVERY40DISCOVERY40

AI Energy Stocks 

Please reference above under our Top 3 trends for thematic commentary on Tech’s biggest bottleneck: AI Energy. 

Bloom Energy: 

Overview: 

Bloom Energy needs no introduction to our Research Members as it was one of our biggest winners last year with a return of 376%. Knox carefully layered in at the lows, outperforming Bloom’s 2025 returns of 291%. Even when our trims proved to be too conservative, we gladly bought back near the levels we sold. 

Grid interconnection timelines are now misaligned with AI deployment timelines. Utilities often project power delivery in 2028–2029, while hyperscalers need capacity in 2025–2027. Bloom Energy is bridging an important power gap in data center expansion as grid access and delays is becoming a limiting factor. What they offer is onsite power generation through solid oxide fuel cells that are behind the meter to reduce dependency on the grid. 

The thesis can be summarized in three words: time to power. Here is what management described as to the competitive advantages regarding time to power for solid oxide fuel cells: “A big shift in our business today is time to power. We are providing solutions to meet the urgent needs of our customers who cannot fulfill their power needs from the grid. In these cases, we rapidly book, build, ship, install and power sites for our customers in a matter of months, a much faster timeline than a grid connection.” 

For example, over the past quarter, Bloom stood power up for Oracle in 55 days – lightning fast compared to other power solutions. The company counts one massive energy partner Brookfield, two hyperscalers and one neocloud as customers (ORCL, AWS via AEP and CRWV) plus they hinted of a fourth large customer in the previous earnings call via a gas company partnership. Additionally, Brookfield is a capital partner that can bring Bloom Energy from the MW-level to the GW-level. 

Higher utilization rather than relying only on capacity growth can also help drive higher revenue for Bloom. For example, there was a hint on the last earnings call that despite doubling capacity, Bloom may be able to expand revenue by 4X over the coming quarters, stating: “As we have previously announced, we are doubling our capacity to 2 gigawatts by December 2026, which will support about 4x our 2025 revenue. That expansion is all systems go. Bloom's capacity will not be a bottleneck for our customers.” 

Overall Revenue Growth: 

Bloom smashed analysts' revenue estimates by 21.3%. The company reported record revenue of $519.05 million, versus estimates of $428.07 million. Revenue grew by a solid 57.1% YoY and 29.4% sequential growth, accelerating 37.6 percentage points from the previous quarter’s YoY growth of 19.5%. 

AI Segment Growth: 

Products revenue grew by 64% YoY to $384.3 million, accelerating from the 31% growth in Q2.  

Installation revenue growth spiked 105% YoY to $65.78 million, accelerating from a (13%) decline in Q2 

Earnings: 

GAAP EPS came at ($0.10) in Q3 compared to ($0.06) in the same period last year. GAAP EPS was negatively impacted by a one-time loss related to unconsolidated affiliates of ($19.6 million) or a ($0.08) per share.  

The company reported adjusted EPS of $0.15, beating estimates by 47%, and was up from ($0.01) in the same period last year and $0.10 in the previous quarter. Bloom reported strong profits growth driven by operational efficiency, product cost improvements, and operating leverage.  

Analysts expect adjusted EPS of $0.31 in Q4 and $0.04 in Q1. Looking forward, adjusted EPS is expected to grow strongly by 84.7% YoY to $0.93 in 2026 and 122.4% to $2.07 in 2027. 

Margins: 

Q3 gross profits grew by 92.7% YoY to $151.68 million or a gross margin of 29.2%, up 5.4 percentage points YoY and 2.5 percentage points sequentially. Similarly, adjusted gross margins showed strong YoY and sequential improvement, primarily driven by product cost improvements and manufacturing efficiencies.  

Operating margins improved 4.4 percentage points YoY and 2.4 percentage points sequentially to 1.5%, primarily driven by strong operational efficiencies. Adjusted operating profits grew by 470% YoY to $46.2 million or an adjusted operating margin of 8.9% compared to 2.5% in the same period last year and 7.1% in the previous quarter. 

Cash: 

Q3 operating cash flows were $19.67 million or 3.8% of revenue compared to ($69.5M) or (21%) of revenue in the same period last year. Operating cash flow improvement was primarily driven by higher profits and working capital improvements.  

Strong operating cash flows also led to higher free cash flows. Q3 free cash flow was $7.4 million or 1.4% of revenue compared to ($83.8 million) or (25.4%) in the same period last year. 

Valuation: 

Bloom Energy is trading at a forward P/S ratio of 13.8. The company has traded at a minimum of 1.4 and a maximum of 17.8. Bloom Energy is trading at premium valuation as the company is a key player in solving the AI data center power bottleneck. 

Notable Risks: 

The valuation is a risk, yet we are less concerned as Bloom Energy is a key beneficiary of the AI-driven energy demand. 

GEV: Nat Gas Behemoth – Boring but Steady 

GE Vernova is the world’s largest gas turbine supplier at 25% ahead of Schneider at 24%. Even still, GEV nearly tripled its gas turbine equipment this past quarter – a statement that has us sitting up in our seats. Per the earnings call: “Power orders grew 44%, led by Gas Power equipment nearly tripling year-over-year.”  

Also, consider that we have been covering Bitcoin miners and other energy sources that can quickly help hyperscalers secure powered shells in the 1GW to 3GW range – yet GEV has 50 GW in backlog for gas equipment contracts with expectations the backlog will reach 60 GW by the end of this year. In other words, the chances that GEV is not a significant player in supplying energy to data centers for many years to come is nil.   

In a bid to supply options quickly to alleviate bottlenecks, GEV is also shipping aeroderivative gas turbine packages and doing extensive R&D on a small modular reactor (SMR) design. As detailed below, how exactly GEV evolves to solve the crucial bottleneck around AI power consumption is not set in stone, rather the company is experimenting rapidly with how to leverage their deep experience in natural gas, electrification and renewables like wind to meet global demand.

Overall Revenue Growth: 

GE Vernova Q4 revenue grew by 3.8% YoY to $10.96 billion, beating estimates by 7.1%. Organic revenue grew by 2% YoY to $10.8 billion. The company is a major beneficiary of the increasing energy requirements from the global AI infrastructure build-out, positioning the company as a key beneficiary of this secular trend. The continued slowdown in the Wind segment was offset by the growth in power and electrification segments that are benefitting from rising electricity consumption driven by data centers and artificial intelligence demand.  

The company’s revenue growth is expected to accelerate to 9.8% YoY growth to $8.8 billion in Q1 and is expected to grow 7.8% YoY to $9.82 billion in Q2 2026. 

AI Segment Growth: 

Q4 power orders increased 77% YoY to $11.7 billion, driven primarily by a sharp acceleration in gas power equipment orders, which more than tripled on higher volumes and favorable pricing. Gas turbine orders rose 71% YoY to 41 units, while power services orders grew 15%, reflecting continued customer investment in existing fleets. 

Q4 power segment revenue grew organically by 5% YoY to $5.7 billion. Management expects high single digit organic growth in Q1. 

Electrification orders were 2.5x revenue and were up 50% YoY to $7.4 billion primarily due to growing grid equipment demand, particularly for synchronous condensers, substations partially to support data center growth and switchgear. The company also witnessed strong equipment orders growth in the Middle East, which increased over $1 billion and in North America, which more than doubled YoY. 

Q4 organic electrification revenue grew by 32% YoY to $2.9 billion primarily driven by strong growth in switchgear and HVDC equipment. Management expects a similar revenue as Q4 in the next quarter which will also include Prolec GE. 

Due to a sudden surge in AI-related electricity demand, the company’s turbine orders are vastly outpacing demand, and the company’s order book is sold out through 2028. 

Earnings: 

Q4 GAAP EPS was $13.39, up from $1.73 in the prior-year period, reflecting a one-time tax benefit of $10.58. Excluding this benefit, GAAP EPS would have been $2.81, below the consensus estimate of $3.13, primarily due to losses in the Wind segment. 

Analysts expect strong EPS growth in the coming quarter with Q1 EPS expected to grow 127.7% YoY to $2.07 and Q2 EPS to grow 65.1% YoY to $3.07. 

Margins: 

The company’s adjusted EBITDA grew by 7.4% YoY to $1.16 billion with an adjusted EBITDA margin of 10.6%, an improvement of 250 basis points sequentially and 40 basis points YoY. Organic adjusted EBITDA margin improved 10 basis points YoY to 10.7%. 

2025 adjusted EBITDA margin improved 260 basis points YoY to 8.4% and was in-line with the management mid-point guidance of 8.5%. Management expects 2026 adjusted EBITDA margin to improve to 12% in 2026 driven by growing backlog, favorable pricing, and improved operational efficiency. Management also expects adjusted EBITDA to be more second half weighted with highest revenue and adjusted EBITDA in Q4 2026. 

Q4 net income was $3.7 billion or 33.5% of revenue compared to $484 million or 4.6% of revenue in the same period last year. The Q4 net income included a one-time tax benefit of $2.9 billion. 

Cash: 

Q4 operating cash flows grew by 169% YoY to $2.48 billion with an operating cash flow margin of 22.6% compared to 8.7% in the same period last year. The company benefitted from down payments on higher orders and slot reservations at Power as well as higher orders at Electrification. 

Q4 free cash flow grew by 214.7% YoY to $1.8 billion with a free cash flow margin of 16.5% compared to 5.4% in the same period last year.  

The company had cash of $8.85 billion and no debt at the end of Q4. 

In early February, the company expects to issue roughly $2.6 billion of debt in order to complete the previously announced acquisition of the remaining 50% ownership stake of Prolec GE. 

Valuation: 

GEV trades at a forward P/S ratio of 4.3. The company has traded at a minimum forward P/S ratio of 1.0 and a maximum of 5.3. Similar to Bloom Energy, the company is trading above the mid-range as it is a key beneficiary of rising energy demand from the global AI infrastructure build-out. 

Notable Risks: 

Valuation remains a key risk to monitor, alongside the ongoing weakness in the Wind segment. That said, management expects a meaningful recovery in the wind business to materialize in the second half of 2026. 

Please note, GEV reported earlier today with updated earnings report hitting inboxes Thursday.  

PJM Auction Stock: A Stock that Benefits from Grid Stress 

For our Discovery tier, we covered a stock that is grid dependent with up to 13GW of power, of this 1.9GW is contracted with a hyperscaler. The remaining capacity includes gas plants that are grid dependent, which means it does not solve time-to-power, but rather is a leveraged bet on auction pricing and wholesale pricing. These gas plants offer sizable capacity as they generate electricity for the grid rather than being load specific. 

Although this company does not solve the urgency around the AI data center expansion as transmission and grid allocation remain hurdles, it materially benefits as PJM pricing tightens. The investment thesis for the 13GW is that grid stress would cause the loads to run more often and clear at higher energy and higher capacity pricing. 

In our Discovery analysis, it’s pointed out that due to the rapid tightening in power supply, clearing prices for the PJM auction have surged to the tune of 11X over the past two years. Much of this arose in the 2025/26 auction, where clearing prices jumped 833% from $28.92/MW-day to $269.17/MW-day, reaching the annual cap. The 2026/27 auction saw prices once again hit the FERC-approved cap at $329.17/MW-day, a 22% YoY increase. 

As a merchant generator, this stock benefits from grid stress. Although hyperscalers must solve the issue of transmission, such as building data centers near the power assets, this can be hard to produce at scale. To help alleviate this, the operator is targeting regions popular for data centers for current capacity and newer acquisitions, such as Pennsylvania, Ohio and Maryland. 

To learn more about stocks in our new idea generation (NIG) pipeline, including a Top 10 list of NIG stocks, join Discovery todayjoin Discovery today. To subscribe to Discovery with 40% off, click here to email usclick here to email us or email premium@io-fund.com and mention code DISCOVERY40DISCOVERY40

AI Software: Tougher Trade than Previous Cycles

The I/O Fund has approached the AI software trade with caution as it’s been our contention that cloud software will go through a period of consolidation. In fact, we expressed this quite clearly in December of 2022, stating in the article “Slowing Growth in Cloud Stocks: When Will We Hit a Bottom?” 

“In some ways, the Q4 guides – assuming most come in at or near those guides – marks a historic slowdown for cloud as it’s always been a resilient category.” 

I emphasized this again in March of 2023: 

“There are a lot of cloud software bulls and for good reason, this category has treated investors well with predictable revenue growth. Cloud software is resilient because it drives down costs and increases productivity. We know this scenario well as we wrote about it many times in the past few years to defend cloud. Often, cloud selloffs were welcomed to position for a 6-month bounce back after the category sold off (40%) or more. I pointed this out in the past on the free side and here on MarketWatch (behind paywall) in 2019 (i.e., when we weren’t facing a brick wall on growth). 

The issue with this assumption is that Cloud growth is actually slowing down —- that is the reality of things —- and this wasn’t true in 2019 and hasn’t been true in the last decade. Couple this with weak bottom lines that require cash injections, and what get is a sector that is largely out of favor.” 

Around that time, I was on Real Vision and was asked for a long-only pick (I chose NVDA) and which stock(s) I would short (I chose GTLB and Bill.com). Here are the results after three years: 

I share this perspective because the opportunity cost in technology is immense—staying invested in the wrong areas can be just as costly as missing the right ones. While we spend significant time on AI semiconductors today, many of our Research Members originally found us through cloud software ahead of COVID. At that time, we made a deliberate—and unpopular—call that it was time to move on from cloud and reposition for what was next.  

How does this apply to AI software? 

First, we continue to see downward pressure on cloud stocks. Anthropic was the cause of a selloff recently after the company announced Claude Cowork, a new autonomous agent tool that builds spreadsheets, draft reports, browses the web and executes multi-step tasks. This marks an early attempt for an R&D firm to go after recurring, high-margin enterprise software budgets. Frankly, it makes a ton of sense that R&D firms will go for this low-hanging fruit, which is enterprise software that is not AI native. 

Overall, I predict that we will see immense disruption in the software layer to where the I/O Fund is considering very few software stocks for our portfolio at the moment. For every Palantir, there will be dozens that do not survive the incoming AI inference cycle. 

This is distinct from hardware, where in many instances, legacy players offer the most competitive solution given the hardware cycle requires many iterations, requires deeply entrenched supply chains and large, upfront capital investments compared to software. The barrier to entry on hardware is quite high, and that ultimately has played out well for public investors since the biggest winners across compute, networking, memory and power components are on the public markets as opposed to being smaller teams incubated in the private markets.  

Conservative tech investors looking for a small slice of AI exposure will gravitate toward software and may capture a winner or two, but that approach does not represent the full-fledged AI participation our portfolio seeks. Those who chase high-margin, recurring revenue only are not seeing the full picture, which is that software is the easiest path to compete and ultimately disrupt.  

Finally, because the Street tends to stick to what is familiar, software valuations will skyrocket leaving most investors exposed to buying high from the exuberance and selling low when early participants take gains. Avoiding this trap is critical.  

I took the long way to say that AI hardware remains the easier trade for public investors, while private investors will gun for the software market. CrunchBase says North American AI startups raised ~$168B in 2025, led by OpenAI’s $40B round and Anthropic’s $13B round, with funding soaring 46% in 2025. Eventually, venture capitalists will cash-in by putting leading AI software companies on the public markets, but it benefits them to wait a few years. Meanwhile, the I/O Fund is hard at work to make sure our Members can participate early in the cycle, and strategically too – I have no interest in waiting for AI software IPOs with bloated valutions when this report contains stocks supplying that private capital today. 

With that said, we have our eyes on the following stocks: 

Reddit: Contextual, High-Intent Data 

Reddit represents monetization momentum in the AI era as its data is highly valuable for training LLMs. There is something far more important that Reddit provides in the AI era than simply a forum; rather Reddit offers a continuous supply of human-generated conversations. What was once a forum is now a wealth of opinions and loads of sentiment that AI models desperately need to produce more natural and sentient-sounding responses. A few months back, Reddit announced they are suing companies like Perplexity and Anthropic for scraping their site.  

In exchange for data, Reddit ranks high on Google Search and in AI search results from Open AI, as well. This has helped Reddit move from #85 ranked site to #2 and #3 in 2025. In the last earnings call, management stated they are currently ranked #3: “Today, Reddit is the #3 most visited site in the U.S. for Semrush October 2025. That puts us in a rare company. YouTube is #2 and Amazon is #4.”  

The increased search ranking helped Reddit grow both their daily active users (DAUq) and weekly active users (WAUq) at a rate of 20% YoY.  

From the IOF’s internal checks, as of January 15th, Reddit has continued to have the 3rd place among the most visible site with YouTube taking the 2nd place spot. 

For user engagement, our internal checks show that Reddit notched 3.972 billion visits in October, up 4.5% MoM. For November, it was down (0.70%) MoM to 3.945 billion, better than Facebook’s decline of (4%) MoM to 11.27 billion. For December, Reddit’s monthly visits grew by 6.8% MoM to 4.2 billion, while Facebook’s MoM visits grew by 5.1% to 11.85 billion. 

With that said, Reddit’s report is not a slam dunk. First, the logged-out user growth is outpacing the logged-in user growth, which will take some getting used to for Street analysts as they often imply in the Q&A that logged-out users don’t monetize as well. Reddit may ultimately prove this wrong, but as an analyst team, we like to note where nearly-perfect fundamentals face headwinds. In this case, the concerns are not rooted in results, as the company has reported strong financials since the Google-sparked inflection. 

The company is rumored to be seeking a dynamic pricing model “where pay would be determined by how useful or important content is to the answers generated by AI tools.” This could provide more upside to Reddit’s data licensing side, which currently accounts for 6% of revenue in Q3, considering how frequently it is cited in AI Overviews and on ChatGPT. 

During the last earnings call, an analyst noted that roughly half of Reddit’s traffic is direct, while half comes from Google. Management confirmed the 50/50 split is “approximate, but pretty close.” This means Reddit is receiving an additional benefit from Google that isn’t fully visible within the data licensing revenue line item – rather, it’s mainly visible in the strong advertising growth from the traffic Google is sending to Reddit. Overall, the true impact of Reddit’s partnership with Google is hard to quantify. 

Overall Revenue Growth: 

Reddit once again reported stellar revenue growth of 67.9% YoY and 17.1% QoQ to $584.9 million. Revenue growth was more than 60% for the fifth consecutive quarter. The company’s Q3 revenue beat the analyst’s estimates by 6.4%. The strong growth was primarily driven by 74% YoY growth in the advertising revenue to $549 million. The total active advertising customers grew by over a solid 75% YoY as the company added new accounts across businesses, including large mid-market and SMB businesses. 

While its other revenues, which include licensing deals with Google and OpenAI, rose by a modest 7% YoY to $36 million. Regionally, revenue grew 67% and 74% YoY in the US and internationally, respectively 

AI Segment Growth: 

The company’s Q3 Average revenue per user (ARPU) grew by 41% YoY to $5.04. Management believes that this is still low on an absolute basis and remains an opportunity for the company. Though growth has decelerated from 47% reported in Q2 due to tough comps, it was up 11% on a sequential basis.  

The US ARPU grew by 54% YoY to $9.04, a 5-point deceleration from a strong 59% YoY growth in Q2. However, it grew by 15% sequentially.  

The International ARPU grew by 39% YoY to $1.84, a slight deceleration from the 40% growth reported in Q2 and was up 6% sequentially. 

The company’s Daily Active Uniques (DAUq) are witnessing strong international growth. The Daily Active Uniques (DAUq) global grew by 19% YoY to 116 million. While US growth is stabilizing as it grew by 7% YoY to 51.6 million, it showed a sequential growth of 3%, while it was flat in Q2. The international DAUq growth was solid as it was up 31% YoY to 64.4 million.  

The company’s Weekly Active Uniques (WAUq) grew by 21% YoY to 443.8 million. International growth outpaced US growth as it grew by 37% YoY to 256 million, while the US grew by 6% YoY to 187.8 million.  

Earnings: 

Analysts expect strong EPS CAGR of 49% during the period 2025 to 2027. EPS is expected to grow from $2.32 in 2025 to $12.74 for the year 2030, growing at a CAGR of 41%.  

The company’s Q3 GAAP EPS grew by 400% YoY and 78% sequentially to $0.80, beating analyst estimates by a solid 53.8%. Analysts expect EPS to grow 119.6% YoY to $0.79 in Q4 and 226.7% YoY growth to $0.42 in Q1 2026. Looking forward, they expect EPS to grow 76.3% YoY to $3.35 in 2026 and 39.9% YoY to $4.69 in 2027.  

Q3 adjusted EBITDA grew by 151% YoY to $236 million. Adjusted EBITDA margin improved by 13.3 percentage points YoY and 6.9 percentage points sequentially to 40.3%, beating the management guidance by 5.1 percentage points. 

Margins: 

Q3 gross profits grew by 69.7% YoY to $532.4 million with a gross margin of 91%. The gross margin is up 90 basis points YoY and up 20 basis points sequentially. The company reported its fifth consecutive quarter of above 90% gross margins.  

Operating income was $138.5 million compared to a mere $6.9 million in the same period last year. Operating margin improved by 21.7 percentage points YoY and 10.1 percentage points sequentially to 23.7%, primarily driven by operating leverage.  

Cash: 

The company reported strong cash flows primarily driven by record profits.  

Q3 operating cash flows grew by 158.6% YoY to $185.16 million with an operating cash flow margin of 31.7%, up 11.1 percentage points YoY.  

Q3 free cash flows grew by 160.5% YoY to $183.1 million, with a free cash flow margin of 31.3%, up 11.1 percentage points YoY. The company generated $510 million in free cash flows in the last twelve months. 

Valuation: 

Reddit is trading at a forward P/S ratio of 13. The company has traded at a low of 4.2 and a high of 24.4 since the company’s listing in March 2024. Reddit is currently trading at the mid-range. On the bottom-line, the company is trading at a forward P/E ratio of 35.3 with a low of 18.3 and a high of 95.8. It is trading lower than the mid-range of 57. It is also important to note that the company only achieved GAAP profitability in Q4 2024, which limits the usefulness of earlier P/E comparisons. Looking ahead, earnings growth remains strong, with EPS expected to increase from $2.33 in 2025 to $12.73 by 2030, representing a 40.4% CAGR and suggesting meaningful upside as profitability scales. 

Notable Risks: 

Reddit’s primary risk is the surge in traffic relies on a third-party relationship with Google that could be terminated at any time. It may not be terminated given the emphasis on contextual data for models, yet the recent success hinges on this data licensing deal. 

AppLovin: Sentiment Doesn’t Match Fundamentals 

AppLovin is a stock that needs a strong technical analysis overlay. Despite fundamentals that rank the company as one of the strongest FA stocks in the tech sector, the market struggles with AppLovin following short seller reports and other sentiment-driven concerns.  

From a 10,000-foot view, AppLovin is in the crosshairs of Big Tech, as it’s one of the only grassroots companies to emerge as a formidable data-driven advertising player since the walled gardens of Facebook and Google solidified in the early 2010s. It’s unfortunate that healthy competition to Big Tech often has a target on its back, as I’ve seen many times throughout the years (Zoom’s so-called security and encryption issues come to mind when they offered similar settings as Microsoft Teams).  

Point being, it’s hard to find fault in AppLovin’s exceptional fundamentals, yet technicals suggest there will be continued volatility that must be closely navigated.  

Regarding potential catalysts, although very early and based on small numbers, management stated AXON’s self-serve feature is seeing strong traction with advertiser spend growing 50% week-over-week since the launch October 1st. This is invite-only, referral-based demand in the e-commerce vertical with the platform expected to open up more broadly in early 2026.  

“While it takes a while for new customers to get going, to integrate, to learn how to use our system and to ramp spend, we're already seeing spend from these self-service advertisers grow around roughly 50% week-over-week. It's too soon to be significant, but this type of early growth gives us even more confidence that our platform will excel at being an open platform to any type of advertiser.” 

According to management, their AI models continually learn for better behavior targeting and ad personalization. Generative-AI based creatives are also a feature being built out to generate more effective ads (also leading to higher conversion rates). An area where Applovin sets themselves apart is the 35 second ad creatives compared to 7 seconds on social, which could (presumably) also lead to higher conversions.  

According to management, improving conversion rates is a path to sustained growth: “We believe that giving our powerful recommendation engine, a more diverse set of advertisers to recommend will dramatically improve conversion rates, paving the way for elevated growth rates for years to come.”  

Overall, it’s important to remember that Applovin is demand constrained rather than supply constrained as they reach over 1 billion users. Therefore, opening up the AXON ad manager to more demand is the primary catalyst for the next few quarters. 

Overall Revenue Growth: 

AppLovin reported strong revenue of $1.405 billion, beating analysts' estimates by a solid 4.7%. The company’s revenue grew by 68.2% YoY and 11.6% QoQ. 

However, investors should be aware that App’s long-term target is much lower at 20% to 30% – yet management has openly discussed their path to > 30% growth. At Goldman Sachs’ Communacopia conference, executives dove deeper into the long-term growth framework provided in Q2, calling for a baseline 20% to 30% annual growth. Management explained that this hinges on two primary factors: reinforcement learning and continuous improvement on the ad engine, and opening the recommendation engine up to e-commerce and exposing it to a wealth of new demand.  

The update regarding 20% to 30% growth is the self-service platform could help exceed this baseline: “We're still believing very confidently in this 20% to 30% long-term growth rate in our core category. But even in the core, we're beating that. And then now you're layering on, on top of that, all this opportunity with the self-service platform” 

AI Segment Growth: 

The company’s Q3 advertising revenue grew by 68.3% YoY to $1.405 billion. The ad revenue exceeded the management guidance by a solid 5.6%, primarily driven by strong gaming advertising revenue.  

Management guided advertising revenue of $1.57 billion to $1.60 billion, representing a YoY growth of 58.6% at the midpoint. Management stated that the guidance incorporates optimism around the e-commerce referral program, continued model enhancements, and the normal holiday seasonality. 

Earnings: 

Gross profits grew by a solid 72.2% YoY to $1.23 billion, with a gross profit margin of 87.6%. The gross profit margin was up 210 basis points YoY and down 10 basis points sequentially. 

Operating profits grew by 102% YoY to $1.08 billion, driven by solid operating leverage. The operating margin improved by 12.8 percentage points YoY to 76.8%. 

Margins: 

Gross profits grew by a solid 72.2% YoY to $1.23 billion, with a gross profit margin of 87.6%. The gross profit margin was up 210 basis points YoY and down 10 basis points sequentially. 

Operating profits grew by 102% YoY to $1.08 billion, driven by solid operating leverage. The operating margin improved by 12.8 percentage points YoY to 76.8%. 

Cash: 

Q3 operating cash flows grew by 91.3% YoY to $1.05 billion with a margin of 75%, up 9.1 percentage points YoY.  

Q3 free cash flows grew by 92.4% YoY to $1.049 billion with a free cash flow margin of 74.7%, up 9.4 percentage points YoY.  

The company’s cash improved to $1.67 billion, up from $1.19 billion at the end of the previous quarter. While debt remained the same at $3.51 billion. 

Valuation: 

APP is trading at a forward P/S ratio of 22.7. The company has traded at a minimum of 1.1 and a maximum of 43.2. On the bottom line, the company is trading at a forward P/E ratio of 37.6. APP has traded at a minimum of 3.1 and a maximum of 73.1 in recent years. Currently, it is trading at mid-range. 

Notable Risks: 

APP is the subject of short reports, and the company has been under an SEC probe over its data collection practices. In addition, the stock’s strong outperformance over the past three years raises the bar for future execution, as market expectations are elevated. However, we think the AI-powered ads business model, which has driven strong revenue and profit growth and a strong market presence, is worth a shot, especially when using technicals to guide our entries and exits. 

Cloudflare: Early but the Positioning is One of a Kind 

As pointed out in our analysis: “Cloudflare Entering Act 3 to Become a Leader in AI Inference at the Edge,” the company has a few distinct advantages as the platform of choice for AI developers. Here’s a summary:  

  • Does not rely on Big 3 infrastructure and can drive down costs  
  • Is faster on performance because of its position at the edge; this lowers costs and latency for AI inference and keeps data as close to the user as possible  
  • Geographically equipped to handle compliance issues that will inevitably result from using training data for inference.   
  • The company has moved diligently into compute, storage and application services. Combined with its global network, this positions the company for AI inference as-a-service. There is no other company doing both edge network plus compute and storage except the hyperscalers. However, in some cases such as serverless, Cloudflare exceeds the performance of the hyperscalers.  
  • CDN as a core product and security as a seamless upgrade shows the importance of being a middleman, helping to position Cloudflare to innovate around Serverless in ways that outperform even AWS.     
  • Training models is prohibitively expensive by requiring upfront costs, Nvidia GPUs are hard to obtain, and AI development is not democratized for developers with proprietary, blackbox APIs that run counter to an open-source movement (GPT-4 versus Llama). Cloudflare aims to solve these problems by allowing popular models to run closer to the user, which is the next logical step for AI. 

Ultimately, the bigger and the faster a network is, the more it’s capable of providing “as a service.” AI can create a fortuitous moment for Cloudflare because the company is both positioned to offer AI inference-as-a-service yet also solves important pain points for developers.  

Overall Revenue Growth: 

Cloudflare reported its largest beat since Q1 2022, reporting revenue of $562.0 million in Q3, 3.1% ahead of estimates as growth accelerated nearly three points to 30.7%. This also marked Cloudflare’s first >30% growth quarter in the past five and its fastest revenue growth in the last seven quarters. This is the first step in confirming a sustained revenue acceleration aided by AI, yet the more important piece is showing that >30% growth can actually be sustained. 

For Q4, Cloudflare guided for revenue of $588.5 to $589.5 million, a slight deceleration to 28% on the topline. This was ahead of estimates for $580.8 million 

AI Segment Growth: 

Cloudflare has not broken out specific AI revenue or contribution to growth, although other key metrics strengthen significantly in Q3. 

RPO was $2.14 billion, accelerating four points to 43% YoY, while current RPO accounted for 64% of RPO, or ~$1.37 billion. Current RPO rose ~30% YoY, a three point deceleration from 33% in Q2. Billings growth accelerated sharply, from 33% in Q2 to 40% in Q3, rising to $624.4 million. 

Paying customer growth accelerated six points sequentially to 33% YoY, impressive at this scale considering paying customers now total 295,552. Growth was 10% QoQ, the highest on record since at least 2022. Additionally, DBNRR ticked five points higher sequentially to 119%, the highest since Q4 2022, driven by accelerating spending at its largest customers 

Earnings: 

Cloudflare reported a solid adjusted EPS beat in Q3, reporting 35% YoY growth to $0.27 versus the $0.23 estimate. GAAP EPS was on the brink of shifting to positive territory at ($0.00), versus the ($0.07) estimate. 

For Q4, Cloudflare guided for adjusted EPS to be flat QoQ at $0.27, up 42% YoY. For fiscal 2025, Cloudflare raised its adjusted EPS forecast to $0.91, up from $0.85 to $0.86 previously. However, GAAP profitability is not expected on an annual basis until 2027. 

Margins: 

GAAP gross margin was 74.0% in Q3, down 3.7 points YoY and 0.9 points QoQ. Adjusted gross margin was 75.3%, down 3.5 points YoY and 1 point QoQ, again impacted by increases in allocated costs from higher network traffic from paying customers. 

GAAP operating margin was (6.7%), up 0.5 points YoY and 6.4 points QoQ. Adjusted operating margin was 15.3%, up 0.5 points YoY and 1.2 points QoQ; for Q4, adjusted operating margin was guided to be 14%. GAAP net margin was (0.2%), up 3.4 points YoY and 9.6 points QoQ. Adjusted net margin was 18.3%, up 1.4 points YoY and 3.6 points QoQ. 

Cash: 

Operating cash flow was $167.1 million for a 30% margin, up from a 24% margin in the year ago quarter and a 19% margin in Q2. Free cash flow was $75 million for a 13% margin, up from 11% in the year ago quarter and 6% in Q2. Network capex was 14% of revenue. 

Cash, equivalents and available-for-sale securities totaled $4.04 billion, while convertible notes outstanding totaled $3.26 billion. 

Valuation: 

Cloudflare is trading at a forward P/S ratio of 22.2. The company has traded a minimum of 10 and a maximum of 41.4 in the last few years. Cloudflare is trading slightly lower than the mid-range after the recent weakness in its share price. 

Notable Risks: 

The company is not yet GAAP profitable even after 16 years of the company’s operations.  

Palantir: The Trade-Off Between Discipline and Conviction 

Since 2023, Palantir’s stock has defied gravity, delivering steady performance that no other AI software stock has come close to matching (yet). The thesis is two-fold: the company must continue to scale its Commercial segment after posting multiple quarters of over 50% growth, while also sustaining a high valuation. Both matters and the bar is undeniably high.  

What separates Palantir, however, is not simply growth, but capability. The differences matter as unlike traditional AI-enabled database or business intelligence competitors, Palantir can operate effectively even when data sets are incomplete or fragmented—situations where most models struggle. In that regard, traditional business intelligence companies require a complete data set, whereas Palantir can handle situations where one isn't available. You can think of the competitive advantage as actionable depth, as Palantir has described it: “the reasoning that goes into decision-making, not just data.”     

Palantir’s Artificial Intelligence Platform (AIP) integrates generative AI with operational data and workflows, and, when combined with Palantir’s other platforms, Foundry and Apollo, it provides an AI service mesh that can run hundreds of microservices, scale compute via its Rubix engine, and orchestrate updates through Apollo.    

Additionally, Palantir’s knowledge graph, referred to as Ontology, is a distinct advantage. The graph offers better context than a large language model would on its own – or as Palantir states, it’s “the reasoning that goes into decision-making.” Palantir made key upgrades to AIP with the introduction of AI-forward-deployed engineers (FDEs) and the AI Hivemind, and brought Ontology to the edge, enabling deployment on mobile devices.  

Palantir Stock leads the AI software pack, delivering one of the best reports across tech in Q3. Revenue accelerated nearly 15 points sequentially to almost 63%, with strong growth in key metrics and a 28-point acceleration in US Commercial revenue to 121% YoY. The Artificial Intelligence Platform (AIP) is driving most of the Commercial growth, as there was a clear revenue inflection when AIP launched in mid-2023.  

The company reported strong key metrics, with net retention rate (NRR) expanding six points sequentially to 134%. Over the past two years, NRR has risen an impressive 27 points, and Palantir noted that AIP is continuing to drive existing expansions and new customer conversions. On the other hand, Palantir’s forward P/S ratio trades at an outstanding 64.4 multiple and has been as high as 112 forward P/S. 

I don’t recall another stock the I/O Fund has followed this closely without taking action. That caution was intentional, driven by valuation and our focus on risk management. Ultimately, Palantir is an extreme outlier, to where for those ignoring discipline, it worked out. Often times, it does not work out to buy a stock that trades at up to a 100 forward PS, and that must be weighed carefully for each investor. 

Overall Revenue Growth: 

Palantir reported $1.18 billion in revenue in Q3, up an impressive 18% QoQ and beating estimates by 8.4%, driven by unwavering momentum in US Commercial. On a YoY basis, revenue growth accelerated 14.8 points to 62.8% YoY, the largest sequential acceleration to date and marking Palantir’s highest growth rate since going public. Over the last nine quarters, topline growth has accelerated ~50 points, from just 12.7% in Q2 2023, a rare feat to accomplish. 

AI Segment Growth: 

Fueled once again by AIP, Palantir delivered one of the best reports across tech in the third quarter, with revenue accelerating nearly 15 points sequentially to almost 63%, with strong growth in key metrics and a 50 point acceleration in US Commercial revenue since the start of the year.  

US Commercial revenue grew 29% QoQ and 121% YoY to $397 million in Q3, accelerating from 93% YoY growth in Q2. Since the start of the year, US Commercial growth has accelerated 50 points, and since the start of 2024, growth has accelerated 81 points. 

Earnings: 

Palantir reported $0.18 in GAAP EPS in the quarter, up 200% YoY, while adjusted EPS was $0.21, beating estimates by 25.5% and rising 110% YoY. Palantir did not provide a specific guide for EPS for Q4, though current estimates are pegged at $0.12 in GAAP EPS and $0.22 in adjusted EPS, up 300% YoY and 57% YoY, respectively.  

For FY25, Palantir is expected to earn $0.72 in adjusted EPS, up nearly 76% YoY, before slowing to 39% growth to $1.01 in FY26. 

Margins: 

Margins strengthened considerably in the quarter, with adjusted operating margin surpassing 50% with more expansion guided for Q4. Palantir’s Rule of 40 score (revenue growth + adj operating margin) expanded to a wild 114%, up from 94% last quarter and 68% last Q3.  

Gross margin was 82% in Q3, up one point QoQ and two points YoY, while adjusted gross margin was 84%, up two points YoY and QoQ. 

GAAP operating margin was 33%, an impressive 6 point QoQ and 17 point YoY expansion. Adjusted operating margin was 51%, breaking past 50% for the first time and up 5 points QoQ and 13 points YoY. For Q4, Palantir guided for adjusted operating margin to be 52%, showcasing its ability to drive strong margin expansion alongside swift revenue acceleration. Full year adjusted operating margin guidance was raised from 46% to 49%. 

Cash: 

Cash flows were strong, though cash flow margins dipped on a YoY and QoQ basis. Operating cash flow was $507.7 million for a 43% margin, shrinking from a 54% margin in Q2 and 58% in the year ago quarter.  

Adjusted free cash flow was $539.9 million for a 46% margin, down from 57% in Q2 and 60% in the year ago quarter. Palantir raised its adjusted FCF guidance for the year to $1.9 to $2.1 billion, or a 45.5% margin, up from a 42.8% margin previously.  

Cash and equivalents totaled $6.4 billion and debt remained zero. 

Valuation: 

Palantir is trading at a forward P/S ratio of 64.4. The company has traded at a minimum of 6 and a maximum of 112 in the last few years. The company is trading at a significant premium to the other best of breed cloud companies like CrowdStrike that is currently trading at a forward P/S ratio of 23.7 and Cloudflare at 22.2. 

On the bottom line, the company is trading at a forward P/E ratio of 167.6. The company has traded at a minimum of 25.6 and a maximum of 285.9 in the past few years. 

Notable Risks: 

The company’s primary risk is its high valuation. 

CoreWeave: Legacy Cloud IaaS Wasn’t Built for AI 

CoreWeave breaks all of the rules, including not cooperating with our portfolio criteria. I’ll get right to the point by saying CoreWeave’s cash to debt is frightening. The company reported FCF of ($1.6 billion) with $14 billion in debt and a mere $2.5B in cash on the balance sheet, leaving a cash to debt ratio of 0.18, or said differently; debt is 5.6X cash at the end of Q3. Notably, this excludes the $2.25 billion convertible senior notes issued in December and on a pro-forma basis, debt is 3.4X cash, for a deep net-debt position and very limited balance-sheet flexibility. 

Perhaps most concerning, the debt issues are about to worsen as CoreWeave is expected to spend $6.75 billion in Q4 on capex and over $26 billion in 2026, as management expects capex more than double next year. My best estimate is that 2026 will see 12X debt to cash with what I know today. The only way we would touch this stock is with heavy technical analysis and risk management.  

There are lower risk ways to participate in AI, yet the positioning CoreWeave offers is second to none. The company is in the “build” phase but will eventually be in the “yield” phase. 

The company also entered the US federal market, which should further help to diversify its customer base. CoreWeave will provide secure, compliant, high-performance AI cloud services to US government agencies and their key partners, including the Defense Industrial Base. NASA already uses its services to advance scientific exploration at its Jet Propulsion Lab. 

Altogether, CoreWeave sits on the front lines of the shift from legacy cloud infrastructure to AI-optimized workloads. While the full importance of this transition from cloud to AI is difficult to quantify today, its impact is likely to be transformative for how compute is built and consumed. CoreWeave is positioned at the center of a shift too great to fully envision today. 

The closest historical parallel is AWS in the mid-to-late 2000s—before the economics of the build-out were fully visible to investors. The key distinction is that CoreWeave represents a pure-play on AI infrastructure. It is now widely understood that AWS went on to generate the majority of Amazon’s profits, providing investors with a clear blueprint of what the yield phase of infrastructure-as-a-service can look like. 

For more information on how CoreWeave is unique compared to the Big 3, including why the model FLOPs utilization (MFU) gap matters quite a bit, reference our article “CoreWeave Stock Soars 200% since IPO – Can it Defy the Odds?” 

Overall Revenue Growth: 

CoreWeave’s Q3 revenue grew by 133.7% YoY and 12.5% QoQ to $1.37 billion. The company beat analyst consensus estimates by a solid 6.6%, driven by continued strong demand for the company’s AI cloud infrastructure services.  

Looking ahead, analysts expect 2026 revenue to grow 132% YoY to $12.23 billion, and these estimates will be increased due to the push-out caused by the delay in Q4 revenue recognition to Q1. For 2027, revenue is expected to grow 49.4% YoY to $18.27 billion. 

AI Segment Growth: 

The backlog of $55B represents nearly double Q2 and is approaching 4X YTD yet the debt is also up 2X YTD. The company stated the backlog grew by $25 billion to $55.6 billion, up from $30.1 billion for growth of 85% QoQ.  

Management also highlighted that they reached $50 billion in RPO, faster than any cloud in history.  

Active power footprint grew by 120MW sequentially to approximately 590MW with contracted power capacity growing over 600MW to 2.9GW. That represents 25.5% QoQ growth. Management expects to end the year with over 850 megawatts of active power. 

Earnings: 

Q3 GAAP EPS was ($0.22) compared to the analysts' estimates of ($0.51). However, the strong beat was due to a one-time noncash tax benefit of $0.25. Excluding the one-time benefit, the company would beat estimates by $0.04.  

Looking forward, analysts expect GAAP EPS of ($0.84) in 2026 and to be GAAP profitable in 2027 with an EPS of $1.63. 

Margins: 

The margins are strong yet the cash remains troublesome. For example, CoreWeave is a recent IPO that is already GAAP positive on operating margin at 4% and reported an adjusted EBITDA margin of 61%. 

Q3 gross profits grew by 126% YoY to $995.85 million with a gross profit margin of 73%, down 200 basis points YoY and 100 basis points sequentially.  

Q3 operating margin was 4%, down from 20% in the same period last year and up 200 basis points sequentially. The operating expenses increased 181% YoY to support strong growth. The adjusted operating margin was 16%, compared to 21% in the same period last year. 

Cash: 

The company reported negative free cash flow of ($1.6 billion) with $14 billion in debt and $2.5B in cash on the balance sheet at the end of Q3. This leaves net debt of $11.5 billion – yet this is mild given what the company plans to spend in capex next year (expect the debt to go up rapidly).  

Free cash flow was ($1.6 billion) compared to ($573.9 million) in the same period last year and ($2.7 billion) in the previous quarter. 

Valuation: 

CoreWeave is trading at a forward P/S ratio of 3.8. The company has traded at a low of 3 and a high of 17.2 in the past year.  

The company is not profitable for a bottom-line valuation and is expected to be profitable on a non-GAAP basis in Q4 2026. 

Notable Risks: 

The company has negative free cash flow due to high capex for infrastructure, and it also has high debt. 

Honorable Mention: Meta 

In a recent analysis entitled “The AI Revenue Leader Nobody is Talking About,” our firm was early to point out that Meta’s AI revenue places it as number two, second only to Nvidia. Although Google has many supportive points as to why the stock outperformed compared to other Big Tech names, the I/O Fund is a growth stock portfolio. Margins matter, cash matters, but what matters more is the 3X growth Meta has seen in its Advantage+ segment in less than a year, as the company had reported $20 billion about three quarters ago, with the recent update from last quarter at $60 billion. If this runaway growth continues, then Meta will easily be outpacing Search and Google Cloud combined on AI revenue.

On the other hand, Meta is witnessing a deceleration in margins due to rising expenses supporting its AI infrastructure. Reality Labs also continues to incur losses, recording a $4.43 billion loss from operations in Q3 2025, and its cumulative losses now total $73.04 billion. Due to continued investments in AI infrastructure, the company’s capex is expected to be significantly higher in 2026.  

Meta has the weakest balance sheet among the Big Tech companies, with a net cash position of $15.7 billion. Meta has also entered a joint venture with Blue Owl Capital to fund its development at the Hyperion data center in Louisiana. Thereby, helping it to keep about $27 billion in debt off-balance sheet, where it would sit in a special-purpose vehicle tied to Blue Owl. While this approach may improve reported leverage and financial ratios, it carries inherent risks as the company is indirectly responsible for the off-balance sheet debt.  

Despite Meta being in the quality bucket for the most part, its high capex spending necessitates technical analysis and a risk management overlay. 

For more information on Big Tech with I/O Fund takeaways, please read our free article “The $530 Billion AI Question: Which Big Tech Stock is Winning?”The $530 Billion AI Question: Which Big Tech Stock is Winning?”

What’s Next for Our Discovery and Advanced Tiers … 

Miners have been attracting significant deal activity from neoclouds, with a handful notching hyperscaler deals and growing interest. Miners continue to benefit from their ability to offer hundreds of MW for AI data centers in relatively quick fashion, bypassing interconnection queues for greenfield builds, while also offering lower electricity costs through long-term power contracts. A handful of miners have disclosed power costs around $0.046–0.047/kWh, representing a meaningful discount to PJM’s grid and average commercial electricity pricing. 

In an upcoming analysis for our Discovery tier, we will recap three Bitcoin miners leading the push to power AI data centers. One has secured a second multi-billion-dollar AI data center deal with a hyperscaler and is pursuing a multi-GW development pipeline that could represent 7–8X growth from current contracted capacity. Another has signed a nearly $10 billion deal for phased deployment through 2026, while the third is targeting several hundred MWs online in 2026 with additional capacity in pre-development for 2027. 

While AI-related revenue contributions remain modest today, growth is expected to accelerate through 2026 and 2027 as capacity comes online. However, the risk with miners is that capex requirements to retrofit facilities often exceed current balance sheet capacity, forcing increased leverage to transition assets from mining to AI-ready infrastructure. 

Outside of miners, we are also revisiting nuclear power for Discovery members, including an SMR developer with a multi-GW pipeline. Unlike miners or Bloom Energy, SMRs represent a long-term solution, with commercial operations not expected until closer to the end of the decade. 

Conclusion: 

The I/O Fund team is ready for the upcoming earnings season armed with a list of stocks we will be watching very closely and many honorable mentions prepared to step-in should one of our chosen stocks not perform as expected.

Following a report of this size, it’s worth pausing to acknowledge a reality that often gets overlooked: AI investing remains difficult for many tech portfolios, despite the growing list of winners and the market’s potential to meaningfully reshape GDP.

This raises a fair question—why do so many hedge funds and ETFs remain underexposed to AI beyond a narrow set of Big Tech names, and why is that exposure so concentrated? The AI trade is actually quite complex and unforgiving, demanding deep product-level analysis, precise timing, and disciplined risk management that many portfolios are not built to execute.

Our goal is to solve that problem for our Members—building on our history from prior cycles, striving to be early to market trends in the near-term, and positioning thoughtfully for the second half of this AI-driven decade.

Damien Robbins and Royston Roche, Equity Analysts at I/O Fund contributed to this analysis.

I/O Fund Members Get 40% off Discovery

Discovery members recently received an analysis on a stock poised to benefit as Nvidia tackles the context memory bottleneck and extends KV cache memory with its new Inference Context Memory Storage platform. To subscribe to Discovery with 40% off, click here to email usclick here to email us or email premium@io-fund.com and mention code DISCOVERY40DISCOVERY40

I/O Fund Pro Members Get 30% Off Advanced Market Signals

Unlock real-time trade alerts, access to the I/O Fund’s momentum stock list, and weekly webinars every Thursday at 4:30 p.m. ET. To join Advanced Market Signals with 30% off, click here to email usclick here to email us or email premium@io-fund.com and mention code ADVANCED30.ADVANCED30.

Please note: The I/O Fund conducts research and draws conclusions for the Fund’s positions. We then share that information with our readers. This is not a guarantee of a stock’s performance. Please consult your personal financial advisor before buying any stock in the companies mentioned in this analysis.

Recommended Reading:

  • The AI Memory Boom Has Arrived
  • The I/O Fund’s Top 15 AI Stocks for Q4 2025
  • The I/O Fund’s Top 15 Stocks for Q3 2025
  • Meta: Growth is Quietly Benefitting from AI, Though Margin Risks Weigh Heavy
Posted in Broad Market Today, Market UpdatesLeave a Comment on The I/O Fund’s Top 15 Stocks for Q1 2026

Market Cycles, Not Headlines: What History Says About the 2025 Rally and What Comes Next 

Posted on November 6, 2025June 30, 2026 by io-fund
Market Cycles, Not Headlines: What History Says About the 2025 Rally and What Comes Next 

Despite how it may seem, modern-day narratives rarely drive market swings. Tariffs, political headlines, niche trends like rare earth materials, or speculation about which company OpenAI partners with next — these stories dominate the news cycle, but they do not reliably move markets, as the consensus believes. If they did, investing would be much easier. 

Numerous well-known studies have come to this conclusion. One of the most famous is “What Moves Stock Prices?” by Harvard and MIT economists Cutler, Poterba, and Summers. Their goal was to model how news and macroeconomic events might predict stock market movements. To their surprise, they found that only about one-third of major price swings could be linked to identifiable news events.  

This finding was later reinforced by Yale economist Ray Fair in his groundbreaking paper, “Events That Shook the Market.” Fair examined major one-day movements in the S&P 500 from 1950 to 1999 in search of their causes. He concluded that neither news, earnings, nor data releases could explain most of these large jumps. As Fair put it, “It is difficult to find any news that corresponds to many of the largest daily changes in stock prices.” 

We’ve seen this phenomenon play out in real time. The COVID crash was perhaps the most striking example. Economic data went off the charts: 26 million Americans filed for unemployment within five weeks, as GDP fell 31.4% annualized — the steepest drop since World War II. Yet the stock market bottomed at the height of this deterioration and uncertainty, staging a V-shaped recovery that was impossible to justify by the data alone. 

There are many forces that shape markets — liquidity, growth, and monetary and fiscal policy among them. But there are also powerful, less tangible forces that economics struggle to explain. One of these is herd sentiment, which we explored in last week’s report, Decoding the S&P 500: When Human Sentiment Meets Artificial Intelligence. 

This week, we’ll turn to another underappreciated but potent influence on markets – cycles. Much like natural phenomena, financial markets move in rhythmic, repetitive patterns that can be observed, analyzed, and applied to better understand broader trends. 

Understanding market cycles is essential for anyone seeking to interpret market behavior beyond the noise of daily headlines. While news and data provide short-term context, the deeper rhythm of expansion, contraction, and renewal has repeated throughout centuries of market history. These cycles reflect the underlying forces of liquidity, sentiment, credit, and innovation that collectively drive long-term trends. By studying them, investors can gain perspective — identifying where we may be in the broader sequence of optimism and fear — and making decisions grounded in historical precedent rather than emotion. 

In this report, we will look at two dominant cycles that closely align with the price action in 2025. Both suggest a potential year-end rally, followed by the potential for volatility into Q1 of 2026. We’ll then line these cycles up with the broad market to outline what levels must hold, and what targets this uptrend is hitting, as we push higher. 

The Gann Cycle Framework: Predictable Rhythms Behind Market Movements 

The concept of market cycles gained mainstream attention through Neil Howe and William Strauss’s theory The Fourth Turning, which proposes that history unfolds in recurring 80–100-year cycles based on generational shifts. Each “turning” reflects a distinct societal mood—ranging from confidence and expansion to crisis and renewal—that repeatedly shapes political, economic, and market behavior. 

However, the study of cycles long predates Howe and Strauss. In 1862, economist Karl Juglar identified what became known as the Juglar Cycle—an 8 to 11-year rhythm of expansion and contraction that still appears in modern market data. Juglar’s work established the foundation for viewing markets not as random systems, but as recurring patterns driven by predictable phases of human and economic behavior. 

Decades later, W.D. Gann advanced this concept into one of the most comprehensive frameworks for understanding market structure. Gann demonstrated through decades of analysis that market movements often unfold in rhythmic, repeating patterns tied to both human psychology and natural law. His research suggested that the same behavioral and structural forces that shaped past bull and bear markets continue to influence markets today. 

Gann identified several “master cycles”—notably the 100-year, 90-year, 60-year, 52-year, 45-year, and 30-year cycles. At any given time, one or more of these cycles, as well as divisions of these cycles, tend to influence the prevailing market trend. He used these relationships to issue remarkably accurate forecasts, many of which have held up over time. 

While this may sound abstract, it holds historical merit. For example, 90 years back from the 1929 market top takes us to the end of the 1839 speculative boom, which ended in the Panic of 1839. Counting 90 years forward from 1929 brings us within months of the COVID top in 2020—an equally significant inflection point. 

Another example is Gann’s 60-year “Great Cycle.” When we overlay the S&P 500 from 1962 onto today’s market starting in January 2022, the patterns align with remarkable similarity. While cycles can invert or distort temporarily, they consistently identify key inflection points and general directional bias. 

Chart showing how the S&P 500 (SPX) from 2022 to 2025 aligns with the 60-Year historic market cycle

How the S&P 500 (2022–2025) Aligns with the 60-Year Historical Market Cycle 

Chart by I/O Fund

Because sentiment moves in waves, the emotional extremes of fear and greed remain timeless. While technology, policy, and liquidity conditions evolve, the human response to opportunity and risk does not. Even if equities rise in 2025 on optimism surrounding AI, investor psychology mirrors that of prior generations—driven by the same patterns of exuberance and denial.  

To see how these long-term cycles manifest in real markets, let’s look at two historical periods that mirror 2025 with uncanny precision. 

With this in mind, we examined historical precedents for 2025—a year defined by a rapid 20% decline in Q1 that erased nearly all of 2024’s gains, followed by a strong seven-month rally with limited pullbacks. These conditions—a liquidity shock followed by a sharp rebound—are rare. Over two centuries of data, only two market periods fit this mold: 1980 and 1998. Interestingly, both align with significant Gann cycles—the 45-year (half of the 90-year) and the 26-year (half of the 52-year) cycles. 

To summarize: History may not repeat — but it often rhymes. 

The 45-Year Market Cycle: How 1980’s Policy Shock Is Repeating in 2025 

The market in 1980 has a striking resemblance to what we’ve seen unfold in 2025. In both periods, a swift and unexpected policy shock triggered a sudden liquidity event that sent markets sharply lower, followed by a rapid V-shaped recovery that defied expectations. 

In early 1980, the Federal Reserve—newly under the leadership of Paul Volcker—launched an aggressive campaign to control inflation. The Fed pushed interest rates to nearly 17% in February, an unprecedented move that instantly drained liquidity from the system and sent equity markets into a sharp correction. 

prompt

Similarly, in early 2025, the executive branch imposed an unexpected increase in tariffs, creating a sudden liquidity squeeze that rippled across U.S. markets. The February decline that followed erased much of the prior year’s gains in a matter of weeks. 

In both years, the shock proved temporary. Political pressure and a seizing credit market forced Volcker to reverse course in 1980, cutting rates back to roughly 9 percent. The result was an eight-month recovery that lasted through late November. Likewise, in 2025, just days after Liberation Day, the bond market began a disorderly unwind that pushed yields higher than the government could sustain. The policy reversal that followed restored liquidity and fueled a seven-month rally that continues today. 

If this historical rhythm continues to guide market behavior, the current advance could extend through December, leading to a secondary high in mid-January followed by a period of elevated volatility into the second quarter of 2026. 

S&P 500 (SPX) long-term chart showing how the current stock market rally aligns with the 45-year market cycle from 1980

How the S&P 500 in 2025 aligns with the 45-year cycle

Chart by I/O Fund

The 26-Year Market Cycle: How 1998’s Global Crisis Echoes Through 2025’s Rally 

When we align the 26-year cycle with the 2025 decline, the parallels are difficult to ignore. The 1998 correction was sparked by a sudden global liquidity crisis that rippled through international markets. It began with the Asian Financial Crisis, as currencies in Thailand, Indonesia, and South Korea collapsed under the pressure of capital flight. The shock then spread to Russia, which defaulted on its domestic debt, setting off a global contagion. 

One of the largest casualties was Long-Term Capital Management, a highly leveraged hedge fund managed by Nobel laureates and veteran Wall Street traders. As LTCM’s positions unraveled, liquidity evaporated across credit markets. Within two months, U.S. equities had dropped roughly 20 percent, forcing the Federal Reserve to intervene and backstop the system. 

The Fed’s swift action reignited risk appetite, setting off one of the most powerful rallies in modern market history. Fueled by speculation about the transformative potential of the internet, investors poured into technology and growth stocks, propelling the market into the final and most euphoric phase of the dot-com boom. 

While today’s AI leaders—such as Nvidia—are built on far stronger fundamentals than the speculative favorites of 2000, like Cisco and Pets.com, the behavioral pattern is strikingly similar. Both eras were defined by optimism surrounding an emerging technology with vast, untested potential and by investors’ willingness to price in future revolutions before they materialized. 

If this 26-year cycle continues to guide the market, the current uptrend could extend through December and into the first quarter of 2026 before encountering the first meaningful correction. Unlike the 45-year cycle, however, this correction would likely be brief—more of a consolidation within a broader advance that carries into late 2026. 

S&P 500 (SPX) long-term chart overlaying the current market rally with the 26-year market cycle from 1998.

How the S&P 500 aligns with the 26-year cycles (1998) 

Chart by I/O Fund 

Interestingly, both cycles suggest continued strength into December, and both cycles suggest some period of volatility in Q1 of 2026. What separates the two is how far this uptrend pushes into Q1. While the 45-year cycle suggests a top in mid-December and lower high into mid-January, the 26-year cycle suggests a continuation of the aggressive uptrend into mid-Q1 of next year before seeing a small period of volatility.  

Broad Market Levels 

If we take the general direction of the above cycles and place it within the context of developing price patterns, there are two counts that best fit: 

Subscribe for Free Below to see our updated game plan, which includes:  

  • The two scenarios we are tracking that best fit the potential cycles discussed in this report.  
  • Critical support levels that must hold for a year-end rally to continue.  
  • What the overhead targets are if we do see a rally into year-end.  

One of these scenarios is starting to take shape — read this timely analysis below. 

  • Blue – We are in the final swings of the rally off the April 2025 low. As long as any weakness holds SPX 6,552.50 – 6345, then we should see this rally continue into year-end, before seeing any notable volatility unfold into Q1 of 2026.  
  • Green – This path follows the blue path above. The difference is that the Q1 period of volatility will likely only be a correction within a larger uptrend, which would then continue into 2026.  
S&P 500 (SPX) long-term chart showing the I/O Fund’s analysis of the current stock market rally and what levels to watch for Q1 2026.

S&P 500 Elliott Wave Outlook: Key Scenarios Into Year-End 2025 and 2026 

Chart by I/O Fund 

In conclusion, as with all cyclical analysis, no one can say with certainty why a particular cycle takes hold or how long it will remain dominant. Markets often follow one rhythm until it loses influence, at which point a new cycle emerges and becomes the primary driver. The task for us as analysts is to identify which cycle is in control and the conditions that will sustain it. 

At this stage, the 45-year and 26-year cycles appear to be the prevailing forces. As long as the SPX holds between 6,552.50 and 6,345 on any near-term weakness, the market is likely to continue tracking these patterns, both of which point toward the potential for continued strength into year-end. 

Last week, Beth Kindig spoiled I/O Fund Members with a 43+ page report on the Top 15 AI Stocks for Q4 2025Top 15 AI Stocks for Q4 2025.  This in-depth report ranks 15 key stocks that are leading the three most powerful trends in AI with many lesser-known names. Not one FAAMG made the list. Last quarter’s report highlighted Bloom Energy, a stock up over 800% from our April buys.  Learn more here. 

Please note: The I/O Fund conducts research and draws conclusions for the Fund’s positions. We then share that information with our readers. This is not a guarantee of a stock’s performance. Please consult your personal financial advisor before buying any stock in the companies mentioned in this analysis.

Recommended Reading:

  • Decoding the S&P 500: When Human Sentiment Meets Artificial Intelligence
  • TSM Stock and the AI Bubble: 40%+ AI Accelerator Growth Fuels the Valuation Debate
  • Micron Stock Up 120% YTD: What the HBM Memory Leader Plans for 2026
  • Palantir Stock Forecast 2025: Can PLTR Justify Its High Valuation?
Posted in Broad Market TodayLeave a Comment on Market Cycles, Not Headlines: What History Says About the 2025 Rally and What Comes Next 

Decoding the S&P 500: When Human Sentiment Meets Artificial Intelligence

Posted on October 31, 2025June 30, 2026 by io-fund
Decoding the S&P 500: When Human Sentiment Meets Artificial Intelligence

In a recent interview on Thoughtful Money, famed economist David Rosenberg stated that the percentage of the U.S. economy currently expanding—when weighted by population—is only 18%. In other words, 82% of the U.S. economy is flat or in contraction. To make this statistic even more startling, he noted that just six weeks ago, over 40% of the economy was expanding, signaling a rapid deterioration in growth. 

The last two times we saw less than one-fifth of the U.S. economy expanding was the summer of 2020 and the winter of 2009—two of the most difficult periods for the American economy in decades. Yet today, the S&P 500, NASDAQ, Dow Jones Industrial Average are at all-time highs, while credit spreads remain near historic lows. 

The reason lies in the remarkable fact that the small portion of the economy that is still expanding is tied to artificial intelligence, which continues to show no signs of slowing down. This is largely driven by a handful of hyperscalers, who are spending hundreds of billions of dollars annually on AI data center capital expenditures and that spending continues to accelerate. In fact, analyst estimates have consistently failed to keep pace with the actual rate of AI infrastructure investment. A year ago, expectations for Big Tech capex stood at roughly $250 billion. Morgan Stanley later projected $300 billion for 2025, yet that number has already risen to $365 billion with one quarter left to go. 

Though it may seem overly simplistic, the reality is that if hyperscale’s capex continues to grow, it is unlikely that the U.S. economy will fall into a recession—even with more than 82% of its sectors already contracting. 

To say that this is an unparalleled economic backdrop would be an understatement. Each week, a new thesis emerges, warning of an AI bubble, citing historic valuations and drawing parallels to the dotcom bust. Yet the market—and Big Tech capex—continues to march higher, leaving many investors unsure of what comes next. 

While the current environment is unprecedented, what never changes is human sentiment. Arguably the most underestimated force driving markets, sentiment remains something economics has no meaningful way to measure. Only through technical analysis can we quantify market psychology and define risk parameters that keep us out of trouble while allowing us to participate in the uptrend. 

In this report, we will analyze the sentiment pattern shaping the current bull cycle. We will then place that pattern within the context of the larger secular bull market to better understand when the music might stop—and how we plan to potentially navigate this environment when it does happen.

Defining the End Game: Decoding the S&P 500's Long-Term Elliott Wave Count 

On October 13th, 2022, the S&P 500 bottomed, after selling off approximately 25% in just under eight months. Since this low, the market is up around 95% in a new bull market, as investors continue to wonder how much further this new bull cycle can go. Using technical analysis, we can get a rough idea of how much longer this cycle can continue by analyzing the pattern of this bull cycle, and how it fits into the context of the larger pattern in play. 

What is clear about the current bull cycle is that the pattern is what’s called a diagonal. A diagonal is a 5-wave pattern where each of the sub-waves is a series of 3-wave patterns. The primary characteristic of this pattern is that the explosive 3rd wave fails to take off, and the 4th wave tends to be very deep, retracing close to, or into 1st wave territory.

Illustration of Elliott Wave Ending Diagonal, showing a 5-wave motive pattern where each sub-wave forms a 3-wave correction, indicating trend exhaustion.

Elliott Wave Ending Diagonal: A 5-wave motive pattern where each sub-wave is a 3-wave correction, signaling trend exhaustion. 

Image by I/O Fund 

This is a very distinct and common pattern that we see in capital markets. What is unique about the current diagonal pattern is its size. It is rare to see a multi-year diagonal pattern in play, which is exactly what the market is tracing in real-time.

S&P 500 (SPX) chart showing a large Elliott Wave Ending Diagonal pattern, with the market currently in its final 5th wave and potential continuation toward 2026 targets between 6820 and 7600.

S&P 500 Index (SPX) Chart: Large Elliott Wave Ending Diagonal formation, showing the market currently in its final 5th wave with potential continuation to 2026 targets (6820-7600). 

Image by I/O Fund 

As you can see above, the S&P 500 is likely in the final stages of a multi-year diagonal pattern. Note the overlapping swings in both directions, as well as the very deep 4th wave drop in March of 2025. This puts us squarely in the 5th wave of this pattern. Based on the current price action, the below counts best projects where this diagonal can go: 

  • Green Count –The move off the April low of this year is the A wave within the final 5th wave. We should see some type of B wave correction in the coming weeks to months, followed by a final, multi-month blow off swing into 2026. This will complete the diagonal pattern, setting the market up for a period of volatility.
  • Blue Count – We are in the final swings of the 5th wave. As long as 6345 and then 6205 holds on any further weakness, we should see a continued push higher into Q4 with target between 6820 – 7280. 

The green count is further supported by the NASDAQ-100. It too appears to be tracing a diagonal pattern.  

NASDAQ-100 (QQQ) chart illustrating a multi-year Elliott Wave Ending Diagonal pattern in its final stages, signaling a major bull cycle ending in 2026.

NASDAQ-100 (QQQ) Chart: Multi-Year Ending Diagonal pattern (Elliott Wave Theory) in its final stages, projecting a major bull cycle end in 2026. 

Image by I/O Fund 

While we do have a full 5 waves in place, which is enough to complete the pattern in full, note the symmetry of this final 5th wave compared to the 1st wave. To fill out the pattern completely, the NASDAQ-100 suggests a correction and continuation into 2026.

Secular Bear Warning: The Market Reality After an Ending Diagonal Completes 

Another key element of diagonal patterns is their placement within a trend. They can only show up in two places: (1) a leading diagonal is the 1st move higher within a larger trend that is starting. In other words, it is wave 1 in a newly developing 5-wave pattern; (2) an ending diagonal is the final move within a completing 5-wave pattern. In other words, it is wave 5 within a larger 5 wave pattern that is close to completion.

This begs the question: if the current bull cycle we are in is the start of a much larger 5 wave pattern, or the end move within a larger 5 wave pattern? If we zoom out on the larger pattern in play, it appears to be an ending diagonal within the secular bull market that started in 2009.

S&P 500 (SPX) long-term chart showing the I/O Fund’s analysis of the secular bull market that began in March 2009, currently in its final 5th Elliott Wave.

S&P 500 (SPX) Long-Term Chart: The I/O Fund's Analysis of the Secular Bull Market (March 2009) in its Final 5th Elliott Wave. 

Image by I/O Fund 

The above monthly chart of the S&P 500 shows a very clear and distinct secular bull market that took the shape of a 5-wave uptrend. Note how the bull market in 2017 was marked with peak momentum, followed by the vertical move after the COVID low. We have continued to see the market make new highs on weaker momentum, which is characteristic of 5th waves.  

Most importantly, though the bear market in 2022 was difficult, as you can see on the chart above, it was merely a bump in the road of the larger bull trend. In short, it was not deep enough, nor long enough to constitute a reasonable consolidation of the secular bull market that started in 2009. In other words, if one were to say the 5-wave pattern, and secular bull market, ended at the start of 2022, we would need to see a consolidation/retrace that matches the length of the uptrend in both price and time. This does not meet that criteria, which tells me 2022 was a correction within the on-going secular bull market.

mid prompt

This leads me to believe that the diagonal pattern we are in is an ending diagonal, which  once completes, will lead to a period of volatility and consolidation that most investors are not prepared for. 

What this suggests is that after the secular bull market completes, we will enter a very normal period of consolidation, known as a secular bear market. Though this may seem impossible, as we have been trained since 2010 to stay long and buy every dip, it is a very normal part of investing. In fact, since 1900, the market has spent 56% of the time in a consolidation period.

S&P 500 historical chart analyzing consolidation periods since 1900, showing that the market spends over half its time (56%) in sideways or bearish phases following extended secular bull markets.

S&P 500 Historical Chart: Analyzing Consolidation Periods Since 1900. Market spends over half its time (56%) in sideways/bearish phases following extended Secular Bull Markets. 

Image by I/O Fund 

Furthermore, the average secular bull market since 1900 has lasted for an average 11.3 years and returns 774%. The current secular bull market has lasted for 16.6 years and returned just over 918%, well over the average, and the 2nd most profitable secular bull market in the last 125 years.

Historical S&P 500 bull markets chart analyzing duration and gains, emphasizing the current secular bull market that began in 2009 as the second longest and most profitable in modern history.

Historical S&P 500 Bull Markets: Analysis of duration and gain, highlighting the current 2009-starting secular bull market as the second longest and most profitable in modern history. 

Image by I/O Fund 

The below analyzes the last secular bear market between 2000 – 2009 to gain a better understanding of how to best participate in stocks in extended periods of volatility. Like Apple at the turn of the century, there are similar correlations with Nvidia, which we reveal in our long-term chart below.  

Subscribe for Free Below to see how to best survive an extended period of volatility:  

  • Understand why Apple’s lesson, not Cisco, was the most important of the 2000 – 2003 bear market. 
  • Get a glimpse into how we plan to navigate challenging times if they manifest.  
  • Get access to the big picture of Nvidia’s potential path higher, and why it appears to be in a secular uptrend for many years to come, unlike the S&P 500. 

The I/O Fund plans to approach the current market with a well-defined exit strategy. Learn below the strategies we are eyeing should volatility increase. 

From Cisco to Apple to Nvidia: How Market Leaders Emerge Through Secular Bear Markets 

This becomes evident when we analyze the last secular bear market from 2000 – 2009. The S&P 500 topped in a dot.com bubble in March of 2000. It traded sideways until April of 2013, at which point it reclaimed the March 2000 high and never looked back. For 13 years, the market went nowhere and gave investors two greater than 50% drawdowns, in one of the most challenging periods in modern markets.

S&P 500 chart illustrating the post-Dotcom crash period, highlighting a 13-year secular bear market and consolidation phase from 2000 to 2013 following the 2000 market peak.

S&P 500 Post-Dotcom Crash: Chart illustrating the 13-year secular bear market and consolidation phase (2000–2013) following the 2000 market peak. 

Image by I/O Fund 

The poster child of the dot.com bust is Cisco (CSCO). This is a story everyone is familiar with, which is incessantly used as a dire warning about chasing bubbles. Cisco was the leader of the dot.com bull run, returning nearly 700% from the 1998 low to the 2000 top. It then fell 90% and took more than 22 years to reclaim its 2000 top.  

However, no one talks about Apple during the same time, another beneficiary to the dot.com run, returning nearly 1100% during the same period, and then dropping 83% from peak to trough. Interestingly, after putting in a low April of 2003, in less than 2 years, Apple reclaimed its March 2000 top in January of 2005.  

Even more interesting, from January of 2005 to April of 2013, the moment when the S&P 500 reclaimed its March 2000 top, Apple was up over 1000% from its 2000 peak.

Chart comparing Apple stock’s recovery within 5 years after the Dotcom crash to the S&P 500’s prolonged 13-year consolidation phase from 2000 to 2013.

Apple vs S&P 500 (2000-2013): Chart showing Apple Stock's recovery in 5 years while the S&P 500 consolidated for 13 years. 

Image by I/O Fund 

The vital lesson Apple teaches us about normal and extended periods of volatility that occur in the markets is that not all stocks participate. The difference between Apple and Cisco is simple. Apple was one of the primary beneficiaries of the personal computer microtrend and then became the primary beneficiary of the most powerful microtrend in our lifetime – the smartphone. We went from no one having a smart phone in 2007 to nearly everyone in the world having a smartphone today, propelling Apple to becoming the most valuable company in the world – a title it held until recently.  

Technology and innovation do not pause because the stock market is in a secular bear market. These microtrends are multi-decade periods that push forward regardless of the stocks market, minting new leaders along the way.  

If we do see a period of heightened volatility, if the broad market does enter a multi-year consolidation period, like Apple in 2000, the AI microtrend should push forward. This will likely create similar winners, as any deep drawdowns due to macro forces would be viewed as cyclical drawdowns within secular uptrends.  

This is not only anecdotal, but can be seen in various AI charts, like Nvidia, for example. While the most likely interpretation of the S&P 500, shown above, is that we do enter a secular bear market in the coming years, Nvidia, which has been the primary beneficiary of the AI microtrend, appears to be in a secular uptrend for many years to come.  Like Apple from 2007 through 2018, any major drop in price due to macro events will likely be a cyclical drawdown within a secular uptrend.

Nvidia (NVDA) AI stock forecast chart based on I/O Fund’s long-term Elliott Wave count, projecting continued secular uptrend toward Wave V targets, contrasting with the consolidating S&P 500.

Nvidia (NVDA) AI Stock Forecast: I/O Fund's long-term Elliott Wave count projects continued secular uptrend towards its Wave V targets, unlike the consolidating S&P 500. 

Image by I/O Fund 

In conclusion, less than one-fifth of the U.S. economy is expanding, yet this small segment is growing at such a blistering pace—driven by AI-related spending—that it continues to hold up the rest of the economy. We are living through unprecedented times, with no true historical corollary to today’s economic backdrop. 

Of course, this is not the first time such a statement has been made. Every cycle feels unique and unparalleled in the moment. What never changes, however, are human emotions and the way the herd responds to periods of greed and exuberance. 

This is precisely what technical analysis was designed to measure—the repeatable and consistent price patterns that develop in real time. These patterns appear across all time frames, in every market, and throughout market history. According to these patterns, it appears we are now in the final swings of a multi-year ending diagonal—also known as a termination pattern—the final phase of a major uptrend 

That said, this pattern still has the potential to extend into 2026, which remains our expectation as long as key support levels hold. Next week, we’ll dive into another powerful—yet often overlooked—force shaping capital markets: market cycles. We’ll uncover what these cycles are signaling for equities into year-end and 2026, reveal the hidden rhythm behind major turning points, and highlight the critical support levels that must hold to keep our intermediate-term bullish outlook intact. 

This week, Beth Kindig spoiled I/O Fund Members with a 43+ page report on the Top 15 AI Stocks for Q4 2025Top 15 AI Stocks for Q4 2025.  This in-depth report ranks 15 key stocks that are leading the three most powerful trends in AI with many lesser-known names. Not one FAAMG made the list. Last quarter’s report highlighted Bloom Energy, a stock up over 800% from our April buys.  Learn more here.

Please note: The I/O Fund conducts research and draws conclusions for the Fund’s positions. We then share that information with our readers. This is not a guarantee of a stock’s performance. Please consult your personal financial advisor before buying any stock in the companies mentioned in this analysis.

Recommended Reading:

  • TSM Stock and the AI Bubble: 40%+ AI Accelerator Growth Fuels the Valuation Debate
  • Micron Stock Up 120% YTD: What the HBM Memory Leader Plans for 2026
  • Palantir Stock Forecast 2025: Can PLTR Justify Its High Valuation?
  • Nvidia Stock Forecast: The Path to $6 Trillion
Posted in Broad Market TodayLeave a Comment on Decoding the S&P 500: When Human Sentiment Meets Artificial Intelligence

Posts navigation

Older posts

Recent Posts

  • The IPO Glut of 2020: Why Valuations Have Gone Too Far
  • Zoom Discusses Two Important Catalysts In Q1 Earnings
  • Three Risk Management Tools the I/O Fund Offers
  • Micron Is Up 900%. Here’s Why the AI Memory Trade May Still Have Room to Run
  • Credo: Reliability Leader Aggressively Moves into Optics

Recent Comments

No comments to show.

Archives

  • June 2026
  • May 2026
  • April 2026
  • March 2026
  • February 2026
  • January 2026
  • December 2025
  • November 2025
  • October 2025
  • September 2025
  • August 2025
  • July 2025
  • June 2025
  • May 2025
  • April 2025
  • March 2025
  • February 2025
  • January 2025
  • December 2024
  • November 2024
  • October 2024
  • September 2024
  • August 2024
  • July 2024
  • June 2024
  • May 2024
  • April 2024
  • March 2024
  • February 2024
  • January 2024
  • December 2023
  • November 2023
  • October 2023
  • September 2023
  • August 2023
  • July 2023
  • June 2023
  • May 2023
  • April 2023
  • March 2023
  • February 2023
  • January 2023
  • December 2022
  • November 2022
  • October 2022
  • September 2022
  • August 2022
  • July 2022
  • June 2022
  • May 2022
  • April 2022
  • March 2022
  • February 2022
  • January 2022
  • December 2021
  • November 2021
  • October 2021
  • September 2021
  • August 2021
  • July 2021
  • June 2021
  • May 2021
  • April 2021
  • March 2021
  • February 2021
  • January 2021
  • December 2020
  • November 2020
  • October 2020
  • September 2020
  • August 2020
  • July 2020
  • June 2020
  • May 2020
  • April 2020
  • March 2020
  • February 2020
  • January 2020
  • December 2019
  • November 2019
  • October 2019
  • September 2019
  • August 2019
  • July 2019
  • June 2019
  • May 2019
  • April 2019
  • March 2019
  • February 2019
  • January 2019
  • December 2018
  • November 2018
  • October 2018
  • September 2018
  • August 2018
  • July 2018
  • June 2018
  • May 2018
  • April 2018
  • February 2018
  • January 2018

Categories

  • 5G
  • About
  • Accounting Tips
  • AdTech
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • Ai Platforms
  • AI Stocks
  • AI Stocks
  • Analysts
  • Application Monitoring
  • Application Monitoring
  • Applications
  • Applications
  • Applications
  • Applications
  • Applications
  • Applications
  • Applications
  • AR
  • Audit Reports
  • Autonomous Vehicles
  • Autonomous Vehicles
  • Autonomous Vehicles
  • Autonomous Vehicles
  • Autonomous Vehicles
  • Autonomous Vehicles
  • Autonomous Vehicles
  • Avod
  • Avod
  • Battery Charging
  • Bear Market
  • Bitcoin
  • Bitcoin
  • Bitcoin
  • Bitcoin
  • Bitcoin
  • Bitcoin
  • Bitcoin
  • Blockchain
  • Blockchain
  • Blockchain
  • Blockchain
  • Blockchain
  • Blockchain
  • Blockchain
  • Broad Market Today
  • Bull Market
  • Bull Market
  • Chainlink
  • Chainlink
  • Chainlink
  • Chainlink
  • China Stocks
  • Cloud
  • Cloud Infrastructure
  • Cloud Infrastructure
  • Cloud Infrastructure
  • Cloud Infrastructure
  • Cloud Infrastructure
  • Cloud Infrastructure
  • Cloud Infrastructure
  • Cloud Platforms
  • Cloud Platforms
  • Cloud Software
  • Cloud Software
  • Cloud Software
  • Cloud Software
  • Cloud Software
  • Cloud Software
  • Cloud Technology
  • Company
  • Company
  • Console Gaming
  • Console Gaming
  • Console Gaming
  • Consumer
  • Consumer
  • Consumer
  • Consumer
  • Consumer
  • Consumer
  • Consumer
  • Consumer
  • Consumer
  • Consumer
  • Consumer
  • Consumer
  • Consumer
  • Consumer
  • Consumer Tech
  • Corrections
  • Crypto Investment
  • Ctv
  • Ctv
  • Ctv
  • Ctv
  • Ctv
  • Ctv
  • Ctv
  • Ctv
  • Ctv
  • Ctv
  • Cybersecurity
  • Cybersecurity
  • Cybersecurity
  • Cybersecurity
  • Cybersecurity
  • Cybersecurity
  • Cybersecurity
  • Cybersecurity
  • Cybersecurity
  • Cybersecurity
  • Cybersecurity
  • Cybersecurity
  • Data
  • Data Analytics
  • Data Analytics
  • Data Analytics
  • Data Center
  • Data Center
  • Data Center
  • Data Center
  • Data Center
  • Data Center
  • Data Center
  • Data Center
  • Data Center
  • Data Center
  • Data Center
  • Data Center
  • Data Center
  • Data Center
  • Data Center
  • Data Center and Processing
  • Data Warehousing
  • Data Warehousing
  • Data Warehousing
  • Data Warehousing
  • Databases
  • Databases
  • Databases
  • Databases
  • Dating
  • Defi
  • Digital Ads
  • Digital Ads
  • Digital Ads
  • Digital Ads
  • Digital Ads
  • Digital Ads
  • Digital Ads
  • Digital Ads
  • Digital Ads
  • Digital Ads
  • Digital Ads
  • Digital Ads
  • Digital Ads
  • Digital Ads
  • E-Commerce
  • Earning Updates
  • Earning Updates
  • Earning Updates
  • Earning Updates
  • Earning Updates
  • Earnings Report
  • Earnings Report
  • Earnings Report
  • Earnings Report
  • Earnings Report
  • Earnings Report
  • Earnings Report
  • Earnings Report
  • ECommerce
  • Electric Vehicles
  • Electric Vehicles
  • Electric Vehicles
  • Electric Vehicles
  • Electric Vehicles
  • Electric Vehicles
  • Electric Vehicles
  • Energy Stocks
  • Enterprise
  • Enterprise
  • Enterprise
  • Enterprise
  • Enterprise
  • Enterprise
  • Enterprise
  • Enterprise
  • Enterprise
  • Ethereum
  • Events1
  • Events1
  • Exchange
  • Faq
  • Finance
  • Financial Analysis
  • Financial Analysis
  • Financial Analysis
  • Financial Analysis
  • Financial Analysis
  • Financial Analysis
  • Financial Analysis
  • Financial Analysis
  • Financial Analysis
  • Financial Analysis
  • Financial Analysis
  • Financial Analysis
  • Financial Markets
  • FinTech
  • Fundamental Analysis
  • Gambling
  • Gaming
  • Genomics
  • Glossary
  • Green Energy
  • Growth Stocks
  • Growth Stocks
  • Growth Stocks
  • Headsets
  • Headsets
  • Health Tech
  • Hydrogen
  • Identity
  • Identity
  • Identity
  • Inflation
  • Inflation
  • Inflation
  • Internet of Things
  • Interviews
  • Interviews
  • Interviews
  • Interviews
  • Investing
  • Investing
  • Ltbh
  • Ltbh
  • Ltbh
  • Ltbh
  • Ltbh
  • Macro Trends
  • Macro Trends
  • Market Trends
  • Market Trends
  • Market Trends
  • Market Trends
  • Market Trends
  • Market Trends
  • Market Trends
  • Market Updates
  • Market Updates
  • Market Updates
  • Market Updates
  • Market Updates
  • Market Updates
  • Market Updates
  • Market Updates
  • Market Updates
  • Market Updates
  • Media
  • Membership
  • Mining
  • Mobile
  • Mobile
  • Mobile
  • Mobile
  • Mobile Gaming
  • Mobile Gaming
  • Mobile Gaming
  • Multimedia
  • Music Streaming
  • NVDA | NVIDIA Corporation
  • Performance Updates
  • Pin Content
  • Podcasts
  • Podcasts
  • Podcasts
  • Portfolio
  • Premium Research
  • Press Releases
  • Press Releases
  • Productivity
  • Productivity
  • Productivity
  • Productivity
  • Productivity
  • Productivity
  • Productivity
  • Reports and Whitepapers
  • Research Services Preview
  • Resources
  • Resources
  • Semiconductor Stocks
  • Semiconductors
  • Semiconductors
  • Semiconductors
  • Semiconductors
  • Semiconductors
  • Semiconductors
  • Semiconductors
  • Semiconductors
  • Semiconductors
  • Semiconductors
  • Semiconductors
  • Semiconductors
  • Semiconductors
  • Social Media
  • Social Media
  • Social Media
  • Social Media
  • Social Media
  • Social Media
  • Social Media
  • Software
  • Software
  • Software
  • Software
  • Software
  • Software
  • Software
  • Software
  • Software
  • Software
  • Software
  • Software
  • Software
  • Software
  • Software
  • Solar
  • Solar
  • Stock Analysis PDFs
  • Stock Updates
  • Stock Updates (Blogs)
  • Supplychain
  • Supplychain
  • Supplychain
  • Supplychain
  • Supplychain
  • Supplychain
  • Svod
  • Svod
  • Svod
  • Svod
  • Svod
  • Svod
  • Tech Podcast
  • Tech Stock News
  • Tech Stock News
  • Tech Stock News
  • Tech Stock News
  • Tech Stock News
  • Tech Stocks
  • Tech Stocks
  • Tech Stocks
  • Tech Stocks
  • Tech Stocks
  • Tech Stocks
  • Tech Stocks
  • Tech Stocks
  • Tech Stocks
  • Tech Stocks
  • Tech Stocks
  • Tech Stocks
  • Tech Stocks
  • Tech Stocks
  • Technical Analysis
  • Telehealth
  • Telehealth
  • Telehealth
  • Telehealth
  • Testing Equipment
  • Testing Equipment
  • Top Tech Stock News
  • Travel
  • Trends Report
  • Tutorials
  • Uncategorized
  • Updates
  • Updates
  • Updates
  • Video
  • Video
  • Video
  • Video
  • Video Footage
  • VR
  • Webinar Alerts
  • Webinar Alerts
  • Webinars
Proudly powered by WordPress | Theme: iofund by iofund.co.uk.